Issue for Bid – VOLUME 2 OF 3 – SPECIFICATION ......2019/06/25 · 23 0923.11 Control Valves MEPIS 06/25/19 23 1123 Facility Natural-Gas Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 23 2113 Hydronic

Project: Hanson Park Health Center

5501 W. Fullerton Ave., Chicago, IL 60639Contract No. H19-0010

PROJECT MANUAL

For The: Cook County Health & Hospitals System Department of Facilities

Under:Board of Directors of the Cook County Health & Hospitals System

Issued By:Office of the Chief Procurement Officer Supply Chain Management

Issue for Bid – June 25, 2019

BID DEPOSIT TO BE 1% OF TOTAL BID BIDS TO BE EXECUTED IN TRIPLICATE

ALL SIGNATURES TO BE SWORN TO BEFORE A NOTARY PUBLIC

VOLUME 2 OF 3 – SPECIFICATION DIVISIONS 00 THROUGH 14INCLUDES TABLE OF CONTENTS

Prepared By:

Cook County Health Issued for Bids Hanson Park Health Center 06/25/19 Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1 CCH HANSON PARK HEALTH CENTER The following listed documents comprise the project manual for the project listed above. Where numerical sequence of sections is interrupted, such interruptions are intentional. The complete Project Manual for this project consists of these entire Volumes 1, 2, and 3 which must not be separated for any reason. The Architect and Owner disclaim any responsibility for any assumptions made by a contractor or subcontractor who does not receive a complete Project Manual, including all sections listed in the Table of Contents.

Design Issue TABLE OF CONTENTS Firm Date

VOLUME 1

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS See the table of contents in Volume 1 for all procurement and contracting requirements.

VOLUME 2 00 0010 Table of Contents H&R 06/25/19 00 3132 Geotechnical Data H&R 06/25/19 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 Summary H&R 06/25/19 01 2500 Substitution Procedures H&R 06/25/19 01 2501 Substitution Request Form H&R 06/25/19 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures H&R 06/25/19 01 2900 Payment Procedures H&R 06/25/19 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination H&R 06/25/19 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation H&R 06/25/19 01 3233 Photographic Documentation H&R 06/25/19 01 3300 Submittal Procedures H&R 06/25/19 01 3516 Alteration Project Procedures H&R 06/25/19 01 4000 Quality Requirements H&R 06/25/19 01 4200 References H&R 06/25/19 01 5639 Tree Protection & Trimming TE 06/25/19 01 8113 Sustainable Design Requirements H&R 06/25/19 01 9113 Building Systems Commissioning SSRCx 06/25/19



01 9115 Building Enclosure Commissioning SSRCx 03/22/19 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete H&R 06/25/19 03 5416 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment H&R 06/25/19 DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing H&R 06/25/19 05 3100 Steel Decking H&R 06/25/19 05 5000 Metal Fabrications H&R 06/25/19 05 5113 Metal Pan Stairs H&R 06/25/19 05 5813 Column Covers H&R 06/25/19 05 7100 Decorative Metal Stairs H&R 06/25/19 05 7313 Glazed Decorative Metal Railings H&R 06/25/19 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry H&R 06/25/19 06 1063 Wood Fence TE 06/25/19 06 4116 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets H&R 06/25/19 06 4216 Flush Wood Paneling H&R 06/25/19 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2100 Thermal Insulation H&R 06/25/19 07 2119 Foamed-In-Place Insulation H&R 06/25/19 07 2616 Below Slab Vapor Barriers H&R 06/25/19 07 5423 Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing H&R 06/25/19 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim H&R 06/25/19 07 7200 Roof Accessories H&R 06/25/19 07 8100 Applied Fireproofing H&R 06/25/19 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping H&R 06/25/19 07 8443 Joint Firestopping H&R 06/25/19 07 9200 Joint Sealants H&R 06/25/19 07 9219 Acoustical Joint Sealants H&R 06/25/19 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames H&R 06/25/19 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors H&R 06/25/19 08 3113 Access Doors and Frames H&R 06/25/19 08 4213 Aluminum-Framed Entrances H&R 06/25/19 08 4423 Structural Sealant Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls H&R 06/25/19 08 7100 Door Hardware H&R 06/25/19 08 8000 Glazing H&R 06/25/19 08 9120 Fixed Aluminum Louvers H&R 06/25/19



DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing H&R 06/25/19 09 2900 Gypsum Board H&R 06/25/19 09 3013 Ceramic Tiling H&R 06/25/19 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings H&R 06/25/19 09 5423 Linear Metal Ceilings H&R 06/25/19 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories H&R 06/25/19 09 6519 Resilient Tile Flooring H&R 06/25/19 09 7210 Wall Coverings H&R 06/25/19 09 9113 Exterior Painting H&R 06/25/19 09 9123 Interior Painting H&R 06/25/19 09 9653 Elastomeric Coatings H&R 06/25/19 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 1419 Dimensional Letter Signage H&R 06/25/19 10 1423 Panel Signage H&R 06/25/19 10 2113.14 Stainless-Steel Toilet Compartments H&R 06/25/19 10 2600 Wall and Door Protection H&R 06/25/19 10 2800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories H&R 06/25/19 10 4413 Fire Protection Cabinets H&R 06/25/19 10 4416 Fire Extinguishers H&R 06/25/19 10 8213 Prefabricated Metal Screen Walls H&R 06/25/19 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 2413 Roller Window Shades H&R 06/25/19 12 3661.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops H&R 06/25/19 12 4813 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames H&R 06/25/19 12 9300 Site Furniture TE 06/25/19 DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 2100 Electric Traction Elevators H&R 06/25/19 14 2113 Electric Traction Freight Elevators H&R 06/25/19

VOLUME 3 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 0513 Common Motor Requirements for Fire-Suppression Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19 21 0517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 21 0518 Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 21 0523 General-Duty Valves for Fire Protection Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 21 0529 Hangers and Supports for Fire-Suppression Piping & Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19 21 0548.13 Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19



21 0553 Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19 21 1100 Facility Fire Suppression Water-Service Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 21 1119 Fire Department Connections MEPIS 06/25/19 21 1313 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 21 1316 Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 21 3113 Electric-Drive Centrifugal Fire Pumps MEPIS 06/25/19 21 3413 Pressure-Maintenance Pumps MEPIS 06/25/19 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 0513 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0517 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0518 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0519 Meters and Gages For Plumbing Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0523.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0523.14 Check Valves for Plumbing Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0523.15 Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0529 Hangers and Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0548.13 Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping And Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping And Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0716 Plumbing Equipment Insulation MEPIS 06/25/19 22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1116 Facility Water Distribution Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1116 Domestic Water Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1123.13 Domestic Water Packaged Booster Pumps MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1123.21 In-Line Domestic Water Pumps MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1319.13 Sanitary Drains MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1323 Sanitary Waste Interceptors MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1329 Sanitary Sewerage Pumps MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1423 Storm Drainage Piping Specialties MEPIS 06/25/19 22 1429 Sump Pumps MEPIS 06/25/19 22 3400 Fuel-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters MEPIS 06/25/19 22 4213.13 Commercial Water Closets MEPIS 06/25/19 22 4213.16 Commercial Urinals MEPIS 06/25/19 22 4216.13 Commercial Lavatories MEPIS 06/25/19 22 4216.16 Commercial Sinks MEPIS 06/25/19 22 4300 Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures MEPIS 06/25/19 22 4500 Emergency Plumbing Fixtures MEPIS 06/25/19 22 4713 Drinking Fountains MEPIS 06/25/19 22 6113 Compressed-Air Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities MEPIS 06/25/19



22 6213 Vacuum Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities MEPIS 06/25/19 DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 0513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0518 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0519 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0548 Vibration Controls for HVAC MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0713 Duct Insulation MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0719 HVAC Piping Insulation MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0923 Variable Frequency Controllers (Drives) MEPIS 06/25/19 23 0923.11 Control Valves MEPIS 06/25/19 23 1123 Facility Natural-Gas Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 23 2113 Hydronic Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 23 2116 Hydronic Piping Specialties MEPIS 06/25/19 23 2123 Hydronic Pumps MEPIS 06/25/19 23 2300 Refrigerant Piping MEPIS 06/25/19 23 2500 HVAC Water Treatment MEPIS 06/25/19 23 3113 Metal Ducts MEPIS 06/25/19 23 3300 Air Duct Accessories MEPIS 06/25/19 23 3423 HVAC Power Ventilators MEPIS 06/25/19 23 3600 Air Terminal Units MEPIS 06/25/19 23 3713.13 Air Diffusers MEPIS 06/25/19 23 3713.23 Registers, and Gilles MEPIS 06/25/19 23 5216 Condensing Boilers MEPIS 06/25/19 23 7416.13 Packaged, Large-Capacity, Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units MEPIS 06/25/19 23 8126 Split-System Air-Conditioners MEPIS 06/25/19 23 8236 Fin-Tube Radiation Heaters MEPIS 06/25/19 23 8239 .13 Cabinet Unit Heaters MEPIS 06/25/19 DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 0500 General Electrical Provisions MEPIS 06/25/19 26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables MEPIS 06/25/19 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 26 0533 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 26 0544 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling MEPIS 06/25/19 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 26 0573 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study MEPIS 06/25/19 26 0923 Lighting Control Devices MEPIS 06/25/19



26 0943 Network Control Devices MEPIS 06/25/19 26 2200 Low-Voltage Transformers MEPIS 06/25/19 26 2416 Panelboards MEPIS 06/25/19 26 2726 Wiring Devices MEPIS 06/25/19 26 2813 Fuses MEPIS 06/25/19 26 2816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers MEPIS 06/25/19 26 2913 Enclosed Controllers MEPIS 06/25/19 26 3323.11 Central Battery Equipment for Emergency Lighting MEPIS 06/25/19 26 4313 Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits MEPIS 06/25/19 26 5100 Interior Lighting with LED MEPIS 06/25/19 26 5600 Exterior Lighting MEPIS 06/25/19 26 5613 Lighting Poles and Standards MEPIS 06/25/19 26 5619 LED Exterior Lighting MEPIS 06/25/19 DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS 27 0200 General Requirements MEPIS 06/25/19 27 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 27 0528 Pathways for Communications Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 27 0529 Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 27 0532 Firestopping for Telecommunications Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 27 0543 Underground Ducts & Raceways - Communication Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 27 0544 Sleeves & Seals for Communications Pathways & Cabling MEPIS 06/25/19 27 0553 Identification for Communications Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 27 1119 Communications Termination Blocks & Patch Panels MEPIS 06/25/19 27 1513 Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling MEPIS 06/25/19 27 1543 Work Area Faceplate Wall Plates & Surface Mount Boxes MEPIS 06/25/19 27 1543.10 Communications Copper Jack Information Outlet Connects MEPIS 06/25/19 27 5116 Public Address and Mass Notification Systems MEPIS 06/25/19 27 5223 Nurse Call MEPIS 06/25/19 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 281300 Access Control MEPIS 06/25/19 282300 Video Surveillance MEPIS 06/25/19 283111 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System MEPIS 06/25/19 DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 1000 Site Clearing TE 06/25/19 31 2000 Earth Moving TE 06/25/19 31 2501 Erosion And Sedimentation Control TE 06/25/19 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS



32 1216 Asphalt Paving TE 06/25/19 32 1313 Concrete Paving TE 06/25/19 32 1400 Unit Paving TE 06/25/19 32 3119 Ornamental Fence TE 06/25/19 32 9000 Sodding TE 06/25/19 32 9300 Planting TE 06/25/19 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 1100 Water Utility Distribution Piping TE 06/25/19 33 3100 Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping TE 06/25/19 33 4100 Storm Utility Drainage Piping TE 06/25/19 APPENDICES: 01 Geotechnical Report by GSG Consultants, Inc. GSG 12/29/17

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Cook County Health Issued for Bid Hanson Park Health Center 06/25/19

Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849

GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00 3132 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 3132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA

1.1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA

A. A geotechnical investigation report for the Project, prepared by GSG Consultants, dated

December 29, 2017, is available for viewing as appended to this Document.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Document 002113 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for

examination of Project site and existing conditions.

END OF DOCUMENT 00 3132

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1

Cook County Health Issued for Bid Hanson Park Health Center 06/25/19 Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849

SECTION 01 1000 – SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Owner-furnished products. 4. Access to site. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and Drawing conventions. 7. Miscellaneous provisions.


1. Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Cook County Health & Hospital Systems Hanson Park Health Clinic.

1. Project Location: 5501 W. Fullerton Ave. Chicago, IL 60639.

B. Architect: Holabird & Root, LLC, 140 South Dearborn, Suite 500, Chicago, IL 60603

C. Architect's Consultants: Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. Clinic Planners consultant. 2. Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing Engineering consultant. 3. Fire Protection. 4. Civil Engineering consultant.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. Interior build-out of an outpatient medical clinic on the ground floor of an existing building, roof repair work, and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents.

2. Typical exam room mock-up as indicated on Drawings or if not indicted, as directed by

Architect.

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 2


B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.4 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections.

B. Owner-Furnished Products:

1. Clinic equipment as indicated on Drawings.

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits. Do not disturb portions

of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

D. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and

hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 3


1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours

Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and

vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site

is not permitted. 1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 4


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

1.9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Document Discrepancies:

1. Should discrepancies appear among Contract Documents, or if Contractor has any question regarding the meaning of Contract Documents, Contractor must request Architect’s interpretation and clarification before proceeding with work.

2. If Contractor fails to make such request, no excuse will thereafter be entertained for failure to carry out work in satisfactory manner.

3. Drawings and Specifications: Should any conflict occur in or between Drawings and Specifications, Contractor is deemed to have estimated on, and agreed to provide the greater quantity or better quality of materials and work unless the contractor shall have, before submission of proposal or bid, asked for and obtained written decision of Architect as to which method or materials will be required.



END OF SECTION

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 1

Cook County Health Issued for Bid/Permit

Hanson Park Health Center 04/29/19


SECTION 01 2500 – SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 01 6000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to

changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or

unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not

required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to

Contractor or Owner.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or

fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title

and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be

provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate

contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of

the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.

Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific

features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work

specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and

installation procedures.





e. Samples, where applicable or requested.f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.

g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.

i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from ICC-ES or other agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's

letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays

in delivery.k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible

with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated

results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.

Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within

15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or

documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution

with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility

tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.5 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved

substitutions.

1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for

change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related

submittals.





1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect

will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these

requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified

product provided for compliance with LEED requirements.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.

e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.

f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.



END OF SECTION

http://www.arcomnet.com/sustainable_design.aspx?topic=115

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1

Cook County Health Issued for Bid



Cook County Health Hanson Park Health Center

TO: Bryan A. Hadley, AIAHolabird & Root, LLC

140 South Dearborn, Suite 500

Chicago, Illinois 60603

INSTALLER:Name of Installer

PHONE:

ADDRESS:

1. Specification Section: Paragraph:

2. Reason for Substitution:

3. Proposed Substitute:

A. Name and Model No.:

B. Manufacturer:

Address:

Phone Number and Person to Contact:

C. Applicable reference standards:

4. Attachments:

A. Product Information:

1. Applicable performance and test data.

2. Color chart, if applicable.3. Samples, if requested by Architect.

B. Sample product warranty, if applicable.

C. Attach installation instructions.

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 2




5. Manufacturer's Reputation: Attach evidence of manufacturer qualifications and reputation for

prompt delivery and efficiency in servicing products, as applicable.

6. Comparison: Attach an itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified,

including test performance data.

7. Cost Data: Attach accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product specified.

8. Changes in Work: Attach data relating to changes required in other work to permit use of proposed

substitution and changes required in construction schedule.

9. Schedule Impact: Attach a statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's

Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the

effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time.

10. Previous Installation: Attach list of not less than 5 similar projects on which proposed substitution

was used. List name and address of project, date of installation, and name, address, and phone

number of Architect.

A. List only projects in the Chicago area.

11. In making request for substitution, Contractor represents that:

A. It has examined the Drawings and Specifications and has determined that, to the best of its

knowledge, the proposed substitution is appropriate for the use intended in the Drawings and

Specifications, and will perform as well as or better than the specified product.

B. It will provide the same warranties for substitution as for product specified.

C. It will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, making such changes as may

be required for Work to be complete in all respects.

D. It waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which consequently become ap-

parent.

E. Cost data is complete and includes all related costs under its Contract.

Name of Manufacturer, Signature of Manufacturer's Representative DATE

Name of Installer, Signature of Installer's Representative DATE

Name of Prime Contractor, Signature of Prime Contractor's Representative DATE

Name of Coordinating Contractor, Signature of Coordinating Contractor’s Representative DATE

END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600 - 1




SECTION 01 2600 – CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processingContract modifications.


1. Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling

requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not

involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,

"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop

work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after

receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the

Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data

to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an

extension of the Contract Time.e. Quotation Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600 - 2




B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to theContract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the

Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the

proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to

substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,

and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the

Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed

change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order

for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on

AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a

change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It

also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the

Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by theConstruction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to

substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.



END OF SECTION

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900 - 1




SECTION 01 2900 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and processApplications for Payment.


1. Section 01 2600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for

handling changes to the Contract.

2. Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements

governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract

Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's

Applications for Payment.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's

construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as

separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than

seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for

the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.c. Architect's project number.

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project





Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts

in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under principal subcontracts for Project closeout

requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and

subcontract amount.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated

and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,

include evidence of insurance.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.

Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by

measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine

quantities.

8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual

work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values

or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result

in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent

with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of SubstantialCompletion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement

between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application

for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by

Architect.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form

for Applications for Payment.





D. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications

for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete

applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,

whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at

time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last

day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project

acceleration.

F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or

equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items

stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of

surety to payment, for stored materials.2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.

Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include

overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previousApplications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application

for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and

remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment

to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of

lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate

information about application.

H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's

lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and

related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after

deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full

waivers.





3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers.4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from

every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is

lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.

I. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of values.

3. Sustainable design submittal for project materials cost data.

4. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).

5. Products list (preliminary if not final).

6. Sustainable design action plans.

7. Schedule of unit prices (if any).

8. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).

9. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

10. List of Contractor's principal consultants.

11. Copies of building permits.

12. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work.

13. Initial progress report.

14. Report of preconstruction conference.

15. Include the following if not previously submitted:

a. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

b. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion

for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously

for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

K. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final

Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted

and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."

5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."

6. Evidence that claims have been settled.





7. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed

responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

8. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.



END OF SECTION

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND

COORDINATION

01 3100 - 1




SECTION 01 3100 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures.2. Coordination drawings.

3. Requests for Information (RFIs).

4. Project Web site.5. Project meetings.


1. Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 01 7300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and

field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or

clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a

special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key

personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project

site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone

numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide

names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of

individuals assigned to Project.


COORDINATION

01 3100 - 2




1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office and by each

temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.4 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before

or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at

meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of

the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of

temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that

are designated as Owner's property.


COORDINATION

01 3100 - 3




1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in

individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop

Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is

required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than

one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed

data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.

Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of

various systems and components.

b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated

replacement of components during the life of the installation.

d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,

valves, and other controls.

e. Indicate required installation sequences.

f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance

requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed

resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations

will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and

mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of

visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan

drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical

and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to

accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict

between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans

and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical

equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door

floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and

similar items.6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:


COORDINATION

01 3100 - 4




a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including

insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access

doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-

alarm locations.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations.d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler

heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being

coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's

responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared

in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform

Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to

requirements in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures."

1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of

the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled byContractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or

interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.

2. Project number.3. Date.

4. Name of Contractor.5. Name of Architect.

6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

7. RFI subject.8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.


COORDINATION

01 3100 - 5




9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.12. Contractor's signature.

13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items

needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,

acceptable to Architect.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.

Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect

after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.

d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the ContractDocuments.

e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which caseArchitect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to

Section 01 2600 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI

response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name.2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Architect.4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.

5. RFI description.6. Date the RFI was submitted.


COORDINATION

01 3100 - 6




7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response

to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor

disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled

meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned,

including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Municiplity Meeting: Scheduel and conduct a mandatory meeting with the Village of North

Riverside Building Code Officials prior to the Notice to Proceed.

C. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting

construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after

execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,

Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;

suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the

conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to

the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

c. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

d. Lines of communications.

e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

f. Procedures for RFIs.

g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

j. Submittal procedures.

k. Sustainable design requirements.

l. Preparation of record documents.

m. Use of the premises.


COORDINATION

01 3100 - 7




n. Work restrictions.

o. Working hours.p. Owner's occupancy requirements.

q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.

s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.

t. Construction waste management and recycling.

u. Parking availability.

v. Office, work, and storage areas.

w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

x. First aid.

y. Security.

z. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting

minutes.

D. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise

Architect, and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFIs.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. Sustainable design requirements.

i. Review of mockups.

j. Possible conflicts.

k. Compatibility requirements.

l. Time schedules.

m. Weather limitations.

n. Manufacturer's written instructions.

o. Warranty requirements.

p. Compatibility of materials.

q. Acceptability of substrates.

r. Temporary facilities and controls.

s. Space and access limitations.

t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

u. Testing and inspecting requirements.

v. Installation procedures.

w. Coordination with other work.

x. Required performance results.


COORDINATION

01 3100 - 8




y. Protection of adjacent work.z. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties

requiring information.5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

E. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time

convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of

Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project

closeout.2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority,

Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors;

suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the

meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the

Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,

including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents.

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance.c. Submittal of written warranties.

d. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation.

e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.

f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.

g. Requirements for demonstration and training.h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment.

j. Submittal procedures.

k. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

l. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

F. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Owner's Commissioning Authority

and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with

current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities

shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar

with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.


COORDINATION

01 3100 - 9




3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,

in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction

behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to

do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and

subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.3) Status of submittals.

4) Status of sustainable design documentation.

5) Deliveries.6) Off-site fabrication.

7) Access.8) Site utilization.

9) Temporary facilities and controls.

10) Progress cleaning.11) Quality and work standards.

12) Status of correction of deficient items.13) Field observations.

14) Status of RFIs.

15) Status of proposal requests.16) Pending changes.

17) Status of Change Orders.18) Pending claims and disputes.

19) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the

meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue

revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.



END OF SECTION

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS

DOCUMENTATION

01 3200 - 1




SECTION 01 3200 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of

construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule.2. Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Construction schedule updating reports.

4. Daily construction reports.5. Material location reports.

6. Site condition reports.7. Special reports.


1. Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

2. Section 01 4000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,

and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume

time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned

early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as

scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise

approved by Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction

project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations

determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network

schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.


DOCUMENTATION

01 3200 - 2




F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a

jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet

schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the

early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without

adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of

an activity as scheduled.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.2. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of

schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction

period. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule

for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to

comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated)

and date on label.

E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for

each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource

loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,

late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,

or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in

ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.

4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed

until most recent Application for Payment.

F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.


DOCUMENTATION

01 3200 - 3

Cook County Health & Hospital System Issued for 25% CD

Hanson Park Clinic Project 03/22/19


G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

H. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.


A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and

reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of

Architect's request.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 01 3100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule,

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.

3. Discuss constraints, including interim milestones.4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.

5. Review submittal requirements and procedures.6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.

7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies.

8. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including

commissioning activities.9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.

10. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule,

progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.


DOCUMENTATION

01 3200 - 4




1.6 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting

using CPM scheduling.

1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor

employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques.

Submit qualifications.

2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress,

alleged delays, and time impact.

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final

completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an

early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main

element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless

specifically allowed by Architect.2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long

lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities

in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,

approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

a. Rooftop units.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in

Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times

in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch

list items and final completion.

D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and

as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery

date indicated in Section 01 1000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the

earliest possible delivery date.2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Seasonal variations.

b. Environmental control.


DOCUMENTATION

01 3200 - 5




3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of theWork, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards.

b. Submittals.c. Purchases.

d. Mockups.e. Fabrication.

f. Sample testing.

g. Deliveries.

h. Installation.

i. Tests and inspections.

j. Adjusting.

k. Curing.

E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the

following interim milestones:

1. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.

F. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.

On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and

actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. See Section 01 2900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

G. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or

commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues.2. Unanswered Requests for Information.

3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.4. Notations on returned submittals.

5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

H. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly

scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each

such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not

limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

I. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days

behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by

which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working


DOCUMENTATION

01 3200 - 6




hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by

which recovery will be accomplished.

J. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know

schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned

portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

1.7 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within

seven days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of

each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash

requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to

Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include

skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on

indicated activities.

C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded,

time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be

accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.

a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall

not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion

dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.

2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including

subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule

information.

3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting

progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.

4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days

and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the ContractTime.


DOCUMENTATION

01 3200 - 7




D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using

the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship

of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the

following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals.

b. Mobilization and demobilization.c. Purchase of materials.

d. Delivery.e. Fabrication.

f. Utility interruptions.

g. Installation.

h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.

i. Testing and commissioning.j. Punch list and final completion.

k. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim

completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract

milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled

network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary

to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate

paths with most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical

path.

5. Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on

the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval

prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main

subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance

manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, sustainable design

documentation, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of

5 percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by

Architect.b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its

submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect

of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating

straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the

following:


DOCUMENTATION

01 3200 - 8




1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.2. Description of activity.

3. Main events of activity.

4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.5. Early and late start dates.

6. Early and late finish dates.7. Activity duration in workdays.

8. Total float or slack time.

9. Average size of workforce.10. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).

G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports

showing the following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed.2. Changes in early and late start dates.

3. Changes in early and late finish dates.

4. Changes in activity durations in workdays.5. Changes in the critical path.

6. Changes in total float or slack time.7. Changes in the Contract Time.

H. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.

1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar

value.

2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative

dollar value.3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as

of list date.

4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with

progress meetings.

a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative

value completed" with total at bottom.

b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled

progress meeting.

1.9 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following

information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.

3. Equipment at Project site.4. Material deliveries.

5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow.


DOCUMENTATION

01 3200 - 9




6. Accidents.7. Meetings and significant decisions.

8. Unusual events (see special reports).

9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.10. Meter readings and similar recordings.

11. Emergency procedures.12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.

13. Change Orders received and implemented.

14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.15. Services connected and disconnected.

16. Equipment or system tests and startups.17. Partial completions and occupancies.

18. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of

materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials

previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on

and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project

site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.

3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and

the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for

Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

D. Unusual Event Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project

site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain

of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or

effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are

known or predictable.

1. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence.Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.



END OF SECTION

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 3233 - 1




SECTION 01 3233 – PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs.

2. Periodic construction photographs.3. Final completion construction photographs.


1. Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.

2. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as

project record documents at Project closeout.

3. Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.


A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked

for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction.

Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.

B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs.

1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.

2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio

as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph,

accompanied by key plan file.

3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file

metadata tag:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name and contact information for photographer.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Date photograph was taken.

f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction.

g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

C. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view within seven days of

taking photographs.





1. Format: 8-by-10-inch smooth-surface matte prints on single-weight, commercial-grade

photographic paper; enclosed back to back in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for

standard three-ring binder.

2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped

impression with the following information:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name and contact information for photographer.

c. Name of Architect.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera.

f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction.

g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

1.3 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited

reproduction of photographic documentation.

1.4 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum

sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to

clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each

photographic location.

B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,

without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.

2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project

site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those

submitted to Architect.

C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation, take photographs of Project

site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from

different vantage points, as directed by Architect.

1. Flag excavation areas before taking construction photographs.





2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting theWork.

3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately

record physical conditions at start of construction.

4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent

structures, pavements, and improvements.

D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff

date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of

construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of

Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Architect will inform

photographer of desired vantage points.

1. Do not include date stamp.

F. Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs

specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the

Contract Sum.

1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.

2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request.

3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Special events planned at Project site.

b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.

c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These

photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances.

d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.

e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.

f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.



END OF SECTION

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 1




SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Submittal schedule requirements.

2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.


1. Section 01 2900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the

schedule of values.2. Section 01 3200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals.

4. Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

5. Section 01 7900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require

Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual

Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not

require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with

requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification

Sections as "informational submittals."

1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in

chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for

review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include

additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect

and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

Contractor's construction schedule.





2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include

submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required

to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead

time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's

construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing

for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal Category: Action; informational.

d. Name of subcontractor.

e. Description of the Work covered.

f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

g. Scheduled dates for purchasing.

h. Scheduled date of fabrication.

i. Scheduled dates for installation.

j. Activity or event number.

1.4 SUBMITTAL FORMATS

A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal:

1. Project name.

2. Date.3. Name of Architect.

4. Name of Contractor.

5. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.6. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

7. Category and type of submittal.8. Submittal purpose and description.

9. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for

each of multiple items.

10. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

11. Indication of full or partial submittal.12. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

13. Other necessary identification.14. Remarks.

15. Signature of transmitter.

B. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

C. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from

requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include

relevant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Architect on





previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate

sheet.

D. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into

each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of

submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Email: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to Architect by sending via

email. Include PDF transmittal form. Include information in email subject line as

requested by Architect.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as a

digital Project Record Document file.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless

partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification

Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different

Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals

concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the

Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of

the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as

initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals

may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15

days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being

returned to Contractor.





D. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

E. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

F. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action

submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data

are unsuitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying ShopDrawings.

5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.

B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:





a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Paper Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit

Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

C. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other materials.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Permanently attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the

following:

a. Project name and submittal number.

b. Generic description of Sample.

c. Product name and name of manufacturer.

d. Sample source.e. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

f. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Email Transmittal: Provide PDF transmittal. Include digital image file illustrating Sample

characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-

control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time

of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's

property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from

manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of

color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the

following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or





color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing

and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two

Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample

set as a project record Sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to

be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of

paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

D. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the

following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the ContractDocuments or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.3. Number and name of room or space.

4. Location within room or space.

E. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact

information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with

indicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of

assumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and

version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.

G. Certificates:

1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that

entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated.

2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required,

is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead

certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.





6. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding

Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include

names of firms and personnel certified.

H. Test and Research Reports:

1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on

testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests

performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers

and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests

performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final

location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance

with requirements in the Contract Documents.

4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on

testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed

before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the

Contract Documents.

5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing

agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for

Project. Include the following information:

a. Name of evaluation organization.

b. Date of evaluation.

c. Time period when report is in effect.

d. Product and manufacturers' names.

e. Description of product.

f. Test procedures and results.

g. Limitations of use.

1.7 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are insufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a

written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other

required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF file and three paper copies of certificate,

signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system

specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.





1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing

these services.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for

coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents.

Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to

Architect.

B. Contractor's Approval: Indicate Contractor's approval for each submittal with a uniform

approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement

certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the

Contract Documents.

1. Architect will not review submittals received from Contractor that do not haveContractor's review and approval.

1.9 ARCHITECT'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and

will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will

return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to

appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial

submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Architect without

action.



END OF SECTION 01 3300

ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 01 3516 - 1




SECTION 01 3516 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special procedures for alteration work.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Alteration Work: This term includes remodeling, renovation, repair, and maintenance work

performed within existing spaces or on existing surfaces as part of the Project.

B. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material

type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by Architect.

C. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original,

or as otherwise indicated.

D. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and finishes. This

includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading

materials.

E. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original item is

the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated.

F. Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Pedestrian and Vehicular Circulation: Coordinate alteration work with circulation patterns

within Project building(s) and site. Some work is near circulation patterns and adjacent to

restricted areas. Circulation patterns cannot be closed off entirely and in places can be only

temporarily redirected around small areas of work. Plan and execute the Work accordingly.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS FOR ALTERATION WORK

A. Preliminary Conference for Alteration Work: Before starting alteration work, conduct

conference at Project site.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Architect, and Contractor, testing

service representative, specialists, and chemical-cleaner manufacturer(s) shall be

represented at the meeting.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress of alteration work,

including review of the following:





a. Alteration Work Subschedule: Discuss and finalize; verify availability of materials,

specialists' personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

b. Fire-prevention plan.

c. Governing regulations.

d. Areas where existing construction is to remain and the required protection.

e. Hauling routes.f. Sequence of alteration work operations.

g. Storage, protection, and accounting for salvaged and specially fabricated items.

h. Existing conditions, staging, and structural loading limitations of areas where

materials are stored.

i. Qualifications of personnel assigned to alteration work and assigned duties.

j. Requirements for extent and quality of work, tolerances, and required clearances.

k. Embedded work such as flashings and lintels, special details, collection of waste,

protection of occupants and the public, and condition of other construction that

affects the Work or will affect the work.

3. Reporting: Record conference results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and

to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from conference.


A. Preconstruction Documentation: Show preexisting conditions of adjoining construction and site

improvements that are to remain, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as

damage caused by Contractor's alteration work operations.

B. Alteration Work Program: Submit 30 days before work begins.

C. Fire-Prevention Plan: Submit 30 days before work begins.


A. Alteration Work Program: Prepare a written plan for alteration work for whole Project,

including each phase or process and protection of surrounding materials during operations.

Show compliance with indicated methods and procedures specified in this and other Sections.

Coordinate this whole-Project alteration work program with specific requirements of programs

required in other alteration work Sections.

1. Dust and Noise Control: Include locations of proposed temporary dust- and noise-control

partitions and means of egress from occupied areas coordinated with continuing on-site

operations and other known work in progress.

2. Debris Hauling: Include plans clearly marked to show debris hauling routes, turning radii,

and locations and details of temporary protective barriers.

B. Fire-Prevention Plan: Prepare a written plan for preventing fires during the Work, including

placement of fire extinguishers, fire blankets, rag buckets, and other fire-control devices during

each phase or process. Coordinate plan with Owner's fire-protection equipment and





requirements. Include fire-watch personnel's training, duties, and authority to enforce fire

safety.

C. Safety and Health Standard: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions that affect the Work by use of

preconstruction photographs.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 3233 "Photographic Documentation."

B. Discrepancies: Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings

before proceeding with removal and dismantling work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and

surrounding buildings from harm resulting from alteration work.

1. Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface being

protected.2. Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude the public from

areas where alteration work is being performed.3. Erect temporary barriers to form and maintain fire-egress routes.

4. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and

vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during alteration work.

5. Contain dust and debris generated by alteration work, and prevent it from reaching the

public or adjacent surfaces.6. Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload structural elements.

7. Protect floors and other surfaces along hauling routes from damage, wear, and staining.

B. Temporary Protection of Materials to Remain:

1. Protect existing materials with temporary protections and construction. Do not remove

existing materials unless otherwise indicated.

2. Do not attach temporary protection to existing surfaces except as indicated as part of the

alteration work program.

C. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and precautions.

Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and adjacent materials,

components, and vegetation.





D. Utility and Communications Services:

1. Notify Owner, Architect, authorities having jurisdiction, and entities owning or

controlling wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by alteration work before

commencing operations.

2. Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as

required for alteration work.

3. Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep in service, and protect against

damage during operations. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing

utilities.

E. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is

functioning properly. Notify Architect immediately of inadequate drainage or blockage. Do not

begin work in an area until the drainage system is functioning properly.

1. Prevent solids such as adhesive or mortar residue or other debris from entering the

drainage system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by

sand or other materials resulting from alteration work.

2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean

water to pass.

3.2 PROTECTION FROM FIRE

A. General: Follow fire-prevention plan and the following:

1. Comply with NFPA 241 requirements unless otherwise indicated. Perform duties titled

"Owner's Responsibility for Fire Protection."

2. Remove and keep area free of combustibles, including rubbish, paper, waste, and

chemicals, unless necessary for the immediate work.

a. If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fire blankets to cover such

materials.

B. Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following procedures

while performing work with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials, including

welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, removing paint with heat, or other operations where

open flames or implements using high heat or combustible solvents and chemicals are

anticipated:

1. Obtain Owner's approval for operations involving use of welding or other high-heat

equipment. Use of open-flame equipment is not permitted. Notify Owner at least 72

hours before each occurrence, indicating location of such work.

2. As far as practicable, restrict heat-generating equipment to shop areas or outside the

building.

3. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where

flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. Use a

combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe.

4. Use fireproof baffles to prevent flames, sparks, hot gases, or other high-temperature

material from reaching surrounding combustible material.





5. Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors,

holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other openings.6. Fire Watch: Before working with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials,

station personnel to serve as a fire watch at each location where such work is performed.

Fire-watch personnel shall have the authority to enforce fire safety. Station fire watch

according to NFPA 51B, NFPA 241, and as follows:

a. Train each fire watch in the proper operation of fire-control equipment and alarms.

b. Prohibit fire-watch personnel from other work that would be a distraction from

fire-watch duties.

c. Cease work with heat-generating equipment whenever fire-watch personnel are not

present.

d. Have fire-watch personnel perform final fire-safety inspection each day beginning

no sooner than 30 minutes after conclusion of work in each area to detect hidden or

smoldering fires and to ensure that proper fire prevention is maintained.e. Maintain fire-watch personnel at each area of Project site until two hours after

conclusion of daily work.

C. Fire-Control Devices: Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and rag buckets for

disposal of rags with combustible liquids. Maintain each as suitable for the type of fire risk in

each work area. Ensure that nearby personnel and the fire-watch personnel are trained in fire-

extinguisher and blanket use.

D. Sprinklers: Where sprinkler protection exists and is functional, maintain it without interruption

while operations are being performed. If operations are performed close to sprinklers, shield

them temporarily with guards.

1. Remove temporary guards at the end of work shifts, whenever operations are paused, and

when nearby work is complete.

3.3 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS

A. Protect motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding

buildings from harm or spillage resulting from applications of chemicals and adhesives.

B. Cover adjacent surfaces with protective materials that are proven to resist chemicals selected for

Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces as indicated in alteration

work program. Use covering materials and masking agents that are waterproof and UV resistant

and that will not stain or leave residue on surfaces to which they are applied. Apply protective

materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agents

or adhesives to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove protective

materials.

C. Do not apply chemicals during winds of sufficient force to spread them to unprotected surfaces.

D. Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

E. Collect and dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that

prevents soil contamination, soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to

landscaping, or water penetration into building interior.





3.4 GENERAL ALTERATION WORK

A. Have specialty work performed only by qualified specialists.

B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its progress.

C. Record existing work before each procedure (preconstruction), and record progress during the

work. Use digital preconstruction documentation photographs. Comply with requirements in

Section 01 3233 "Photographic Documentation."

D. Perform surveys of Project site as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from

alterations.

E. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether from

environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing or from

structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion.

1. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect.

END OF SECTION

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 1




SECTION 01 4000 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality

control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections

may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document

requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required

by Architect, Owner, Commissioning Authority, or authorities having jurisdiction are not

limited by provisions of this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract

enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to

verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where

indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to

show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified

installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approvedmockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from

the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and

subassemblies.





2. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and

ceiling finishes; doors; windows; millwork; casework; specialties; furnishings and

equipment; and lighting.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before

products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance

with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to

establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,

plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or

that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully

completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;

being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards

establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply

with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision

before proceeding.






A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations,

indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,

submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before

starting work on the following systems:

1. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-

resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

3. Description of test and inspection.4. Identification of applicable standards.

5. Identification of test and inspection methods.6. Number of tests and inspections required.

7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed,

and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to

Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be

used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate

with Contractor's construction schedule.





B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and

experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures

similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through

review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible

for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work

requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and

inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the"Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including

tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during

construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and

inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into

compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved

mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of

approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or

defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with

requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.2. Project title and number.

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

7. Identification of product and Specification Section.8. Complete test or inspection data.

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.





the Contract Document requirements.12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.

5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified inother Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report.2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.





work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed

for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and

extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be

performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for

specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according

to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation

of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for

this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the

following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with

performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will

perform same tasks for Project.





e. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do

not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,

and similar quality-assurance service to Architect and Commissioning Authority, with

copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested

and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed byArchitect.

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed during the construction at Project.4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

L. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop

Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which

mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to

perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the

Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are

Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that

the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.





by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor

by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in

writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires

testing or inspecting will be performed.4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 3300 "Submittal

Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's

services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and

conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed

portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Commissioning Authority and

Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and

inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or

deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.





G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the

following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and

-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing

construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-

control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-

control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule.

Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Commissioning Authority, testing

agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and

inspections are required.

1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as

required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and

as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.2. Notifying Architect, Commissioning Authority, and Contractor promptly of irregularities

and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control

service to Architect and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to


4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,

which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected

work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and

inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal working

hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas

and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as

possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in

Section 01 7300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION

REFERENCES 01 4200 - 1




SECTION 01 4200 – REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the

Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control


F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to

dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on

which Project is to be built.

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not

bound with the Contract Documents.





1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain

copies directly from publication source.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's

"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'

"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This

information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials;www.iapmo.org.

2. ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.3. ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following

list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.2. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;

www.nist.gov.

3. DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.4. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.

5. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.6. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies

Division; www.eetd.lbl.gov.

7. OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.8. USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;

www.ojp.usdoj.gov.

D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and

regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be

accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;www.gpo.gov/fdsys.

2. FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).3. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.

4. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See

USAB).

E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following

http://www.iapmo.org/

http://www.iccsafe.org/

http://www.icc-es.org/

http://www.cpsc.gov/

http://www.nist.gov/

http://www.energy.gov/

http://www.epa.gov/

http://www.gsa.gov/

http://www.eetd.lbl.gov/

http://www.osha.gov/

http://www.ojp.usdoj.gov/

http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys

http://www.access-board.gov/





list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of theContract Documents.

1. CDB; Capital Development Board; www.illinois.gov/cdb/pages/default.aspx.

2. IAC: Illinois Accessibility Code; see Capital Development Board.3. IDPH; Illinois Department of Public Health; www.idph.state.il.us.

4. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.



END OF SECTION

http://www.illinois.gov/cdb/pages/default.aspx

http://www.idph.state.il.us/

http://www.aqmd.gov/


Hansen Park Health Center 06/25/19

Holabird & Root LLC, Project No. 15849

TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING 01 59 39 - 1

SECTION 01 56 39 - TREE PROTECTION AND TRIMMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The protection and trimming of trees that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the

work, whether temporary or new construction.

1.2 SUBMITTAL

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Certification: From a qualified arborist that trees indicated to remain have been protected

during construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly

treated and repaired when damaged.

C. Maintenance Recommendations: From a qualified arborist for care and protection of trees

affected by construction during and after completing the Work.


A. Tree Service Qualifications: An experienced tree service firm that has successfully completed

tree protection and trimming work similar to that required for this Project and that will assign an

experienced, qualified arborist to Project site on a full-time basis during execution of the Work.

B. Arborist Qualifications: An arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture or

licensed in the jurisdiction where Project is located.

C. Tree Pruning Standards: Comply with ANSI A300, "Trees, Shrubs, and Other Woody Plant

Maintenance--Standard Practices," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1.

1. Before starting tree protection and trimming, meet with representatives of authorities

having jurisdiction, Owner, Landscape Architect, consultants, and other concerned entities.

Review tree protection and trimming procedures and responsibilities. Notify participants

at least three working days before convening conference. Record discussions and

agreements and furnish a copy to each participant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Drainage Fill: Selected crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, washed, ASTM D 448,

Size 24, with 90 to 100 percent passing a 2-1/2-inch (63-mm) sieve and not more than 10

percent passing a 3/4-inch (19-mm) sieve.





B. Topsoil: Fertile, friable, surface soil, containing natural loam and complying with ASTM D

5268. Provide topsoil that is free of stones larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension and

free of other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. Obtain topsoil only from well-

drained sites where soil occurs in depth of 4 inches (100 mm) or more; do not obtain from bogs

or marshes.

C. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard, nonwoven, pervious, geotextile fabric of polypropylene,

nylon, or polyester fibers.

D. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting the following requirements.

1. Plastic Protection-Zone Fencing: Plastic construction fencing constructed of high-density

extruded and stretched polyethylene fabric with 2-inch maximum opening in pattern and

weighing a minimum of 0.4 lb/ft.; remaining flexible from minus 60 to plus 200 deg F;

inert to most chemicals and acids; minimum tensile yield strength of 2000 psi and ultimate

tensile strength of 2680 psi; secured with plastic bands or galvanized-steel or stainless-

steel wire ties; and supported by tubular or T-shape galvanized-steel posts spaced not more

than 8 feet apart

a. Height: 4 feet

b. Color: High-visibility orange, nonfading

2. Gates: swing access gates matching material and appearance of fencing, to allow for

maintenance activities within protection zones; leaf width 36 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of

trees to protect remaining vegetation from construction damage.

B. Protect tree root systems from damage due to noxious materials caused by runoff or spillage

while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from flooding,

eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.

C. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within the drip line of

remaining trees. Do not permit vehicles or foot traffic within the drip line; prevent soil

compaction over root systems.

D. Do not allow fires under or adjacent to remaining trees or other plants.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Install shoring or other protective support systems to minimize sloping or benching of

excavations.

B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated.





C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and

excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks and comb soil to

expose roots.

1. Relocate roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots,

expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and relocate them without

breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and

relocation is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75 mm) back from new

construction.

2. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide

temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain

in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are

permanently relocated and covered with soil.

D. Where utility trenches are required within drip line of trees, tunnel under or around roots by

drilling, auger boring, pipe jacking, or digging by hand.

1. Root Pruning: Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that

interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not

break or chop.

3.3 REGRADING

A. Grade Lowering: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope

grade away from trees as recommended by qualified arborist, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Root Pruning: Prune tree roots exposed during grade lowering. Do not cut main lateral

roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not

break or chop.

B. Minor Fill: Where existing grade is 6 inches (150 mm) or less below elevation of finish grade,

fill with topsoil. Place topsoil in a single uncompacted layer and hand grade to required finish

elevations.

C. Moderate Fill: Where existing grade is more than 6 inches (150 mm), but less than 12 inches

(300 mm), below elevation of finish grade, place drainage fill, filter fabric, and topsoil on

existing grade as follows.

1. Carefully place drainage fill against tree trunk approximately 2 inches (50 mm) above

elevation of finish grade and extend not less than 18 inches (450 mm) from tree trunk on

all sides. For balance of area within drip-line perimeter, place drainage fill up to 6 inches

(150 mm) below elevation of grade.

2. Place filter fabric with edges overlapping 6 inches (150 mm) minimum.

3. Place fill layer of topsoil to finish grade. Do not compact drainage fill or topsoil. Hand

grade to required finish elevations.

3.4 TREE PRUNING

A. Prune remaining trees affected by temporary and new construction.





B. Prune remaining trees to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system.

Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by qualified arborist.

C. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 as follows:

1. Type of Pruning: Crown cleaning.

2. Type of Pruning: Crown thinning.

3. Type of Pruning: Crown raising.

4. Type of Pruning: Crown reduction.

5. Type of Pruning: Vista pruning.

6. Type of Pruning: Crown restoration.

D. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

E. Chip branches removed from trees. Spread chips where indicated or as directed by Landscape

Architect.

3.5 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged

trunks, limbs, and roots according to written instructions of the qualified arborist.

B. Remove and replace dead and damaged trees that the qualified arborist determines to be

incapable of restoring to a normal growth pattern.

1. Provide new trees of the same size and species as those being replaced; plant and maintain

as specified in Division 32 Section "Planting”.

2. Provide new trees of 6-inch (150-mm) caliper size and of a species selected by Landscape

Architect when trees more than 6 inches (150 mm) in caliper size, measured 12 inches

(300 mm) above grade, are required to be replaced.

C. Aerate surface soil, compacted during construction, 10 feet (3 m) beyond drip line and no closer

than 36 inches (900 mm) to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- (50-mm-) diameter holes a minimum of 12

inches (300 mm) deep at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augered

soil and sand.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS

A. Burning is not permitted.

B. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, and excess chips from Owner's

property.

END OF SECTION




SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 101100 - 1

SECTION 018113 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Sections:

1. Division 01 through 33 Sections for requirements specific to the work of each of the

Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to Sustainable Design.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with indoor air quality

goals.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review Sustainable Design

requirements and action plans for complying with requirements.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Respond to questions and requests from Architect about Sustainable Design Requirements

credits that are the responsibility of the Contractor, that depend on product selection or product

qualities, or that depend on Contractor's procedures. Document responses as informational

submittals.


A. General: Submit additional Sustainable Design submittals required by other Specification

Sections.

B. Sustainable Design submittals are in addition to other submittals. If submitted item is identical

to that submitted to comply with other requirements, submit duplicate copies as a separate

submittal to verify compliance with indicated Sustainable Design requirements. Sustainable

Design submittals to be submitted at the same time as all other product data submittals.

C. Sustainable Design Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within fifteen (15) days of

date established for the Notice to Proceed (NTP) indicating how the following requirements will

be met, except where otherwise indicated:

1. List of proposed low-emitting materials and VOC limit for each material. Submit plan

within thirty days of NTP.


A. Sustainable Design Coordinator: Engage an experienced LEED-Accredited Professional to

coordinate Sustainable Design / LEED requirements.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Provide products and procedures required in this Section. Although other Sections may specify

some requirements that contribute to these Sustainable Design goals, Contractor shall provide

additional materials and procedures necessary to achieve goals indicated.

2.2 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS

A. Credit IEQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, adhesives and

sealants shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the

following VOC content limits:

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.

2. Metal-to-Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.

3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (except Wood): 50 g/L.

4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.

5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.

6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.

7. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.

8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.

9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.

10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.

11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.

12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.

13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.

14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.

15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.

16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.

17. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.

18. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.

19. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesive: 250 g/L.

20. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive (Contact Adhesive That Is Used to Bond Melamine-

Covered Board, Metal, Unsupported Vinyl, Rubber, or Wood Veneer 1/16 Inch or Less in

Thickness to Any Surface): 250 g/L.

21. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.

22. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.

23. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.

24. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.

25. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.

26. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.

27. Sheet-Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L.

28. Aerosol Adhesive, General-Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight.

29. Aerosol Adhesive, General-Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight.

30. Special-Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight.

31. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.

32. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.

33. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.

34. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.

35. Other Sealants: 420 g/L.





36. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

37. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

38. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.

39. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.

B. For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall

comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC

content limits:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L.

3. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 400 g/L.

4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L.

5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than

250 g/L.

6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L.

7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L.

8. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.

9. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.

10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.

11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.

12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.

13. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

C. For field applications that are inside the building interior, flooring systems shall comply with:

1. Carpet: Meet testing and product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute Green

Label Plus program.

2. Carpet Cushion: Meet testing and product requirements of the Carpet and Rug Institute

Green Label Plus program.

3. Carpet Adhesive: VOC not more than 50 g/L.

4. Hard Surface Flooring: Certified compliant with FloorScore standard by an independent-

third party. Includes vinyl, linoleum, laminate flooring, wood flooring, ceramic flooring,

rubber flooring and wall base.

5. Alternate FloorScore Compliance Path: 100% non-carpet finished flooring must be

FloorScore certified and must constitute at least 25% of the finished floor area. Includes

unfinished flooring – mechanical rooms, electrical rooms and elevator service rooms.

6. Concrete wood, bamboo and cork floor finishes such as sealer, stain and sealer: Meet the

requirements for SCAQMD Rule 113 in effect January 1, 2004.

7. Tile setting adhesives and grout: Meet the requirements for SCAQMD Rule 1168. VOC

limits correspond to an effective date of July 1, 2005 and rile amendment date of January

7, 2005.

D. Composite wood, agrifiber products, and adhesives shall not contain urea-formaldehyde resin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NONSMOKING BUILDING

A. Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows,

or outdoor-air intakes.





3.2 MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION

A. Deliver, store and handle products and materials using methods that will prevent damage and

deterioration and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Deliver to minimize

long term storage in undamaged condition in manufacturer’s original unopened, undamaged

containers complete with labels and instructions. Store products and materials subject to

damage by the elements under cover in a weather tight enclosure above ground with ventilation

adequate to prevent condensation. Protect from freezing and moisture intrusion.

B. Inspect materials and products promptly upon arrival at the site for damage, soiling,

contaminates and dampness and reject as appropriate.

C. Provide protection during the construction process to prevent moisture intrusion, freezing, dirt

and debris within assemblies and extremes in temperature not common to the in-place use

environment of the element. Do not allow food and drink or food and drink containers or

material protective wrapping to be incorporated into the Work.

D. Install Work in sequence with sufficient time for curing and drying of each element before

subsequent work upon which such work depends.

E. Promptly take measures to dry or remove and replace materials products and portions of the

project that evidence absorption of moisture or are wet before incorporation proceeding with the

work and incorporation or of such materials or products into the project.

END OF SECTION 101100

Cook County Health & Hospital System Issued for Bid



BUILDING SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING 01 9113 - 1

SECTION 01 9113 – BUILDING SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The work under this Section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the Owner’s General Conditions and articles of the General Contractor’s General Conditions.

B. This section includes the Commissioning (Cx) requirements for the Building Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC), and Lighting Control systems.

1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring all building systems perform interactively according to design intent and Owner’s operational needs. Commissioning will encompass and coordinate traditionally separate functions of system documentation, installation checkout, equipment Start-Up, control system calibration and point-to-point checkout, testing and balancing, and Functional Performance Testing. Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents:

1. Verify and document proper installation and performance of equipment and systems.2. Provide Owner with functional buildings and/or systems with minimal operational problems

at time of move-in.

B. Commissioning does not take away from or reduce responsibility of system designers or installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product.

C. This section shall in no way diminish the responsibility of the General Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers in performing all aspects of work and testing as outlined in the contract documents. The Commissioning requirements given in this section are separate from and in addition to any other Equipment/Systems Testing, Demonstration or Commissioning requirements specified in other specification sections of the Project Manual.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS

A. The following are common abbreviations used in the Specifications (definitions are found further in this Section):

1. A/E - Architect and Design Engineers2. BAS - Building Automation System3. CxA - Commissioning Agent4. CT - Commissioning Team5. Cx - Commissioning6. Cx Plan - Commissioning Plan7. Cx-PMOR – Commissioning Performance Monitoring, Optimization, and Reporting

06/25/19





8. CC - Controls Contractor 9. EC - Electrical Contractor10. FPT - Functional Performance Test11. GC - General Contractor12. MC - Mechanical Contractor13. OR - Owner’s Representative14. PC – Plumbing Contractor15. PFC - Pre-Functional Checklist16. TAB - Test, Adjust and Balance17. O&M - Operations & Maintenance18. RFI - Request for Information

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Acceptance Phase: Phase of construction after Start-Up and initial checkout when Functional Performance Tests, O&M documentation review and training occur.

B. Approval: Acceptance that a piece of equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning in tested modes according to the Contract Documents.

C. Architect/Engineer (A/E): Prime consultant (architect) and sub-consultants who comprise the design team, generally HVAC Mechanical Designer/Engineer and Electrical Designer/Engineer.

D. Basis of Design (BOD): Documentation of primary thought processes and assumptions behind design decisions made to meet design intent. Describes systems, components, conditions and methods chosen to meet intent.

E. Commissioning Agent (CxA): Contracted to Owner. CxA directs and coordinates day-to-day Commissioning activities. CxA reports directly to Owner.

F. Commissioning (Cx) Database - A “cloud-based” process management platform provided by the CxA utilized to execute the Commissioning process.

G. Commissioning Plan: Overall plan developed after bidding that provides structure, schedule and coordination planning for Commissioning process.

H. Commissioning Performance Monitoring, Optimization, and Reporting (Cx-PMOR) – Cloud Based SaaS (Software as a Service) which provides automated building operating data acquisition, analysis, archival, and reporting by utilizing data provided from the Building Automation System to continually analyze and improve the overall performance of the building and its underlying Mechanical and Electrical systems.

I. Contract Documents: Documents binding on parties involved in construction of this project (drawings, specifications, change orders, amendments, contracts, etc.).

J. Contractor: Contracted directly to Owner.

K. Control System: System and components associated with building automation system.

06/25/19





L. Deferred Functional Tests: Functional tests performed after substantial completion due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site conditions that disallow test from being performed.

M. Deficiency: Condition of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with Contract Documents (that is, does not perform properly or is not complying with design intent).

N. Functional Performance Test Procedures: Commissioning protocols and detailed test procedures and instructions that fully describe system configuration and steps required to determine if the system is performing and functioning properly. These procedures shall be used to document Functional Performance Tests.

O. Functional Performance Test (FPT): Test of dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, life safety conditions, power failure, etc. Systems are run through all specified sequences of operation. Components are verified to be responding in accordance with contract documents. Functional Performance Tests are executed after Pre-Functional Checklists and Start-Ups are complete.

P. Monitoring: Recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using data loggers or trending capabilities of control systems.

Q. Overridden Value: Writing over a sensor value in control system to see response of a system (e.g., changing outside air temperature value from 52oF to 72oF to verify economizer operation). See also “Simulated Signal”.

R. Pre-Functional Checklist (PFC): A list of static inspections and elementary component tests that verify proper installation of equipment (e.g., belt tension, oil levels, labels affixed, gages in place, sensors calibrated, etc.).

S. Seasonal Performance Tests: Functional Performance Tests deferred until system(s) ambient conditions are closer to design conditions.

T. Simulated Condition: Condition created for testing component or system (e.g., applying heat to space temperature sensor to monitor response of VAV box).

U. Simulated Signal: Disconnecting sensor and using signal generator to send amperage, resistance or pressure to transducer and/or DDC system to simulate value to BAS.

V. Specifications: Construction specifications of Contract Documents.

W. Start-up: The activities where systems or equipment are initially tested and operated. Start-up is completed prior to Functional Performance Testing.

X. Subcontractor: Contractors of GC, and their Subcontractors, who provide and install building components and systems.

Y. Test Procedures: Step-by-step process, which must be executed to fulfill test requirements.

06/25/19





Z. Test Requirements: Requirements specifying what modes and functions, etc. will be tested. Test requirements are not detailed test procedures. Test requirements are specified in the Cx Plan.

AA. Trending: Monitoring using building control system.

BB. Vendor: Supplier of equipment.

CC. Warranty Period: Warranty period for entire project, including equipment components.

1.5 RELATED WORK

A. Specific Commissioning requirements are given in this specification. The following specifications apply to Work specified in this section:

1. HVAC System Requirements: Refer to Division 23.2. Lighting Control System Requirements: Refer to Division 26.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Commissioning Team: Members of the Commissioning Team (CT) will consist of:

1. Commissioning Agent (CxA).2. Owner’s Representative(s) (OR).3. Representatives of the Facility User and Operation and Maintenance Personnel.4. Architect and Design Engineers (A/E).5. General Contractor (GC)6. Mechanical Contractor (MC).7. Plumbing Contractor (PC).8. Electrical Contractor (EC).9. Test and Balance Contractor (TAB Contractor).10. Controls Contractor (CC).11. Any other Division Contractors or Subcontractors who provide and install the equipment to

be commissioned or systems integrated with the equipment to be commissioned.12. Equipment Suppliers and Vendors.

B. Management: Owner will contract services of the CxA. The CxA directs and coordinates Commissioning activities and reports to OR. All members of the Commissioning Team shall cooperate to fulfill contracted responsibilities and objectives of the Contract Documents.

C. Kick-Off Meeting: CxA will plan, schedule and conduct a Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting. Membership and responsibilities of the Commissioning team will be clarified at this meeting. Cx Kick-Off Meeting shall be conducted no later than 30 days prior to initial installation of any commissioned equipment on-site (i.e. equipment set on site). CxA will distribute meeting minutes to all parties.

D. Scheduling:

1. CxA will work with Commissioning team to establish required Commissioning activities to incorporate in preliminary Commissioning schedule. The GC will integrate Commissioning

06/25/19





activities into master construction schedule. Representatives of the Commissioning team will address scheduling problems. Necessary notifications are to be made in a timely manner to expedite Commissioning.

2. The CxA will provide initial schedule of primary Commissioning events at Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting. As construction progresses, more detailed schedules are developed by the Commissioning team.

E. Project Phasing:

1. Phased completion of project construction is not anticipated. All CxA work except for the following must be completed prior to Owner move-in/occupancy:

a. Warranty Phase Cx-PMOR Monitoring and Quarterly Site Visits/Reports.b. Opposed Season Testing.c. End of Warranty Meetingd. Compilation and delivery of Final Commissioning Report.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS / COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

2.1 COMMISSIONING (Cx) DATABASE

A. The Commissioning process will be executed utilizing a “cloud-based” process management Database provided by the CxA. Cx Database is accessed by authorized users using any device running an HTML-5 internet browser (e.g. PC, laptop, tablet, phone) or by an operating system specific (e.g. iOS) application downloaded from corresponding app store.

B. CxA will provide the GC/Subcontractors with web access to the Cx Database during the Commissioning process to allow the GC/Subcontractors to complete scoped Commissioning tasks indicated in other sections of this specification (e.g. completion of Commissioning activities such as notification of deficiency item corrections, readiness for Functional Performance Testing, etc.).

2.2 COMMISSIONING PLAN

A. CxA will develop overall plan for execution of the Commissioning Process. The Cx Plan will contain:

1. Executive Summary of overall commissioning process.2. List of CT members and roles and responsibilities.3. Master Equipment List (list of commissioned equipment and systems).4. Functional Performance Test Procedures for each commissioned equipment/system. The

FPTs will be developed in the Cx Database once the Control Submittal is approved by the A/E.

5. Sample Master Issues Log (used to track issues/deficiencies throughout the commissioning process). The MIL will be developed in the Cx Database.

B. The Cx Plan will be made available to the CT via the Cx Database. The Cx Plan Functional Performance Tests and Master Issues Log will reside on and be executed from the Cx Database.

06/25/19





C. The Cx Plan is a “living” document. A copy of the initial Cx Plan will be delivered to the CT in electronic format (Adobe PDF file searchable from the Table of Contents) for review purposes. Any modifications to the initial Cx Plan will be available “real-time” via the Cx Database.

2.3 EQUIPMENT SUBMITTAL DATA

A. Contractor shall provide CxA with documentation required for Commissioning work. At minimum, documentation shall include: Requirements as described in Section 013300, detailed Start-Up procedures, full sequences of operation, O&M data, performance data, any performance test procedures, duct pressure testing procedures and results, piping pressure testing and flushing procedures and results, control drawings and details of Owner contracted tests. In addition, installation and checkout materials shipped inside equipment and actual field checkout sheet forms used by factory or field technicians shall be submitted to CxA.

B. GC shall submit one copy of the final A/E approved submittal data to the CxA for review and record purposes. CxA commissioned equipment submittal reviews are for development of Cx Plan Functional Testing procedures only; not for compliance with equipment specifications. CxA will not provide comments as a part of the A/E submittal review process.

2.4 GC/SUBCONTRACTOR PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS (PFC)

A. The objective of the Pre-Functional Checklist is to verify and document that the equipment/systems are provided and installed according to documented design intent and Contract Documents.

B. GC and Subcontractors will develop the Pre-Functional Checklists from the Contract Documents, A/E approved Equipment Submittals, and Standard Manufacturer Installation Checklists. The Pre-Functional Checklists will be completed during construction by the GC and Subcontractors.

C. Pre-Functional Checklist forms developed by the GC and Subcontractors will include (but not be limited to) the following information:

1. Project name2. Executing party name.3. System and equipment or component name(s)4. Equipment location.5. Equipment Manufacturer and Model Number (design and installed)6. Equipment Serial Number.7. Equipment size and capacity information (design and installed)8. Project specific installation check with a Yes/No checkbox to document the installation

requirement was achieved. Include space for date and executing party name or initials for each checklist item (to document that the PFCs are completed in phases as the equipment is installed).

9. Section for comments

D. GC and Subcontractors will develop an electronic Pre-Functional Checklist file for each item of commissioned equipment in one of the following formats.

1. Word (.doc).

06/25/19





2. Excel (.xlsx).3. Adobe PDF (.pdf).4. Other Database format convertible to Adobe PDF.

E. Sample copies of Pre-Functional Checklists are included at the end of this specification. The sample copies are provided to give the GC/Subcontractors a general idea of the level of detail required for the Pre-Functional Checklists and work required to develop and execute them. The Pre-Functional Checklists included are prototypical, and do not reflect specific requirements of this project’s plans or specifications. The GC/Subcontractors will develop project specific Pre-Functional Checklists based on the final construction document requirements. GC and Subcontractors shall review final construction documentation for applicable details and specifications related to equipment to be commissioned to fully ascertain the Pre-Functional Checklist requirements.

2.5 GC / SUBCONTRACTOR START-UP PLAN

A. GC/Subcontractors responsible for purchase, installation and Start-Up of commissioned equipment shall compile all testing and equipment Start-Up documentation into an overall Start-Up Plan document.

B. Start-Up Plan shall include the following documentation:

1. Testing Documentation:

a. GC/Subcontractor shall compile documentation and recording forms for all testing required by Division 23 and 26 specifications (e.g. duct pressure testing, duct cleaning, pipe pressure testing, piping flushing and cleaning plans, electrical testing, etc.). Testing documentation shall include:

1) A written description of the required testing and the procedures required to complete the testing.

2) All instrumentation utilized for the testing.3) Checklist with boxes or lines for recording and documenting the completion of

the testing activity and results.

2. Equipment Start-Up Documentation:

a. GC/Subcontractor shall compile detailed Start-Up procedures from equipment manufacturer and checkout procedures with normally used field checkout sheets. Start-up documentation shall include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for recording and documenting inspections of each piece of equipment.

3. Control System Start-Up Documentation:

a. GC/Controls Contractor shall compile all control systems Start-Up and initial check-out documentation and recording forms including but not limited to point-to-point verifications, control sensor calibrations, and control valve/damper actuator calibrations for inclusion in the Start-Up Plan. Control System Start-up documentation shall include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines

06/25/19





for recording and documenting inspections of each control system point, sensor or device.

4. Test and Balance Documentation:

a. Start-Up Plan documentation shall include the TAB Execution Plan outlining the TAB procedures and proposed sequencing and scheduling of required TAB work.

5. Equipment Maintenance Log:

a. Start-Up Plan documentation shall include a list of all maintenance tasks (including frequency of execution) required to be performed on equipment started to insure equipment warranties are not voided. Start-Up Plan documentation shall include a log for each required maintenance task for Subcontractor/Vendor to document execution of the required maintenance tasks from Start-Up through Final Application for Payment.

C. Start-Up Plan documentation shall be provided in “searchable” electronic PDF format as follows:

1. Provide a separate Start-Up Plan PDF file for each Division of work (e.g. Division 23 Start-Up Plan and Division 26 Start-Up Plan)

2. Each Start-Up Plan PDF file will have a Cover Sheet with Project Information and Document Title.

3. Each Start-Up Plan PDF file will have a Table of Contents. The Table of Contents shall be “bookmarked” for hyperlink navigation directly to each section and item/document noted below.

a. Proposed Schedule/Sequencing Plan of Testing and Start-Up activities.b. Testing documentation (e.g. duct pressure testing, duct cleaning, piping pressure

testing, piping flushing and cleaning, electrical testing, etc.) organized by specification section.

c. Start-Up Checklists for each item of equipment organized by specification section.d. Control System Start-Up activities completed by the Controls Contractor including

but not limited to all point-to-point verifications, control sensor calibrations and control actuator calibrations.

e. Warranty Maintenance Log for each item of equipment organized by specification section.

f. TAB Execution Plan.

2.6 “PERFORMANCE PLUS” MONITORING, OPTIMIZATION AND REPORTING SYSTEM (CX-PMOR)

A. Mechanical and Electrical Systems operation will be continually monitored and analyzed by a “cloud-based” software package (Cx-PMOR) provided by the CxA utilizing data provided from the Building Automation System.

B. The Controls Contractor for this project shall provide automated data reporting through the Building Automation System which shall deliver system operating data and utility consumption data (if available) daily to the PMOR system via trend reports. The BAS trend reports shall be

06/25/19





acquired by the PMOR platform in one of two manners as approved by the Owner’s information security personnel:

1. BAS server shall automatically e-mail the reports to the PMOR server daily OR2. BAS server shall save the reports to an Owner-maintained network folder from which the

PMOR platform will programmatically access via SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP, ‘secure FTP’) and download to the PMOR server.

C. The complete cost for the Controls Contractor to set up ALL required trending and reporting shall be included in the project contract cost.

2.7 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTS (FPT)

A. CxA will develop the Functional Performance Testing procedures from the Contract Documents and A/E approved BAS Control Submittal. The Functional Performance Test Procedures will be developed in the Cx Database. The Functional Performance Tests will be executed by the GC/Subcontractors/Equipment Vendors. The CxA will witness the Functional Performance Testing and document the results in the Cx Database.

B. Development of Test Procedures:

1. The purpose of any given specific test is to verify and document compliance with stated criteria of acceptance given on test form. CxA shall develop specific test procedures and forms to verify and document proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. Subcontractor responsible to execute test will provide limited assistance to CxA in developing procedure (i.e. answering questions about equipment, operation, sequences, etc.). Prior to execution, CxA shall provide a copy of test procedures to Subcontractor. Subcontractor will review tests for feasibility, safety and equipment warranty protection. CxA shall submit tests to Owner, GC and A/E and other Commissioning team members for review.

2. Test procedure forms developed by the CxA will include (but not be limited to) the following information:

a. System and equipment or component name(s)b. Equipment location and ID numberc. Dated. Project namee. Participating partiesf. Specific sequence of operation or other specified parameters being verifiedg. Instructions for setting up testh. Specific step-by-step procedures to execute test, in a clear, sequential and repeatable

formati. A Yes/No checkbox to allow for clearly marking if proper performance of each part

of test was achievedj. Section for comments

3. Sample copies of Functional Performance Test (FPT) forms are included at the end of this specification. The sample copies are provided to give the Subcontractors a general idea of the work required to execute the FPT. The FPT checklists included are prototypical, and do not reflect specific requirements of this project’s plans or specifications. Specific FPT

06/25/19





items may be added, modified or deleted in the Cx plan delivered to the GC/Subcontractor to reflect the final construction document requirements. GC and Subcontractors shall review final construction documentation for applicable details and specifications related to equipment to be commissioned to fully ascertain the FPT requirements.

2.8 MASTER ISSUES LOG (MIL)

A. Any issues noted by CxA are tracked in a Master Issues Log (MIL). The MIL will be developed in and accessed/tracked through the Cx Database.

2.9 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Construction Team (General Contractor, Subcontractors, Equipment Manufacturers/Vendors, etc.) shall provide all specialized tools, test equipment and instruments required to execute Start-Up, Checkout and Functional Performance Testing of equipment under contract.

B. Test equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with tolerances specified. A testing laboratory shall have calibrated test equipment within the previous 12 months. Calibration shall be NIST traceable. Equipment shall be calibrated according to manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available.

2.10 CxA FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORT

A. The CxA Final Commissioning Report will include:

1. Executive Summary including:

a. List of Commissioned Equipment/Systems.b. List of participants and roles.c. Overview of Commissioning and testing scope and general description of testing and

verification methods.d. Evaluation regarding disposition of equipment, systems and documentation in the

following areas:

1) Conformance to specifications and design intent.2) Equipment installation.3) Functional performance.4) Recommendations for improvement to equipment or operations, future actions,

etc. will also be listed

2. Master Issues Log.3. Executed Functional Performance Tests.4. Site Visit Reports.5. Sections will be provided for the following information to be inserted at a later date:

a. Warranty Phase Cx-PMOR Monitoring and Quarterly Site Visits/Reports.b. Opposed Season Testing.

06/25/19





c. End of Warranty Review Meeting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. COMMISSIONING OVERVIEW

B. The following provides a brief overview of typical Commissioning tasks during construction and general order in which they occur:

1. CxA develops project specific Commissioning Plan in the Cx Database including project specific equipment and system Functional Performance Test procedures. Commissioning team members are provided web access to the Cx Database for review of the Cx Plan prior to Cx Kick-Off meeting.

2. Commissioning during construction begins with a Kick-Off Meeting conducted by CxA where membership of Commissioning team is established, and responsibilities reviewed. The Commissioning Plan is reviewed during this meeting.

3. CxA schedules subsequent meetings as necessary to plan, coordinate and schedule Commissioning activities. Deficiencies and problem resolution will also be discussed at these meetings.

4. GC and Subcontractors develop Pre-Functional Checklists from the Contract Documents, A/E approved Equipment Submittals, and Standard Manufacturer Installation Checklists.

5. GC submits copies of final A/E approved submittals for all equipment to be commissioned to CxA for review. CxA revises Cx Plan if required.

6. Subcontractors install commissioned equipment/systems and execute Pre-Functional Checklists in phases as the work is completed.

7. CxA makes periodic site visits to review commissioned equipment installations and review Pre-Functional Checklists completed by Subcontractors. Subcontractors provide the necessary personnel to assist CxA (e.g. remove A/C unit covers, open electrical panel covers, etc.) with PFC reviews.

8. Any issues noted by CxA are tracked in a Master Issues Log (MIL) on the Cx Database platform. GC/Subcontractors correct issues noted by CxA and update MIL in Cx Database for CxA verification of issue corrections.

9. GC/Subcontractors develop Start-Up Plans. GC and Subcontractors coordinate overall schedule of equipment/systems Testing and Start-Up and submit schedule to CxA so that CxA may witness Testing and Start-Up activities as required (for RTU).

10. Subcontractors complete testing (e.g. duct and piping pressure testing, piping flushing, etc.) as required by Division 23 and 26 specifications. Subcontractors compile copies of completed testing documentation in the Start-Up Plan and submit to CxA for verification of completion of testing activities prior to Functional Performance Tests.

11. Subcontractors perform Start-Up and Initial Checkout per the Start-Up Plan documentation and checklists. Subcontractors assemble completed Start-Up Plan documentation and submit to CxA for verification of completion of Start-Up activities prior to Functional Performance Tests.

12. Controls Contractor sets up required BAS System trending and reporting for CxA review prior to FPTs.

13. Test and Balance (TAB) Contractor completes air and water balance work and submits Final TAB Report for CxA review prior to FPTs.

14. Functional Performance Tests are executed by GC and Subcontractors, under supervision of and documented by CxA.

06/25/19





15. Items of non-compliance in material, installation or set-up will be corrected at GC expense and system shall be retested.

16. CxA executes Cx-PMOR program for Warranty Period following Substantial Completion. CxA conducts quarterly site visits with CT during Warranty Period to review Building Systems Operation to identify operational issues and additional optimization and energy savings strategies identified by Cx-PMOR Warranty Phase monitoring.

17. CxA issues Final Commissioning Report.18. Opposed Season Functional Performance Tests are scheduled by the GC and

Subcontractors. Opposed Season Functional Performance Tests are executed by Subcontractors, under supervision of and documented by CxA.

19. CT participates in End of Warranty Review meetings with facility maintenance staff to review systems performance. CxA shall provide a comprehensive review of the system operation using the Cx-PMOR System to analyze the data provided from the BAS over the Warranty period. An updated Warranty Phase Issue Log shall be generated, and the Contractor shall resolve all issues determined by the CT to be subject to Warranty requirements.

20. CxA issues Opposed Season Functional Performance Test report, Cx-PMOR Warranty Phase Monitoring Quarterly Reports and Warranty Review Meeting minutes for insertion in Final Commissioning Report.

3.2 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

A. Any sampling rates noted are for CxA Functional Performance Testing only. GC/Subcontractors will develop and execute Pre-Functional Checklists for 100% of the commissioned equipment (no sampling allowed for Pre-Functional Checklists).

B. HVAC:

1. Heating Hot Water System including the Condensing Boiler, Hot Water Pumps, Pressure Fill Station, Air Separator, Expansion Tank and associated equipment.

2. Gas Fired – DX Rooftop Units.3. Variable Frequency Drives associated with all commissioned HVAC equipment.4. Variable Volume Terminal Units. All VAV terminals will be trended in heating and

cooling modes. Functional testing will be completed on a 30% sample of the VAV terminals.

5. Split System Fan Coil Units and exterior Condensing Units.6. Exhaust Fans.7. Unit Heaters, Cabinet Heaters, Finned Tube Radiators, and Radiant Ceiling Panels.8. Sample verification of Final TAB Report air and water readings.9. Building Automation Systems (‘BAS/EMS’) for all commissioned equipment including

graphics, system integration components and any campus integration/monitoring.10. BAS System trending data for 100% of the equipment monitored or controlled by the BAS.

C. ELECTRICAL:

1. Lighting Control Systems:

a. Scheduled Lighting Controlsb. Occupancy Sensor Lighting Controls.c. Daylight Harvesting Lighting Controls.

06/25/19





3.3 RESPONSIBILITIES OF COMMISSIONING TEAM MEMBERS

A. Architect/Engineer (A/E):

1. Document design intent of systems. Respond to any issues developed during the commissioning process that may require clarification of design intent.

B. Commissioning Agent (CxA):

1. Facilitate cooperation of CT in Commissioning work.2. Provide periodic progress reports of Commissioning status.3. Review, track and coordinate resolution of non-compliance and deficiencies identified by

Commissioning team. Maintain Master Issues Log (MIL), Resolution Log, & Testing Record. Maintain records of all issues submitted by Commissioning team.

4. Identify Commissioning activities for inclusion into the project schedule by the GC.5. Attend and chair Commissioning team meetings as required.6. Develop Commissioning Plan including project specific Functional Performance Test

procedures.7. Conduct initial Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting to review Cx Plan and responsibilities of

each member of the CT.8. Review final A/E approved shop drawings for equipment to be commissioned and modify

Cx Plan if required.9. Review A/E approved control submittal sequences of operation and update Commissioning

Plan Functional Performance Tests (FPTs) if required. Work with Contractors and AE until sufficient clarity has been obtained, in writing, to update Commissioning Plan FPTs.

10. Make periodic site visits to complete Commissioning work. Provide a summary “Site Visit Report” following each site visit

11. Attend construction meetings as necessary. Typically, periodic site visits will be scheduled to allow attendance at regularly scheduled contractor progress meetings.

12. Review Pre-Functional Checklists completed by Subcontractors during periodic site visits.13. Witness RTU Start-Up by Subcontractors/Vendors.14. Review final executed Start-Up Plan systems testing and equipment Start-Up

documentation completed by Subcontractors prior to Functional Performance Testing to verify systems readiness for testing.

15. Conduct Trend-Logging Plan Meeting with GC/Controls Contractor prior to Functional Testing to coordinate BAS trending requirements. Trend-Logging Plan Meeting will coordinate and finalize:

a. System points to be monitored.b. Frequency/interval of monitoring for each point.c. Trend data output file format, presentation, and data-transfer requirements.

16. Review the final Test and Balance report prior to Functional Performance Testing to verify systems readiness for testing.

17. Review Control Contractor trending and monitoring data prior to Functional Performance Testing to verify systems readiness for testing.

18. Witness FPTs. Document test results and recommend system for acceptance.19. As a part of the FPTs, witness the TAB Subcontractor back-check a sampling of the Final

TAB Report air and water readings.20. Provide Final Commissioning Report, summarizing final disposition of building systems

after Functional Performance Testing.

06/25/19





21. Execute Cx-PMOR program during Warranty Period following Substantial Completion. Conduct four site visits with CT during Warranty Period (at quarterly intervals) to review Building Systems Operation to identify operational issues and additional optimization and energy savings strategies identified by Cx-PMOR Warranty Phase monitoring (allow 8 hours for each visit).

22. Witness Opposed Season Functional Performance Testing and document results.23. Attend End of Warranty Review Meeting and document findings.24. Issue updates to the Final Commissioning Report for Opposed Season Testing, Warranty

Phase Cx-PMOR Monitoring Reports, and End of Warranty Meeting.

C. General Contractor (GC):

1. Leads the commissioning process for the construction members of the Commissioning Team and facilitates cooperation of the commissioned systems Subcontractors, Equipment Manufacturers and Vendors in executing and completing the commissioning work. In addition to the specific GC commissioning roles and responsibilities specified herein, the GC is responsible for insuring that the commissioning roles and responsibilities of the construction members of the Commissioning Team are executed and completed as specified.

2. Insures resolution of non-compliance and deficiencies of construction related items identified by CxA. Insures Cx Database Master Issues Log (MIL) is updated by Subcontractors to reflect deficiency item corrections for CxA verification. Updates to Cx Database regarding corrections of deficiencies shall be made within two working days of completion of deficiency correction work.

3. Notifies CxA of completion of GC/Subcontractor Commissioning Activities (e.g. deficiency corrections, Start-Up completion, readiness for Functional Performance Testing, etc.) via Cx Database. Updates to Cx Database regarding status of Commissioning activities shall be made within two working days of activity completion.

4. Review Commissioning Plan and FPT procedures.5. Attend Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting and other Commissioning Team Meetings.6. Assist CT with developing a comprehensive Commissioning schedule.7. Incorporate Commissioning activities into the construction schedule.8. Periodically update Commissioning activities in the construction schedule.9. Submit copies of final A/E approved submittal data for all commissioned equipment to

CxA.10. Oversee development of Pre-Functional Checklists by Subcontractors.11. Oversee development of equipment Start-Up Plan by Subcontractor and execution of

equipment Start-Up checks by Subcontractor/Vendors.

a. Insure equipment Start-Up Plan is developed and contains forms for all required Testing and Start-Up activities.

b. With Subcontractors, develop overall schedule of Testing and Start-Up activities. Submit final Testing and Start-Up schedule to CxA 30 days prior to start of any such activities to allow CxA to schedule site visit trips to witness activities as required (RTU Start-Up).

c. Insure final executed Start-Up Plan is submitted to CxA prior to start of Functional Performance Testing. Insure final executed Start-Up plan is organized and contains all documentation required by this specification before submitting to CxA.

06/25/19





12. Assures CxA that equipment and systems are ready for Functional Performance Testing. Verifies that the following activities are completed, and documentation submitted to CxA as a prerequisite for Functional Performance Testing:

a. PFCs are 100% complete by Subcontractors and submitted to CxA.b. All deficiency items noted by CxA prior to Functional Performance Testing are

corrected by Subcontractors and MIL is updated accordingly.c. Executed Start-Up Plan electronic PDF files submitted to CxA including:

1) All equipment/systems testing documents completed by Subcontractors.2) All equipment/systems Start-Up documents completed by

Subcontractors/Vendors.3) All Control System Start-Up documentation completed by Controls

Contractor.4) Maintenance logs of all interim maintenance tasks performed by

Subcontractors/Vendors on all equipment from initial Start-Up through final Owner acceptance, so warranties are not void.

d. Attend Trend-Logging Plan Meeting with CxA and Controls Contractor. Verify trending data is provided to CxA a minimum of one week prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing.

e. Submit hard-copy Commissioning Plan Functional Performance Test checklists signed and dated by Controls Subcontractor to CxA for review prior to start of Functional Testing (to verify controls contractor has thoroughly checked all FPTs prior to CxA witnessing FPTs).

f. Final Test and Balance Report is submitted to CxA for review.

13. Attend and participate in Cx Functional Performance Testing as required to insure Subcontractor and Equipment Vendor participation and completion of scheduled Functional Performance Testing activities. At a minimum, the GC should be present at start and completion of daily Functional Testing activities to insure Subcontractor/Equipment Vendor participation and completion of Functional Testing work.

14. Verify Subcontractors correct deficiencies identified during Functional Performance Testing.

15. Schedule, coordinate and attend four site visits with CxA during Warranty Period (at quarterly intervals) to review Building Systems Operation to identify operational issues and additional optimization and energy savings strategies identified by Cx-PMOR Warranty Phase monitoring (allow 8 hours for each visit).

16. Verify Subcontractors correct deficiencies identified during Warranty Phase Cx-PMOR Monitoring.

17. Schedule, coordinate and assist CT in Opposed Season Functional Performance Testing. Verify Subcontractors correct any deficiencies noted during Opposed Season Testing.

18. Schedule, coordinate and attend the End of Warranty Review Meetings to review system/equipment performance. Correct any deficiency issues noted during warranty period per the Project Warranty Process.

D. Subcontractors / Equipment Manufacturers / Vendors:

1. Review Commissioning Plan and FPT procedures.2. Correct deficiencies of construction related items identified by CxA. Update Cx Database

to reflect deficiency item corrections for CxA verification. Updates to Cx Database

06/25/19





regarding corrections of deficiencies shall be made within two working days of completion of deficiency correction work.

3. Notify CxA of completion of Commissioning Activities (e.g. deficiency corrections, Start-Up completion, readiness for Functional Performance Testing, etc.) via Cx Database. Updates to Cx Database regarding status of Commissioning activities shall be made within two working days of activity completion.

4. Attend Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting and other Commissioning Team Meetings.5. Assist CT with developing a comprehensive Commissioning schedule.6. Develop Pre-Functional Checklists from the Contract Documents, A/E approved Equipment

Submittals, and Standard Manufacturer Installation Checklists.7. Execute PFCs during each phase of construction (installation, piping, ducting, insulation,

electrical, controls, etc.) as the work is completed.8. Provide necessary personnel to assist CxA (e.g. remove FCU covers, open electrical panel

covers, manipulate BAS, etc.) with reviews of the Pre-Functional Checklists during periodic CxA site visits.

9. Develop Start-Up Plan with GC.10. Execute all required equipment and systems testing as required by project specifications

(e.g. duct pressure testing, piping pressure testing, piping flushing, electrical acceptance testing, etc.). Provide schedule of testing activities to CxA 30 days prior to start of any testing so that CxA may witness a sampling of the testing if desired. Submit completed testing documentation in final executed Start-Up Plan electronic PDF files to CxA for review prior to start of Functional Performance Testing.

11. Execute equipment Start-Up per Start-Up Plan. Provide schedule of equipment Start-Up activities to CxA 30 days prior to beginning any equipment Start-Up so that CxA may witness a sampling of the equipment Start-Up activities as required (RTU Start-Up). Submit completed Start-Up documentation in final executed Start-Up Plan electronic PDF files to CxA prior to start of Functional Performance Testing.

12. Ensure installation work is complete, is in compliance with Contract Documents and is ready for Functional Performance Testing.

a. Verify PFCs are 100% complete and forwarded to GC for submission to CxA.b. Verify all deficiency items noted by CxA prior to Functional Performance Testing

are corrected and deficiency item status is updated in Cx Database. Deficiency item status updates should be made within two days of completion of corrective work.

c. Verify Start-Up Plan electronic PDF files are forwarded to GC/CxA.d. Notify CT that equipment and systems are ready for Functional Performance Testing.

13. Provide certified and calibrated instrumentation required to take measurements of system and equipment performance during Functional Performance Testing.

14. Execute FPTs developed by CxA as described in contract documents and Commissioning Plan. FPT test results will be documented by CxA.

15. Correct deficiencies identified during Functional Performance Testing.16. Attend four site visits with CxA during Warranty Period (at quarterly intervals) to review

Building Systems Operation to identify operational issues and additional optimization and energy savings strategies identified by Cx-PMOR Warranty Phase monitoring (allow 8 hours for each visit).

17. Correct deficiencies identified during Warranty Phase Cx-PMOR Monitoring.18. Execute Opposed Season Functional Performance Testing. Correct any deficiencies noted

during Opposed Season Testing.

06/25/19





19. Participate in the End of Warranty Review Meeting to review system/equipment performance. Correct any deficiency issues noted during warranty period per the Project Warranty Process.

E. Controls Contractor (CC):


to reflect deficiency item corrections for CxA verification. Updates to Cx Database regarding corrections of deficiencies shall be made within two working days of completion of deficiency correction work.

3. Notify CxA of completion of Commissioning Activities (e.g. deficiency corrections, Start-Up completion, readiness for Functional Performance Testing, etc.) via Cx Database. Updates to Cx Database regarding status of Commissioning activities shall be made within two working days of activity completion.

4. Attend Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting and other Commissioning Team Meetings.5. Completely install and thoroughly inspect Start-Up, test, adjust, calibrate and document

systems and equipment under Building Automation/Controls Contract.6. Assist Subcontractors with development of equipment PFCs.7. Develop Pre-Functional Checklists for BAS Control System from the Contract Documents,

A/E approved Equipment Submittals, and Standard Manufacturer Installation Checklists. Forward to GC to submit to CxA for review prior to execution.

8. Complete PFCs as control work is completed.9. Provide laptop computer, software and training to accommodate TAB Contractor in system

balancing.10. Maintain database of control parameters submitted by TAB Contractor subsequent to field

adjustments and measurements.11. Submit schedule of Control System Start-Up activities to CxA 30 days prior to beginning

any Control System Start-Up work to allow CxA to witness Control Systems Start-Up work if desired. Provide on-site technician skilled in software programming and hardware operation to assist CxA during DDC Sensor calibrations and device checks required during Start-Up.

12. Maintain comprehensive records of all Control System Start-Up records including but not limited to system calibration checkout records and point-to-point checklists. Submit completed Start-Up documentation in final executed Start-Up Plan electronic PDF files to CxA prior to start of Functional Performance Testing.

13. Ensure installation work is complete, is in compliance with Contract Documents and is ready for Functional Performance Testing.

a. Verify PFCs are 100% complete and forwarded to GC for submission to CxA.b. Verify all deficiency items noted by CxA prior to Functional Performance Testing

are corrected and deficiency item status is updated in Cx Database. Deficiency item status updates should be made within two days of completion of corrective work.

c. Verify Start-Up Plan electronic PDF files are forwarded to GC/CxA.d. Notify CT that equipment and systems are ready for Functional Performance Testing.e. Submit executed copies of the Commissioning Functional Performance Tests to CxA

for review prior to start of Functional Performance Testing. The executed copies shall be signed and dated by the Control Contractor technician directly responsible for verification of the control sequence or system operation. The purpose of this process is to document that the Control Contractor has tested and verified each sequence prior to the CxA witnessing the Functional Performance Testing.

06/25/19





14. Provide BAS System trending data for the Commissioning Performance Monitoring, Optimization and Reporting (Cx-PMOR) System as follows a. Data Set-Up and Reporting. The Controls Contractor for this project shall provide

automated data reporting through the Building Automation System which shall deliver system operating data and utility consumption data daily to the Cx-PMOR System via trend reports which are automatically provided to the Cx-PMOR System by means of either automated e-mail or automated secure FTP data acquisition. The complete cost for the Controls Contractor to set up ALL required trending and reporting shall be included in the project contract cost. The Cx-PMOR trending and reporting shall be provided for all equipment identified in paragraph 3.2 monitored and controlled by the BAS. All BAS system trending data set-up and reporting to Cx-PMOR System must be completed as a prerequisite for Cx Functional Performance Testing. BAS Trending shall remain in place regardless of continued Owner participation in Cx-PMOR monitoring.

b. Attend meeting with CxA and GC to coordinate trend-logging plan for Cx-PMOR System.

c. Trend reports shall be automatically delivered to the Cx-PMOR server daily between 12AM and 6AM either via e-mail or automated secure FTP.

d. The duration of each trend report shall include at least the entire previous day’s (e.g. midnight to midnight) data. Optionally, the report could be required to include the previous three days’ data so that 1-2 days of missing reports could be made up by the subsequent report. The reports shall NEVER include more than a maximum five days data. The CxA shall provide direction as to the desired duration.

e. All required system operating data trends shall report the instantaneous value of the data point being trended at 15-minute intervals unless specifically directed otherwise by the CxA. The trend sampling interval for each data point must be consistent (e.g. data cannot start at a five-minute interval and then change to a fifteen-minute interval).

f. All utility consumption data (kWh, ton-hr, btu, etc.) trends shall report the accumulated consumption across the interval period (e.g. electrical consumption, kWh, total for the 15-minute period) and shall not report total accumulating consumption. Demand shall be calculated as a virtual point by the Cx-PMOR Analysis System. If this is not possible then the instantaneous 15-minute demand shall be reported, and the consumption shall be calculated as a virtual point by the Cx-PMOR System.

g. The Contractor shall submit their proposed trending file format to the CxA for approval prior to implementing for all requested trend points (CSV or XLS files are preferred format however PDF may also be acceptable). Once approved and set up

the trend file formatting shall NOT change from one report to the next. If trend formatting changes due to software upgrade, then the Contractor shall be required to compensate CxA for any changes required to the PMOR system configuration to accept the new data formatting.

h. The data point naming convention utilized for trend reports shall comply with the Owner’s established point naming convention. The subject line of the e-mail (and/or the file name of the actual report file) must be unique and descriptive of the points contained in the report file (e.g. “CCHS-HP - RTU1”). Reports shall be set up such that points are grouped into reports for each major system or collections of related smaller equipment.

i. All data point names must be unique from other points in the same project.j. Required Monitoring Points:

06/25/19





1) Control Contractor is required to provide BAS System trending data for the Commissioning Performance Monitoring, Optimization and Reporting (Cx-PMOR) System for 100% of the equipment monitored or controlled by the BAS.

2) Examples of monitored points by system type are included in a Table at the end of this specification. The final list of points to be monitored will be furnished by CxA to the Controls Contractor after the building automation system submittal has been reviewed.

3) A formal trend request document will be provided to the Controls Contractor with the monitored points list and this same document shall be completed and returned to the CxA as proof that set-up has been completed.

15. Submit two weeks of operating trend data (either automatically or manually) to Cx-PMOR System for CxA review to assess the readiness of the specific system to begin on-site Functional Testing.

16. Provide instrumentation, computer, software, and communication resources necessary to demonstrate total operation of building systems and control system equipment during Functional Performance Testing.

17. Provide on-site technician skilled in software programming and hardware operation to exercise sequences of operation and to correct control deficiencies identified during Functional Performance Testing.

18. Correct BAS system deficiency issues identified during CxA FPT.19. Submit operating trend data automatically to Cx-PMOR System for a period of one year

after Substantial Completion.20. Control Contractor Technician will attend four site visits with CxA during Warranty Period

(at quarterly intervals) to review Building Systems and Controls Systems Operation (allow 8 hours for each site visit). Control Technician shall provide access to Control System and manipulate Controls as required by CxA to observe additional optimization and energy savings strategies identified by Cx-PMOR Warranty Phase monitoring.

21. Correct Control System deficiencies identified during Warranty Phase Cx-PMOR monitoring.

22. Provide instrumentation, computer, software, and communication resources necessary to demonstrate total operation of building systems and control system equipment during Opposed Season Testing.

23. Provide on-site technician skilled in software programming and hardware operation to exercise sequences of operation and to correct control deficiencies identified during Opposed Season Testing.

24. Participate in the End of Warranty Review Meeting to review system/equipment performance. Correct any deficiency issues noted during warranty period per the Project Warranty Process.

F. Test Adjust and Balance (TAB) Contractor:


to reflect deficiency item corrections for CxA verification. Updates to Cx Database regarding corrections of deficiencies shall be made within two working days of completion of deficiency correction work.

3. Notify CxA of completion of Commissioning Activities (e.g. deficiency corrections, Start-Up completion, readiness for Functional Performance Testing, etc.) via Cx Database.

06/25/19





Updates to Cx Database regarding status of Commissioning activities shall be made within two working days of activity completion.

4. Attend Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting and other Commissioning Team Meetings.5. Assist Subcontractors with development of equipment PFCs.6. Complete PFCs as TAB work is completed.7. Cooperate with CC with execution of required work.8. Coordinate schedule for all TAB activities with CxA. Provide CxA with final schedule for

all TAB activities 30 days prior to starting TAB work to allow CxA to schedule site visits to witness TAB work and readings if desired.

9. Submit copy of final TAB report to CxA for review prior to start of Functional Performance Testing for CxA review to assess readiness for FPTs.

10. Rebalance deficient areas identified during Commissioning.11. Provide on-site technician and equipment, as necessary, skilled in TAB procedures to

provide verification of equipment and system performance and to correct any TAB deficiencies identified during Functional Performance Testing.

12. Provide on-site technician and equipment, as necessary, skilled in TAB procedures to provide verification of Final TAB report air and water readings to CxA during FPTs. Allow 8 hours total over one single day testing period for TAB Verification readings.

13. TAB Contractor will attend four site visits with CxA during Warranty Period (at quarterly intervals) to review Building Systems Operation (allow 8 hours for each site visit). TAB Contractor will rebalance deficient areas and take air and water balance measurements as requested by CxA to identify additional optimization and energy savings strategies identified by Cx-PMOR Warranty Phase monitoring.

14. Provide on-site technician and equipment, as necessary, skilled in TAB procedures to provide verification of equipment and system performance and to correct any TAB deficiencies identified during Opposed Season FPTs:

15. Participate in the End of Warranty Review Meeting to review system/equipment performance and operations. Correct any deficiency issues noted during warranty period per the Project Warranty Process.

3.4 COMMISSIONING TEAM (CT) MEETINGS

A. CT meetings will be held periodically as determined by CxA with frequency increasing as construction advances and systems become operational. Attendance is mandatory. CxA will record minutes and attendance. CxA will chair CT Meetings.

B. Discussions held in CT meetings shall include, but not be limited to system/equipment Start-Up, progress, scheduling, testing, documentation, deficiencies and problem resolution.

3.5 REPORTING

A. CxA will provide regular status reports to GC and Owner, with increasing frequency as construction and Commissioning progresses.

B. CxA will regularly communicate with members of Commissioning team, keeping them apprised of Commissioning progress.

C. CxA shall submit non-compliance and deficiency reports to Owner and GC.

06/25/19





D. CxA shall provide a Final Commissioning Report to Owner.

3.6 SUBMITTAL REVIEWS.

A. CxA shall review A/E approved submittals for commissioning purposes only. Review is primarily intended to aid in development of Functional Testing procedures. CxA will submit review comments (if any) to A/E and OR.

B. CxA will update Cx Plan PFCs and FPTs if required based on final A/E approved submittals.

3.7 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS (PFC)

A. GC/Subcontractors will develop and execute the Pre-Functional Checklists.

B. Subcontractors must execute PFCs electronically. Handwritten execution or comments are unacceptable.

C. GC/Subcontractors will complete the PFCs in phases (e.g. setting equipment, piping equipment, insulating it, making up electrical connections, etc.) as the work is completed in the field. The

intent is for the GC/Subcontractors to complete the PFCs as the work is being completed - not to

wait until the end of the installation to complete the PFCs.

D. CxA will monitor the GC/Subcontractor PFC completion during periodic site visits and provide updates on completion status in CxA Site Visit Reports. GC/Subcontractor shall provide necessary field personnel to compete the PFCs in a timely manner concurrent with work progress. PFC completion status not matching work completion observed in the field will be noted as a deficiency issue by the CxA.

E. CxA will sample verify completed PFCs during periodic site visits.

F. The CxA will randomly select PFCs from each commissioned system for verification during periodic site visits. The Pre-Functional Checklists will be sample verified by the CxA at approximately 50% equipment rough-in stage (equipment set, piped and/or ducted) and at 100% complete installation just prior to Functional Performance Testing.

G. Any deficiency issues noted will be included and tracked in the Master Issues Log.

H. GC will submit executed Pre-Functional Checklist PDF files to CxA for review to verify completion of PFCs. GC will submit executed Pre-Functional Checklists to CxA as a searchable, combined PDF file with bookmarks for each PFC file. Executed PFC PDF files must be submitted to CxA prior to start of Functional Testing.

3.8 MASTER ISSUES LOG (MIL)

A. Commissioning Issues will be tracked from initial notice by CxA through correction via the Cx Database as follows:

1. Open Issue:

06/25/19





a. Issues noted by the CxA during periodic site visits will be included to the Cx Database Master Issues Log (MIL) for each building.

2. Recheck Issue:

a. The Subcontractors shall correct the deficiency items and notify the CxA when the items are corrected and ready for CxA verification by updating the deficiency item status from “Open” to “Recheck” in the “Building Start:” database. CxA does not recheck issues until they have been noted ready to be reviewed on the Cx Database MIL by the Subcontractor that corrected the issue.

3. Closed Issue:

a. The CxA will verify the correction and update the item status from “Recheck” to “Fixed” in the Cx Database.

B. Costs for CxA to reverify any Issue marked by the Subcontractor for CxA recheck and found to be incomplete will be back-charged to the GC (see paragraphs below for CxA costs).

3.9 START-UP AND INITIAL CHECKOUT

A. GC/Subcontractors shall schedule all required Systems Testing and Equipment Start-Up with Commissioning Team. GC/Subcontractors shall execute Systems Testing and Equipment/Systems Start-Up per the Start-Up Plan.

B. GC/Subcontractor shall submit final schedule of Testing and Start-Up activities to CxA 30 days prior to any testing or Start-Up activity to allow CxA to witness as required.

C. GC/Subcontractor shall execute equipment/systems Testing and Start-Up per Start-Up Plan, document results and compile/organize all Start-Up Plan documentation into electronic PDF files (searchable from Table of Contents to each documentation item).

D. GC/Subcontractor forward copy of completed Start-Up Plan PDF files to CxA for review to verify completion of Start-Up activities. Executed Start-Up Plan PDF files must be submitted to CxA prior to start of Functional Testing.

E. GC/Subcontractors shall clearly list outstanding items or Testing/Start-Up activities that are not completed successfully. Updates to Cx Database regarding corrections of any Testing and Start-Up deficiency issues shall be made within two working days of completion of retesting work.

F. Subcontractors shall submit an updated Start-Up report and Statement of Correction on any incomplete or non-compliance report.

G. Any Testing or Start-Up activity marked as completed which is later found to be incomplete and causes re-verification work by CxA, delays during Functional Performance Testing, or retesting will be back-charged to the GC (see paragraphs below for CxA costs).

06/25/19





3.10 PERFORMANCE MONITORING, OPTIMIZATION, AND REPORTING (Cx-PMOR) SYSTEM

A. Objectives and Scope:1. This project will utilize a cloud-based SaaS (Software as a Service) Commissioning,

Performance Monitoring, Optimization, and Reporting (Cx-PMOR) system which is provided by the CxA. The system shall be utilized during two phases of the project: Construction Phase and Warranty Phase.

B. Construction Phase - System Readiness: 1. The Cx-PMOR System will be utilized prior to Functional Performance Testing to gauge

the readiness of the systems to be tested. 2. At least 2 weeks prior to the scheduled start of Functional Testing the Building Automation

System (BAS) shall have delivered two weeks of operating data to the Cx-PMOR System. If the BAS communication capabilities are not complete sufficiently to enable automated delivery of trend reports then the Controls Contractor shall manually generate two weeks trend data to a report. This manual report shall be the SAME EXACT REPORT FORMAT as was prior approved and will be used for the permanent reporting (specified elsewhere herein). This manual report shall either be e-mailed to the CxA or shall be e-mailed to the project’s specific Cx-PMOR e-mail account.

3. Following receipt of two weeks of operating data (either automatically or manual) the CxA shall review the data utilizing the Cx-PMOR System to assess the readiness of the specific system to begin on-site Functional Testing.

4. The CxA shall notify the project team of any deficiencies identified by the trend data analysis that would need to be addressed prior to beginning Functional Testing.

C. Warranty Phase – Monitoring: 1. The Cx-PMOR System will be utilized during the first year following substantial

completion to monitor the performance of the building and the individual systems. The Cx-PMOR System will also provide Fault Detection and Diagnostics Analysis to locate operational problems.

2. Any operational deficiency identified by the system will be documented using the system’s online Issue Log and the deficiency will be resolved through the contract’s Project Warranty process.

3. CxA will conduct quarterly site visits with CT to review operational issues and identify additional optimization strategies indicated by the Cx-PMOR Monitoring conductive to energy savings and improving or correcting comfort issues.

4. At approximately 10 months following substantial completion the CxA shall provide a comprehensive review of the system operation using the Cx-PMOR System to analyze the data provided from the BAS. An updated Warranty Phase Issue Log shall be generated, and the GC shall resolve all issues determined by the team to be subject to Warranty requirements.

3.11 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Objectives and Scope:

1. The objective of Functional Performance Testing is to demonstrate each system is operating according to documented design intent and Contract Documents. Functional Performance Testing facilitates bringing systems from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic

06/25/19





operation. Additionally, during Functional Performance Testing, areas of deficient performance are identified and corrected, improving operation and functioning of systems.

2. Each system shall be operated through all modes of operation (occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, etc.) where there is a specified system response. Verifying each sequence in the sequences of operation is required.

3. Functional Performance Testing is separate from and in addition to any other Start-Up, testing, demonstration or contractor commissioning required by other sections of the project specifications.

4. The Functional Performance Tests will be executed by the GC, Subcontractors, Controls/BAS Contractor, TAB Contractor and Equipment Vendors. The CxA will witness the Functional Performance Testing and document the results in the Cx Database.

B. Initial Control Systems Checkout:

1. The control systems must be verified for correct operation by the Control System Subcontractor prior to the CxA witnessing and documenting the Functional Performance

Tests. The CxA Functional Performance Tests are intended to document completion of the Control System and proper operation of the Commissioned Systems. The CxA Functional Performance Tests are not intended to serve as a “Quality Control” measure or “Punch List” for the General Contractor, Controls Contractor or other Subcontractor. The CxA Functional Performance Tests are not intended to serve as “Beta” testing for the Control Systems.

2. The Control Systems Subcontractor shall sign/initial and date a copy of the Cx Plan FPT forms prior to verification by CxA. Only individuals having direct knowledge that a line item task or sequence of operation was performed or checked will initial or check that item off. The Control Systems Subcontractor shall list any FPT sequences or items not completed successfully utilizing the notes section of the FPT form. These notes shall clearly indicate why the item or sequence was not completed or operated as indicated on the FPT form.

3. The intent of this process is for the Control Systems Subcontractor to physically check and verify proper equipment and integrated systems operation for all operational sequences prior to the CxA witnessing and documenting the actual Functional Performance Testing.

C. Coordination and Scheduling:

1. Prior to equipment Start-Up, CxA will conduct a Commissioning Functional Testing Schedule Meeting with the Commissioning Team to establish a coordinated approach to the integration of the Functional Performance Testing activities within the Master Construction Schedule. The GC will update the Master Construction Schedule to include all Functional Performance Testing activities.

2. GC will provide sufficient notice to CxA regarding completion schedule for equipment and systems. GC will schedule Functional Performance Tests with CT. CxA shall witness and document functional testing of equipment and systems. Subcontractor shall execute tests under direction of CxA.

3. GC must allow sufficient time in the Construction Schedule to complete the Functional Performance Testing prior to Owner move-in/occupancy. This includes completing the commissioned systems installations, Testing, Start-Up, and all prerequisites required for Functional Performance Testing. Time and expenses for CxA to complete Functional Performance Testing during Owner move-in or after Owner occupancy will be considered Additional Services to be paid by the GC.

06/25/19





4. Functional Performance Tests are integrated systems tests. For example, the Fire Alarm System must be complete and ready for operation to test the RTU Fire Alarm shutdown sequence. All equipment and systems associated with a Functional Performance Test must be complete and ready for testing.

5. In general, the Functional Performance Testing will be organized/scheduled based on the following hierarchy:

a. Project completion. Some areas of the building may be complete before other areas. Priority will be given to these area systems assuming they can be grouped together for integrated systems testing.

b. Integrated systems. In general, the testing will be organized into groups of integrated systems from larger systems down to smaller systems (e.g. chilled water system, air handling system, terminal units, etc.).

c. Systems with limited integration and “stand alone” systems (e.g. unit heater or fan only being monitored by the building control system).

6. Functional Performance Tests will be grouped together to allow testing to be conducted over weekly testing periods to maximize testing efficiencies. Single systems testing spread out over multiple testing weeks will not be allowed. In general, the testing will begin on Monday and end on Friday afternoon. The actual testing hours will be coordinated with the GC/Subcontractors based on the amount of testing work to be completed during that week. GC/Subcontractors should be prepared to work from 8:00AM to 5:00PM each day to complete the testing for that weekly period.

7. Some systems may require testing after normal working hours (e.g. Lighting Controls, etc.) to avoid conflicts with ongoing work or adjacent building operations. This testing will be scheduled for evenings (Monday – Thursday) or early mornings (Tuesday – Friday). Weekend testing will only be allowed if agreed upon by CT in advance.

D. Prerequisites for Functional Performance Testing:

1. Pre-Functional Checklists must be 100% complete - including any deficiency corrections

noted from CxA sample verifications – and submitted to CxA as a prerequisite to scheduling Functional Performance Tests.

2. The GC/Subcontractors must submit the fully executed Start-Up Plan electronic PDF files including all equipment and systems testing documentation (e.g. duct and piping pressure testing, cleaning/flushing documentation, etc.), and all executed start up and initial check-out documentation as a prerequisite to scheduling Functional Performance Tests.

3. The TAB Subcontractor shall complete all Test and Balance work and submit Final Test and Balance Report for review by A/E and CxA prior to start of Commissioning Functional Testing. A/E shall review Final Test and Balance Report for acceptance. CxA review of Final TAB Report is cursory (not for acceptance) and is primarily intended to ensure that the equipment and systems are ready to be functionally tested.

4. The GC/Control Contractor must submit all control systems Start-Up and initial checkout documentation (including point-to-point verifications, etc.) in the Start-Up Plan as a prerequisite to scheduling Functional Performance Tests.

5. The GC/Control Contractor must submit executed copies of the Commissioning Functional Performance Tests (signed and dated by the Control Contractor technician directly responsible for verification of the control sequence or system operation) to the CxA as a prerequisite to scheduling Functional Performance Tests (to show that the Control Contractor has tested and verified each sequence prior to CxA witnessing the Functional Performance Tests).

06/25/19





6. The GC/Control Contractor must complete BAS system trending data set-up and reporting set-up for Cx-PMOR System and submit two weeks of operating data (either automatically or manually) for CxA review to assess the readiness of the specific system to begin on-site Functional Testing. Operating data must be submitted at least 7 days prior to anticipated start of Functional Testing.

E. Test and Balance (TAB) Verification:

1. Initial TAB Verification test will include a random sampling of all TAB final report air and water readings. TAB Subcontractor will re-read devices with the same equipment used in the TAB process in the presence of the CxA. The devices will be selected at random by the CxA and the CxA will record the TAB Verification readings. All Verification readings must be within ±10% of final TAB report readings.

2. Readings outside of the ±10% tolerance in more than 10% of the TAB Verification readings will indicate failure of the initial TAB Verification testing and require re-testing. TAB Subcontractor will correct all deficient readings and schedule TAB Verification re-testing with CxA. The CxA will randomly select a different sample of the TAB final report readings for the Verification re-testing.

3. Readings outside of the ±10% tolerance in more than 10% of the TAB Verification re-testing readings will indicate failure of the Verification re-test and will require a second re-testing. TAB Subcontractor will correct all deficient readings and schedule second TAB Verification re-testing with CxA. The TAB Verification re-testing procedures will be repeated a second time again utilizing a different sample of the final TAB report readings selected at random by the CxA.

4. Readings outside of the ±10% tolerance in more than 10% of the second TAB Verification re-testing readings will require TAB Verification retesting for all the TAB final report readings.

5. All TAB verification retesting will be completed at no additional cost to the Owner. See paragraphs below for CxA costs for retesting.

3.12 DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS

A. Documentation:

1. CxA will witness and document results of FPT utilizing Cx Database. FPTs are made available to the Commissioning Team in Cx Database for review and approval prior to testing. CxA will include the executed FPTs in the Final Commissioning Report.

B. Non-Conformance:

1. CxA will record results of Functional Performance Testing. Deficiency or Non-Conformance Issues will be noted and reported to GC and Owner in the Cx Database Master Issues Log (MIL).

2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during tests at discretion of CxA. In such cases, deficiency and resolution will be documented in Cx Database FPT.

3. Every effort will be made to expedite testing and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising integrity of tests. CxA shall not overlook deficient work or loosen acceptance criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues unless directed to do so by the Owner.

4. Deficiency and Non-Conformance Issues are handled in the following manner:

06/25/19





a. When there is no dispute on Deficiency Issue and Subcontractor accepts responsibility for remedial action:

1) CxA documents Deficiency Issue and Subcontractors response and intentions in Cx Database MIL and they go on to another test or sequence.

2) All issues are made available to CT via Cx Database MIL and written Cx Site Visit Reports.

3) Subcontractor corrects deficiency and updates Issue status to “Recheck” in Cx Database MIL.

4) GC reschedules test with Subcontractor.5) CxA witnesses retesting and documents results. Corrected issues will be

updated in Cx Database MIL to “Fixed”.6) See paragraphs below for CxA costs for retesting and reverification work

b. When there is a dispute about a Deficiency Issue, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is responsible:

1) CxA documents Deficiency Issue and Subcontractors response and intentions in Cx Database MIL and they go on to another test or sequence.

2) All issues are made available to CT via Cx Database MIL and written Cx Site Visit Reports.

3) GC facilitates resolution of deficiency. Other parties are brought into discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with A/E. Final acceptance authority is with the Owner.

4) GC documents resolution process.5) Once interpretation and resolution has been decided, appropriate party corrects

deficiency and updates Issue status to “Recheck in Cx Database MIL.6) GC reschedules test and test is repeated until satisfactory performance is

achieved.7) CxA witnesses retesting and documents results. Corrected issues will be

updated in Cx Database MIL to “Fixed”.8) See paragraphs below for CxA costs for retesting and reverification work

C. Costs for CxA MIL Verifications and Retesting:

1. Cost for Subcontractor to correct and retest any PFC or FPT deficiency item, if they are responsible for deficiency, will be theirs. If Subcontractor is not responsible, cost recovery for retesting will be negotiated with GC.

2. CxA has included an 8-hour allowance for delays, reverifications, and retesting work to be used over the duration of the Cx process. CxA will provide status of retesting allowance to CT in periodic site visit reports. CxA labor and expenses for any of the following work beyond the 8-hour allowance will be back-charged to the GC at a cost of $3000 per man-day. The GC must pay retesting costs to CxA in advance for CxA to schedule retesting or reverification site visits.

a. Excessive Deficiency Issue Verifications (for excessive/repeated issues).b. Any reverification of a Deficiency Issue when the Issue is marked as corrected by the

Subcontractor and found to remain deficient by CxA on verification.c. Delays during Functional Performance Testing caused by excessive or repeated

testing failures.d. Functional Performance Test Retesting for any reason.

06/25/19





e. Any FPT MIL Issue Verifications or Retesting.

D. Cost for TAB Verification Retesting:

1. Cost for TAB Subcontractor to correct and retest any TAB deficiency item, if they are responsible for deficiency, will be theirs. If TAB Subcontractor is not responsible, cost recovery for retesting will be negotiated with GC.

2. CxA labor and expenses for any TAB Verification retesting will be back charged to the TAB Subcontractor (or GC if TAB Subcontractor not responsible for cause of retesting) at a cost of $3000 per man-day. CxA TAB Verification Retesting costs must be paid in advance for CxA to schedule retesting site visits.

E. Costs for Functional Performance Test Additional Services:

1. Cost for GC/Subcontractor to complete Functional Performance Testing Additional Services will be theirs.

2. Additional Services for CxA to complete any Functional Performance Testing during Owner move-in or after Owner occupancy (regardless of whether the testing was attempted prior to that point or not) will be paid for by the GC at a cost of $3000 per man-day. GC must pay testing costs to CxA in advance for CxA to schedule testing site visits during Owner move-in or after Owner occupancy.

F. Approval:

1. CxA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on test form. CxA, A/E and Owner provide formal approval of FPT. CxA recommends acceptance of each test to Owner. The Owner gives final approval, providing a signature to GC and Subcontractor.

3.13 OPPOSED SEASON FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. During Warranty Period, seasonal testing (tests delayed until weather conditions are closer to system’s design) will be completed as part of this contract. GC will schedule and coordinate this activity with Subcontractors and building operational staff.

B. One Opposed Season Test will be conducted (during peak conditions opposite initial Functional Performance Testing). Only seasonally impacted sequences and capacities will be retested during the Opposed Season Test (e.g. safeties and fire alarm interlocks will not be retested during the Opposed Season Tests).

C. Tests will be executed, documented and deficiencies corrected by appropriate contractor(s), with Facilities Staff and CxA witnessing.

D. CxA will incorporate final updates to the Final Cx Report as necessary.

3.14 END OF WARRANTY PERIOD MEETING

A. CT will participate in an End of Warranty Period Meeting with the Owner and O&M staff to review the facility and its performance. The End of Warranty Period meeting will be held 10-11 months into the one-year warranty period.

06/25/19





B. The End of Warranty Review meeting shall address:1. Any outstanding construction deficiencies.2. Any deficiencies that were noted by the operations staff during the warranty period.3. Any problems noted by the operations staff related to operating the facility as originally

intended.4. Any operational issues noted by Cx-PMOR process during warranty period.

C. CxA will provide a written report for each Warranty Period Meeting. Report will document the process for resolution of all outstanding issues.1. Outstanding issues noted during the Warranty Period Meeting will be assigned by the GC to

the appropriate Subcontractor for correction.2. GC/Subcontractor will correct the issue and notify the Owner and CxA of correction.


Note: Sample Pre-Functional Checklists, Sample Functional Performance Tests, and Table of Example Trending Points by System Type follow.

06/25/19

SSRCx

Sample HVAC Air Handling Unit PreFunctional Checklist PROJECT: CCHHS Hanson Park Clinic LOCATION: Chicago, ILPROJECT #:

SYSTEM/UNIT: HVAC Equipment / AHU-1x Tested By: Date:

Model Verification - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Specified Manufacturer

2 Installed Manufacturer

3 Specified Model #

4 Installed Model #

5 Serial #

6 Specified Airflow

7 Specified Static Pressure

General - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Inspection and Access doors are operable

2 Casing Undamaged

3 Equipment has been cleaned and finish touched up if necessary.

4 Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided for service.

23 05 00 1.8 E

5 Specified unit mounting requirements

Schedule Note 10

6 Verify unit is mounted per plans and specs

Schedule Note 10

7 Specified access doors Schedule Note 4

8 Verify access doors are provided per plans and specs

Schedule Note 4

9 Access doors are installed so no air leaks through door

10 Access doors open against air pressure

11 Specified lights are provided per plans and specs

Schedule Note 5

12 Verify lights are installed in locations per plans and specs

Schedule Note 5

13 4" housekeeping pad is provided under all floor mounted equipment

23 05 48 3.4 G

14 Flexible pipe connectors are installed on all equipment supported by vibration isolation

23 05 48 3.4 L

Accessories - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Specified accessories are provided (1)

Schedule Note 12

2 Verify accessories are provided (1) Schedule Note 12


Schedule Note 11


5 UV lights are factory installed downstream of cooling coils

Schedule Note 16

Sample

SSRCx

Sample HVAC Air Handling Unit PreFunctional Checklist

SYSTEM/UNIT: HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Tested By: Date:

Ductwork - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Ductwork is connected to unit with flexible connections

Schedule Note 19

2 Duct installation is complete

3 Access doors installed and labeled at fire / smoke dampers, fire dampers, and smoke detectors

23 31 13 3.1 E

Controls - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Return duct smoke detector is installed in return duct

Schedule Note 13

2 Supply duct smoke detector is installed after supply fan

Schedule Note 13

3 Specified return air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

4 Verify return air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

5 Specified mixed air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

6 Verify mixed air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

7 Specified discharge air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

8 Verify discharge air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

9 Specified automatic dampers are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

10 Verify automatic dampers are installed per the controls schematic

Labeling - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Permanently fasten labels are on each major item of mechanical equipment. Labels are located in accessible and visible areas.

23 05 53 2.3 A

2 Duct is labeled with contents and flow direction

23 05 53 2.3 C

Insulation - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Specified Air Duct Insulation requirements:

23 07 13 4.1 - EXPOSED: 2" Rigid Fiberglass Board; CONCEALED: 2" Flexible Fiberglass with Vapor Barrier

2 Verify Air Duct Insulation requirements:

23 07 13 4.1

Startup Mechanical - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Contractor's executed startup procedures haves been submitted for review

PROJECT: CCHHS Hanson Park Clinic LOCATION: Chicago, ILPROJECT #:

Sample

SSRCx

Sample HVAC AHU Functional Performance Test PROJECT: CCHHS Hanson Park Clinic LOCATION: Chicago, ILPROJECT #:

SYSTEM/UNIT: AHU-1x Tested By: Date:

1.01 Pre-test Set points & Conditions - HVAC Equi pment/ AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 RECOR D: OA Flow 2 RECOR D: OA Damper Command 3 RECOR D: RA Temperature °F4 RECORD: RA Humidity %RH5 RECOR D: CHW Valve

Status/Command 6 RECORD: CHW Coil LAT 7 RECORD: VFD - 1

Status/Command 8 RECORD: VFD - 1 Speed %9 RECORD: VFD - 2

Status/Command 10 RECORD: VFD - 2 Speed %11 RECORD: SA Temperature

Setpoint/Actual °F

12 RECORD: SA Flow Setpoint/Actual 13 RECORD: Interlocked Exhaust

Fan(s) Status/Command 14 RECORD: Coil DP Setpoint/Actual 15 RECORD: 2/3 Duct Static Pressure 1.02 Post-test Set points - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x

Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 RESET: Upon completion of test reset set points to pre-test set point values Sam

ple

SSRCx

Sample HVAC AHU Functional Performance Test

SYSTEM/UNIT: HVAC Equipment/AHU-1x Tested By: Date:

2.01 Unit - On - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Unit is commanded on via building BMS

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Fire/Smoke Dampers are fully opened

3 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Supply fan is energized and runs continuously during unit operation

4 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Interlocked Exhaust Fan(s) is energized and runs continuously during unit operation

5 EXPECTED RESPONSE: VFD(s) modulates to maintain constant flow as filters get loaded

6 EXPECTED RESPONSE: OA damper opens to minimum airflow position

7 EXPECTED RESPONSE: RA damper opens fully

8 EXPECTED RESPONSE: OA damper modulates to maintain OA flow setpoint

9 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Cooling coil valve modulates to maintain LAT setpoint (50°F, adj.)

10 VERIFY: Supply fan minimum runtime is programmed

2.02 Cooling Coil Control - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate OA temp > 45°F

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Cooling Coil is enabled

3 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Cooling coil control valve modulates to maintain LAT setpoint of 50°F (adj.)

Sample

PROJECT: CCHHS Hanson Park Clinic LOCATION: Chicago, IL

PROJECT #:

SSRCx



2.03 Supply Air Reset - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate return air temperature > return air high limit

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Supply air temperature setpoint is reset downward

3 RECORD: RA Temperature High Limit Setpoint

°F

4 RECORD: Supply Air Temperature Setpoint/Actual

°F

5 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate return air temperature < return air low limit

6 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Supply air temperature setpoint is reset upward

7 RECORD: RA Temperature Low Limit Setpoint

°F


°F

2.04 Unit - Off - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Unit is commanded to shut down via building BMS

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: OA damper closes

3 EXPECTED RESPONSE: CHW Coil opens

4 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Supply fan deenergizes

5 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Interlocked exhaust fan(s) deenergizes

3.01 High Space Temperature Alarm - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate space temperature greater than the cooling setpoint by a "user defined amount"

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Alarm is sent to BMS

3.02 Low Space Temperature Alarm - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate space temperature lower than the cooling setpoint by a "user defined amount"


Sample


SSRCx



3.03 High Return Air Humidity - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate RA humidity > 70% (adj.)


3.04 Low Return Air Humidity - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate RA humidity < 35% (adj.)


3.05 Supply Fan Failure - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate supply fan status does not match command

2 VERIFY: Remaining supply fan(s) ramp up to maintain supply airflow setpoint


4 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate supply fan runtime exceeded


6 RECORD: Runtime Alarm Setpoint 3.06 Pre Filter DP Alarm - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1x


1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate DP across pre filter > pre filter DP setpoint


3.07 Final Filter DP Alarm - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate DP across final filter > final filter DP setpoint


3.08 Smoke/Fire Detection Alarm - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate smoke detected/emergency shutdown signal

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Unit shuts down according to shutdown sequence


Sample


Sample Electrical Systems Functional Performance TestPROJECT:LOCATION:

CCHHS Hanson Park ClinicChicago, IL

SYSTEM/UNIT: Lighting Controls

1.0 Test Procedure: Occupancy SensorVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 VERIFY A minimum of 20% of occupancy sensors are to be functionally tested. Document room tested and results of device tested.

2 VERIFY by visual response that:3 PROCEDURE Device senses

space is occupied and turns lights ON.

4 PROCEDURE Device senses space is un-occupied.

5 PROCEDURE Device turns lights off after preset time delay. (10-30 minutes)

6 PROCEDURE Local switch operates properly, if applicable.

7 PROCEDURE Device location during time of functional testing is indicated below:

1.1 Device Location: Occupancy Sensor Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 RECORD Devices installed in the following areas were demonstrated to operate, with any issues noted on the MIL. See 'Comments' section for device location.

2 Level 11.2 Device Location: Occupancy Sensor










1 Level 6

SSRCx

Sample

Sample Electrical Systems Functional Performance TestPROJECT: CCHHS Hanson Park ClinicLOCATION: Chicago, IL

DATE:



1 VERIFY the following features are provided:

2 3.5 inch touch screen3 On/Off buttons for each group of

fixtures4 Dimmer for each group of fixtures52.1 Device Location: Graphic Wall Pod


1 RECORD Device(s) installed in the following areas were demonstrated to operate, with any issues noted on the MIL. See 'Comments' section for additional device location.

2 Level 12.2 Device Location: Graphic Wall Pod










1 Level 6

SSRCx

Sample

Point Description Units Weath

er

Sta

tion

Air H

andlin

g U

nits

Chill

ed W

ate

r S

yste

m

Condenser

Wate

r S

yste

m

Hot W

ate

r S

yste

m

Air T

erm

inal U

nit / S

pace

Fan C

oil

Units

Com

pute

r R

oom

Air C

onditio

ner

Exhaust F

an

Unit H

eate

r

Ele

ctr

ical P

anels

Dom

estic W

ate

r H

eating S

yste

m

Irrigation S

yste

m

Lig

hting C

ontr

ol S

yste

m

Outdoor Air Dry Bulb Temp F 15

Outdoor Air Relative Humidity %RH 15

SF VFD Power kWh 15

SF Airflow CFM 15

SF Airflow Setpoint CFM 15

Unit Discharge Air Temp F 15

Unit DAT Setpoint F 15

Space Humidity %RH 15 15 15

Space Humidity Setpoint %RH 15 15 15

Humidifier Valve Position % Open 15

CHW Return Temp F 15

CHW Valve Position % Open 15 15 15

HW Return Temp F 15

AHU HW Valve Position % Open 15

Zone Airflow CFM 15

Zone Damper Position % Open 15 15

Zone HW Discharage Air Temp F 15 15

Zone HW Valve Position % Open 15 15 15 15

Space Temperature F 15 15 15 15 15

Space Temperature Active Setpoint F 15 15 15 15 15

Occupied Status (Sensor or Schedule) On/Off 15 15 15

RF VFD Power kWh 15

RF Airflow CFM 15

Space Differential Static Pressure in. w.c. 15 15

Space Differential Static Pressure Setpoint in. w.c. 15 15

Outdoor Air Damper Position % Open 15

Outdoor Airflow CFM 15

Outdoor Airflow Setpoint CFM

Duct Static Pressure in. w.c.

Duct Static Pressure Setpoint in. w.c.

Supply Air CO2 ppm

Space CO2 ppm 15

Space Differential CO2 Setpoint ppm 15

Bldg Supply Temp F 15

Bldg Supply Temp Setpoint F 15

System Supply Setpoint F 15 15 15

System Supply Temp F 15 15 15 15

System Return Temp F 15 15 15

System Flow gpm 15 15 15

System Capacity MBh 15 15 15

System Diff Pressure psi 15 15 15

System Diff Pressure Setpoint psi 15 15 15

Pump VFD Power kWh 15 15 15

Chiller CHW Supply Temp F 15

Chiller CHW Return Temp F 15

Chiller Evaporator Flow gpm 15

Chiller Entering CW Temp F 15

Chiller Leaving CW Temp F 15

Chiller Power (Typical each compressor) kWh 15

Cooling Tower VFD Power (Typical each fan) kWh 15

Heat Recovery Chiller HW Return Temp F 15

Heat Recovery Chiller HW Supply Temp F 15

Heat Recovery Chiller HW Supply Temp Setpoint F 15

Boiler Status On/Off 15 15

Fan Status On/Off 15 15 15 15

Pump Status On/Off 15

Exhaust Fan VFD Power kWh 15

Illuminance fc 15

Make-up Water Consumption gpm 15

Electric Consumption kWh 15

Natural Gas Consumption cu. ft. 15 15

Equipment ID / Trending Interval (minutes)

SAMPLE BAS DATA POINT TRENDING / ARCHIVING PLAN

BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING 01 9115 - 1




SECTION 01 9115 – BUILDING ENCLOSURE COMMISSIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. The work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents, including

the Owner’s General Conditions and articles of the General Contractor’s General Conditions.

2. This section includes the commissioning requirements for the Building Enclosure systems.

a. The commissioning requirements for the building enclosure systems given in this

section are entirely separate from, and in addition to, the Building Systems

Commissioning specified in specification section 019113.

b. The General Contractor/Construction Manager, Contractors, Sub-contractors and

Suppliers are required to participate in both commissioning processes as required by

sections 019113 Building Systems Commissioning and 019115 Building Enclosure

Commissioning.

c. The 019113 Commissioning Agent and 019115 Building Enclosure Commissioning

Agent will provide separate documentation for each commissioning process.

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Building Enclosure Commissioning is a systematic process of validating and verifying all building

enclosure systems responsible for environmental separation perform interactively according to the

Owner’s Project Requirements. The Building Enclosure Commissioning process is intended to

achieve the following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents:

1. Verify and document installation and performance of building enclosure materials and

systems.

2. Endeavor to provide the Owner with functional Building Enclosure systems that meet the

Project Requirements.

B. Commissioning does not take away from, or reduce responsibility of, system designers or

installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product.

C. This section shall in no way diminish the responsibility of Division 03, 04, 05, 07, 08, and 09

Contractors, Subcontractors, and Suppliers in performing all aspects of work and testing as

outlined in the Contract Documents. Any requirements outlined in this section are in addition to

requirements outlined in Division 03, 04, 05, 07, 08, and 09.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Specific building enclosure commissioning requirements are given in this specification. The

following specification sections are related to the commissioning work specified in this section:

06/25/19





1. Building Systems Commissioning: Refer to 019113

2. Building Enclosure Functional Performance Testing: TBD

3. Basic Concrete Requirements: Refer to Division 03

4. Basic Masonry Requirements: Refer to Division 04

5. Basic Waterproofing, Roofing, Air Barrier, Insulation Requirements: Refer to Division 07

6. Basic Fenestration Systems Requirements: Refer to Division 08

7. Basic Finishing Requirements: Refer to Division 09

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS

A. The following are common abbreviations used in this Section (definitions are found further in this

Section):

1. A/E - Architect and Design Engineers

2. BECx – Building Enclosure Commissioning

3. BECxA – Building Enclosure Commissioning Agent

4. BECT – Building Enclosure Commissioning Team

5. BETA – Building Enclosure Testing Agency

6. FPT – Functional Performance Test

7. GC – General Contractor

8. CT –Commissioning Team

9. CxA – Commissioning Agent for Building Systems - Refer to Section 019113

10. O&M - Operations & Maintenance 1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Approval: Acceptance that a material or system has been properly installed and is functioning in tested

modes according to the Contract Documents.

B. Architect/Engineer (A/E): Prime consultant (architect) and sub-consultants who comprise the design

team, generally the Architect of Record and any Design Sub-consultants.

C. Basis of Design (BOD): Documentation of primary thought processes and assumptions behind design

decisions made to meet design intent. Describes systems, components, conditions, and methods chosen

to meet intent.

D. Building Enclosure Commissioning Agent (BECxA): Contracted to Owner through the CxA. BECxA

directs and coordinates day-to-day Building Enclosure Commissioning activities independently from

CxA.

E. Building Enclosure Commissioning Plan (BECx Plan): Overall plan developed after bidding that

provides structure, schedule, and coordination planning for the Building Enclosure commissioning

process.

F. Building Enclosure Testing Agency (BETA): BETA will be represented by or contracted by the

BECxA and is responsible for executing building enclosure functional performance testing under the

direction of the BECxA.

G. Building Enclosure Functional Performance Test (FPT): Test of performance of building enclosure

materials and systems. Systems are tested under various simulated environmental conditions, such as

06/25/19





air or water leakage under pressure differential.

H. Commissioning Agent (CxA): Commissioning Agent for Building Systems; refer to Section 019113.

Contracted to Owner. CxA directs and coordinates day-to-day Building Systems Commissioning

activities independently from BECx activities. CxA reports directly to Owner.

I. Commissioning Observation: Any condition identified by the BECxA that adversely affects the

commissionability, operability, maintainability or functionality of a system, equipment or component.

Any condition that is in conflict with the project OPR, Contract Documents, performance requirements,

manufacturer requirements, and/or standard industry best practices of the installed systems and

components. (See also – Deficiency, Master Issues Log)

J. Contract Documents (CD): Contract documents include design and construction contracts, price

agreements and procedure agreements. Contract Documents also include all final and complete

drawings, specifications and all applicable contract modifications or supplements.

K. Deficiency: See “Commissioning Observation”.

L. Master Issues Log (MIL): On-going list tracking commissioning observations and BECT responses

and resolution.

M. Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR): A written document that details the project requirements and

the expectations of how the building and its systems will be used and operated. These include project

goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and

supporting information.

N. Specifications: Construction specifications of Contract Documents.

O. Sub-contractor: Contractors of GC, and their Sub-contractors, who provide and install building

enclosure components and systems.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Building Enclosure Commissioning Team: Members of the Building Enclosure Commissioning

Team (BECT) will consist of:

1. Architect and Design Engineers (A/E)

2. Building Enclosure Commissioning Agent (BECxA)

3. Building Enclosure Testing Agent (BETA)

4. Building Enclosure Subcontractors

5. Commissioning Agent (CxA)

6. General Contractor (GC)

7. Owner’s Representative(s)

B. Management: The CxA and BECxA will be the same entity. The BECxA will direct and

coordinate commissioning activities through the CxA. All members of the Commissioning Team

shall cooperate to fulfill contracted responsibilities and objectives of the Contract Documents.

C. Scheduling: BECxA will work with the BECT to establish required commissioning activities to

incorporate in preliminary commissioning schedule. The GC will integrate commissioning

activities into a master construction schedule. Necessary notifications are to be made in a timely

06/25/19





manner in order to expedite the commissioning process.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. A/E or GC shall provide BECxA with documentation required for commissioning work. All building

enclosure related submittals and shop drawings as required by the specifications shall be provided to

the BECxA for review and comment.

B. The BECxA shall review building enclosure related submittals and shop drawings prior to or

concurrent with the A/E for conformance as it relates to BECx such that the BECxA comments can

be incorporated into the returned submittal.

C. The contractor(s) shall review and address all exterior enclosure related submittal and shop drawing

review comments. Revised shop drawing details based on submittal review comments shall be

clearly marked on the shop drawing resubmittal to indicate where and what changes have been made.

Submittal and shop drawing review comments and responses shall be tracked by the BECxA.

D. The BECxA review of submittals and shop drawings does not substitute for or alter the responsibility

of the A/E to review submittals and/or shop drawings for compliance with the project requirements.

Final approval of submittals and shop drawings rests solely with the A/E.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

A. Building Enclosure Systems to be commissioned:

1. Below Grade Systems, Roofing Systems, Opaque Wall/Cladding Systems, Fenestration

Systems responsible for providing the following functions:

a. Air control

b. Vapor control

c. Insulation/thermal protection

d. Waterproofing

3.2 RESPONSIBILITIES OF COMMISSIONING TEAM MEMBERS

A. Architect/Engineer (A/E)

1. Assist in the development and documentation of the Owner’s Project Requirements

document.

2. Provide brief Basis of Design summary to document the design intent of building enclosure

systems to the BECxA.

3. Review and incorporate Building Enclosure Commissioning specification section into the

construction documents.

4. Attend BECx design review meetings and other BECx meetings.

5. Provide construction documents electronically.

06/25/19





6. Review and respond to/incorporate BECxA comments made during design reviews and

submittal/shop drawings reviews.

7. Assist in dispute resolution regarding building enclosure systems.

8. Review BECxA reports and respond to A/E items.

B. Building Enclosure Commissioning Agent (BECxA)

1. Development of the BECx Requirements specification sections.

2. Conduct reviews of the architectural drawings and specifications.

3. Review pertinent building enclosure related submittals and shop drawings.

4. Conduct BECx kick-off meetings.

5. Perform construction observation visits to observe and document installation of the building

enclosure materials, systems, and components, and observe representative field testing.

6. Perform or contract BETA for performance of functional performance field testing.

7. Prepare the final BECx record.

8. Perform one site visit at approximately 10 months post-occupancy.

C. General Contractor (GC)

1. Attend BECx coordination/kick-off meetings and other commissioning team meetings. The

GC is responsible for all coordination items with Subcontractors.

2. Incorporate and periodically update commissioning activities into the construction schedule.

3. Facilitate cooperation of Subcontractors in commissioning work.

4. Review and respond to BECxA’s submittal review comments.

5. Submit copies of initial submittals to A/E and BECxA for review. Provide final A/E

approved submittals to BECxA for record.

6. Verify building enclosure materials and assemblies are ready for functional performance

testing. Coordinate scheduling of Building Enclosure FPT with the BECxA and BETA at

least two weeks prior to testing.

7. Ensure resolution of non-compliance and deficiencies in construction or test results. Provide

written responses and documentation of completion from the appropriate subcontractors and

record responses in the MIL.

e. Documentation includes photographs of addressed items prior to concealment by

other components.

8. Provide letters of compatibility for adjacent building enclosure materials and assemblies.

9. Facilitate all repairs and retesting of failed functional performance testing and pay for all

associated costs of retesting and additional testing including costs related to testing

observation and documentation by the BECxA.

10. Following failed field testing, provide a plan of repairs to be performed to the BECT for

review. A/E shall approve plan of repairs prior to implementation and retesting. All repairs

performed to facilitate successful testing must be approved by the A/E and performed

comprehensively throughout project.

11. Provide all warranty documentation for all commissioned building enclosure systems,

materials, and components to the BECxA.

D. Subcontractors/Vendors

1. Review Commissioning Plan and building enclosure related specification sections.

2. Provide project-specific submittals/shop drawings as required by the project specifications

06/25/19





that clearly indicate how each system is interfaced with adjacent systems. All typical and

project-specific interfaces with adjacent systems must be detailed accurately.

3. Attend BECx coordination/kick-off meetings and other commissioning team meetings.

4. Address all applicable observations in the MIL.

5. Provide written responses and documentation of completion of addressed items as directed

by GC.

a. Documentation includes photographs of addressed items prior to concealment by

other components.

6. Attend all required building enclosure functional performance testing.

7. Ensure installed work is complete, is in compliance with Contract Documents, and is ready

for Functional Performance Testing. Notify GC that systems are ready for Functional

Performance Testing.

8. Provide all warranty documentation for all commissioned building enclosure systems,

materials, and components to the GC.

E. Building Enclosure Testing Agency (BETA)

1. Attend BECx coordination/kick-off meetings.

2. Provide technicians and equipment to complete field Building Enclosure Functional

Performance Testing.

3. Prepare and submit reports at the conclusion of each test.

4. Perform retesting and/or additional testing due to failed tests and prepare corresponding

reports.

3.3 REPORTING

A. The BECxA will provide periodic status reports to Owner, A/E, GC, and CxA.

B. The BECxA shall submit non-compliance and deficiency reports Owner, A/E, GC, and CxA.

C. The BECxA shall provide a final BECx Record to Owner.

3.4 FINAL CONSTRUCTION

A. The GC and Subcontractors shall verify completion of assemblies compliant with project documents

and deficiency log items prior to functional performance testing or concealment of functional

performance layers within the building enclosure.

3.6 BUILDING ENCLOSURE FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Building enclosure functional performance testing will be defined by the Owner after 100%

Construction Document issuance and implemented by the BECT.

3.7 DOCUMENTATION, NON-CONFORMANCE, AND RESOLUTION

A. Documentation

1. The BECxA shall submit observation reports Owner, A/E, GC, and CxA and log

commissioning observations in the Master Issues Log (MIL).

06/25/19





B. Non-Conformance

1. Deficiency or non-conformance issues will be noted and reported to the GC, A/E, and Owner.

2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified during site observations and testing may be

documented by the BECxA.

3. Deficiencies are handled in the following manner:

a. When there is no dispute on deficiency and Subcontractor accepts responsibility for

remedial action:

1) BECxA documents deficiency and Subcontractor response and intentions.

BECxA submits report and MIL to Owner, A/E, GC, and CxA. Copy is

provided to Subcontractor by GC.

2) Subcontractor corrects deficiency and provides written response and/or

documentation on the MIL that the deficiency has been addressed.

b. When there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who

is responsible:

1) BECxA documents deficiency and Contractor’s response. BECxA submits

observation report and MIL to Owner, A/E, GC, and CxA. Copy is provided

to Subcontractor by GC.

2) GC facilitates resolution of deficiency. Other parties are brought into

discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with A/E. Final

acceptance authority is with the Owner.

3) GC documents resolution process.

4) Once interpretation and resolution has been decided, appropriate party

corrects deficiency and provides written response and/or documentation on

the MOL that the deficiency has been addressed.

3.8 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

A. Final Report Details

1. The final BECx report will include an executive summary, overview of BECx activities, and

general description of testing and verification results. Report will contain a log of design

review comments and responses, a log of submittal review comments and responses, and the

master issues log.

2. All outstanding non-compliance items will be specifically listed.

3. Recommendations for improvement to system or operations, future actions, etc. will also be

listed. END OF SECTION

06/25/19

SSRCx

Sample HVAC Air Handling Unit PreFunctional Checklist PROJECT: CCHHS Hanson Park Clinic LOCATION: Chicago, ILPROJECT #:

SYSTEM/UNIT: HVAC Equipment / AHU-1x Tested By: Date:

Model Verification - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Specified Manufacturer

2 Installed Manufacturer

3 Specified Model #

4 Installed Model #

5 Serial #

6 Specified Airflow

7 Specified Static Pressure

General - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Inspection and Access doors are operable

2 Casing Undamaged

3 Equipment has been cleaned and finish touched up if necessary.

4 Manufacturer's required maintenance clearance provided for service.

23 05 00 1.8 E

5 Specified unit mounting requirements

Schedule Note 10

6 Verify unit is mounted per plans and specs

Schedule Note 10

7 Specified access doors Schedule Note 4

8 Verify access doors are provided per plans and specs

Schedule Note 4

9 Access doors are installed so no air leaks through door

10 Access doors open against air pressure

11 Specified lights are provided per plans and specs

Schedule Note 5

12 Verify lights are installed in locations per plans and specs

Schedule Note 5

13 4" housekeeping pad is provided under all floor mounted equipment

23 05 48 3.4 G

14 Flexible pipe connectors are installed on all equipment supported by vibration isolation

23 05 48 3.4 L

Accessories - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time


Schedule Note 12



Schedule Note 11


5 UV lights are factory installed downstream of cooling coils

Schedule Note 16

Sample

SSRCx

Sample HVAC Air Handling Unit PreFunctional Checklist

SYSTEM/UNIT: HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Tested By: Date:

Ductwork - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Ductwork is connected to unit with flexible connections

Schedule Note 19

2 Duct installation is complete

3 Access doors installed and labeled at fire / smoke dampers, fire dampers, and smoke detectors

23 31 13 3.1 E

Controls - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Return duct smoke detector is installed in return duct

Schedule Note 13

2 Supply duct smoke detector is installed after supply fan

Schedule Note 13

3 Specified return air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

4 Verify return air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

5 Specified mixed air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

6 Verify mixed air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

7 Specified discharge air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

8 Verify discharge air sensors are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

9 Specified automatic dampers are installed per the controls schematic

M06-02 Detail C3

10 Verify automatic dampers are installed per the controls schematic

Labeling - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Permanently fasten labels are on each major item of mechanical equipment. Labels are located in accessible and visible areas.

23 05 53 2.3 A

2 Duct is labeled with contents and flow direction

23 05 53 2.3 C

Insulation - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Specified Air Duct Insulation requirements:

23 07 13 4.1 - EXPOSED: 2" Rigid Fiberglass Board; CONCEALED: 2" Flexible Fiberglass with Vapor Barrier

2 Verify Air Duct Insulation requirements:

23 07 13 4.1

Startup Mechanical - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 Contractor's executed startup procedures haves been submitted for review


Sample

SSRCx

Sample HVAC AHU Functional Performance Test PROJECT: CCHHS Hanson Park Clinic LOCATION: Chicago, ILPROJECT #:

SYSTEM/UNIT: AHU-1x Tested By: Date:

1.01 Pre-test Set points & Conditions - HVAC Equi pment/ AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 RECOR D: OA Flow 2 RECOR D: OA Damper Command 3 RECOR D: RA Temperature °F4 RECORD: RA Humidity %RH5 RECOR D: CHW Valve

Status/Command 6 RECORD: CHW Coil LAT 7 RECORD: VFD - 1

Status/Command 8 RECORD: VFD - 1 Speed %9 RECORD: VFD - 2

Status/Command 10 RECORD: VFD - 2 Speed %11 RECORD: SA Temperature

Setpoint/Actual °F

12 RECORD: SA Flow Setpoint/Actual 13 RECORD: Interlocked Exhaust

Fan(s) Status/Command 14 RECORD: Coil DP Setpoint/Actual 15 RECORD: 2/3 Duct Static Pressure 1.02 Post-test Set points - HVAC Equipment/ AHU-1x


1 RESET: Upon completion of test reset set points to pre-test set point values Sam

ple

SSRCx



2.01 Unit - On - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Unit is commanded on via building BMS

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Fire/Smoke Dampers are fully opened

3 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Supply fan is energized and runs continuously during unit operation

4 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Interlocked Exhaust Fan(s) is energized and runs continuously during unit operation

5 EXPECTED RESPONSE: VFD(s) modulates to maintain constant flow as filters get loaded

6 EXPECTED RESPONSE: OA damper opens to minimum airflow position

7 EXPECTED RESPONSE: RA damper opens fully

8 EXPECTED RESPONSE: OA damper modulates to maintain OA flow setpoint

9 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Cooling coil valve modulates to maintain LAT setpoint (50°F, adj.)

10 VERIFY: Supply fan minimum runtime is programmed

2.02 Cooling Coil Control - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate OA temp > 45°F

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Cooling Coil is enabled

3 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Cooling coil control valve modulates to maintain LAT setpoint of 50°F (adj.)

Sample

PROJECT: CCHHS Hanson Park Clinic LOCATION: Chicago, IL

PROJECT #:

SSRCx



2.03 Supply Air Reset - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate return air temperature > return air high limit

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Supply air temperature setpoint is reset downward

3 RECORD: RA Temperature High Limit Setpoint

°F


°F

5 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate return air temperature < return air low limit

6 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Supply air temperature setpoint is reset upward

7 RECORD: RA Temperature Low Limit Setpoint

°F


°F

2.04 Unit - Off - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Unit is commanded to shut down via building BMS

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: OA damper closes

3 EXPECTED RESPONSE: CHW Coil opens

4 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Supply fan deenergizes

5 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Interlocked exhaust fan(s) deenergizes

3.01 High Space Temperature Alarm - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate space temperature greater than the cooling setpoint by a "user defined amount"


3.02 Low Space Temperature Alarm - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate space temperature lower than the cooling setpoint by a "user defined amount"


Sample


SSRCx



3.03 High Return Air Humidity - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate RA humidity > 70% (adj.)


3.04 Low Return Air Humidity - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate RA humidity < 35% (adj.)


3.05 Supply Fan Failure - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate supply fan status does not match command

2 VERIFY: Remaining supply fan(s) ramp up to maintain supply airflow setpoint


4 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate supply fan runtime exceeded


6 RECORD: Runtime Alarm Setpoint 3.06 Pre Filter DP Alarm - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1x


1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate DP across pre filter > pre filter DP setpoint


3.07 Final Filter DP Alarm - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate DP across final filter > final filter DP setpoint


3.08 Smoke/Fire Detection Alarm - HVAC Equipment/AHU-1xVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 TEST PROCEDURE: Simulate smoke detected/emergency shutdown signal

2 EXPECTED RESPONSE: Unit shuts down according to shutdown sequence


Sample


Sample Electrical Systems Functional Performance TestPROJECT:LOCATION:

CCHHS Hanson Park ClinicChicago, IL


1.0 Test Procedure: Occupancy SensorVerification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 VERIFY A minimum of 20% of occupancy sensors are to be functionally tested. Document room tested and results of device tested.

2 VERIFY by visual response that:3 PROCEDURE Device senses

space is occupied and turns lights ON.

4 PROCEDURE Device senses space is un-occupied.

5 PROCEDURE Device turns lights off after preset time delay. (10-30 minutes)

6 PROCEDURE Local switch operates properly, if applicable.

7 PROCEDURE Device location during time of functional testing is indicated below:

1.1 Device Location: Occupancy Sensor Verification Response Notes By Date/Time

1 RECORD Devices installed in the following areas were demonstrated to operate, with any issues noted on the MIL. See 'Comments' section for device location.











1 Level 6

SSRCx

Sample

Sample Electrical Systems Functional Performance TestPROJECT: CCHHS Hanson Park ClinicLOCATION: Chicago, IL

DATE:



1 VERIFY the following features are provided:

2 3.5 inch touch screen3 On/Off buttons for each group of

fixtures4 Dimmer for each group of fixtures52.1 Device Location: Graphic Wall Pod


1 RECORD Device(s) installed in the following areas were demonstrated to operate, with any issues noted on the MIL. See 'Comments' section for additional device location.











1 Level 6

SSRCx

Sample

Point Description Units Weath

er

Sta

tion

Air H

andlin

g U

nits

Chill

ed W

ate

r S

yste

m

Condenser

Wate

r S

yste

m

Hot W

ate

r S

yste

m

Air T

erm

inal U

nit / S

pace

Fan C

oil

Units

Com

pute

r R

oom

Air C

onditio

ner

Exhaust F

an

Unit H

eate

r

Ele

ctr

ical P

anels

Dom

estic W

ate

r H

eating S

yste

m

Irrigation S

yste

m

Lig

hting C

ontr

ol S

yste

m

Outdoor Air Dry Bulb Temp F 15

Outdoor Air Relative Humidity %RH 15

SF VFD Power kWh 15

SF Airflow CFM 15

SF Airflow Setpoint CFM 15

Unit Discharge Air Temp F 15

Unit DAT Setpoint F 15

Space Humidity %RH 15 15 15

Space Humidity Setpoint %RH 15 15 15

Humidifier Valve Position % Open 15

CHW Return Temp F 15

CHW Valve Position % Open 15 15 15

HW Return Temp F 15

AHU HW Valve Position % Open 15

Zone Airflow CFM 15

Zone Damper Position % Open 15 15

Zone HW Discharage Air Temp F 15 15

Zone HW Valve Position % Open 15 15 15 15

Space Temperature F 15 15 15 15 15

Space Temperature Active Setpoint F 15 15 15 15 15

Occupied Status (Sensor or Schedule) On/Off 15 15 15

RF VFD Power kWh 15

RF Airflow CFM 15

Space Differential Static Pressure in. w.c. 15 15

Space Differential Static Pressure Setpoint in. w.c. 15 15

Outdoor Air Damper Position % Open 15

Outdoor Airflow CFM 15

Outdoor Airflow Setpoint CFM

Duct Static Pressure in. w.c.

Duct Static Pressure Setpoint in. w.c.

Supply Air CO2 ppm

Space CO2 ppm 15

Space Differential CO2 Setpoint ppm 15

Bldg Supply Temp F 15

Bldg Supply Temp Setpoint F 15

System Supply Setpoint F 15 15 15

System Supply Temp F 15 15 15 15

System Return Temp F 15 15 15

System Flow gpm 15 15 15

System Capacity MBh 15 15 15

System Diff Pressure psi 15 15 15

System Diff Pressure Setpoint psi 15 15 15

Pump VFD Power kWh 15 15 15

Chiller CHW Supply Temp F 15

Chiller CHW Return Temp F 15

Chiller Evaporator Flow gpm 15

Chiller Entering CW Temp F 15

Chiller Leaving CW Temp F 15

Chiller Power (Typical each compressor) kWh 15

Cooling Tower VFD Power (Typical each fan) kWh 15

Heat Recovery Chiller HW Return Temp F 15

Heat Recovery Chiller HW Supply Temp F 15

Heat Recovery Chiller HW Supply Temp Setpoint F 15

Boiler Status On/Off 15 15

Fan Status On/Off 15 15 15 15

Pump Status On/Off 15

Exhaust Fan VFD Power kWh 15

Illuminance fc 15

Make-up Water Consumption gpm 15

Electric Consumption kWh 15

Natural Gas Consumption cu. ft. 15 15

Equipment ID / Trending Interval (minutes)

SAMPLE BAS DATA POINT TRENDING / ARCHIVING PLAN



GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00 3132 - 1

DOCUMENT 00 3132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA

1.1 GEOTECHNICAL DATA

A. A geotechnical investigation report for the Project, prepared by GSG Consultants, dated

December 29, 2017, is available for viewing as appended to this Document.


1. Document 002113 "Instructions to Bidders" for the Bidder's responsibilities for

examination of Project site and existing conditions.

END OF DOCUMENT 00 3132



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1

SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

2. Section 32 1313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

3. Section 32 1316 "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and

walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly ash and other

pozzolans; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality

control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,

curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,

semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, vapor-retarder installation,

anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation,

methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness floor and slab flatness

and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.




B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,

and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

E. Samples: For waterstops vapor retarder.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Form materials and form-release agents.

4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

5. Fiber reinforcement.

6. Waterstops.

7. Curing compounds.

8. Bonding agents.

9. Vapor retarders.

10. Semirigid joint filler.

11. Joint-filler strips.

12. Repair materials.

C. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-

certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete

Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and

equipment.




1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete

Production Facilities."

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction

testing on concrete mixtures.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and

damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other

contaminants.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature

range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on

frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water

or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is

calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is

Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents:




1. ACI 301.

2. ACI 117.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,

paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding

specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic

concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete

loads without detrimental deformation.

E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient

to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain,

or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete

surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form

ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of

concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed

concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete

surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing

or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.




B. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, ASTM A

775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating

in each 12-inch bar length.

C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-

drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

D. Epoxy-Coated Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, Type 1,

plain steel.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends

square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars,

ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated.

C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on

reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

D. Deformed Bar Anchors: Fabricated from ASTM A-496 Steel Wire, Deformed

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening

reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater

compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire

bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from

single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, gray.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source.




1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal (typical), or 3/4 inch nominal (at beams,

suspended slabs, and slabs on metal deck .

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330/C 330M, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that

do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do

not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

G. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Carbon-Steel Fiber: ASTM A 820/A 820M, Type 1, cold-drawn wire, deformed, minimum of 2.4

inches long, and aspect ratio (L/D) of 80.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the

following:

a. Bekaert.

B. Synthetic Macro-Fiber: Polyolefin macro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete,

complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, having an equivalent diameter of 0.43 mm and an

aspect ratio of 90.



following:

a. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co

2.7 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible PVC Waterstops (for joints with movement): CE CRD-C 572, with factory-installed

metal eyelets, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory

fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=11007

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456999168








following:

a. Sika Greenstreak

2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.

3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick; nontapered.

B. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops (for non-moving joints): Manufactured rectangular or

trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive

bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch.



following:

a. Sika Corporation

2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, except with maximum water-vapor permeance of

.01. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.



following:

a. Stego Industries, LLC

b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.



following:

a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems

b. Dayton Superior

c. The Euclid Chemical Company, an RPM Company

d. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc

e. Sika Corporation

f. W.R. Meadows, Inc








B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor

covering.



following:

a. BASF Corporation; Construction Systems

b. Dayton Superior

c. The Euclid Chemical Company, an RPM Company

d. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc

e. W.R. Meadows, Inc

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or

ASTM D 1752, flexible closed cell foam.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A

shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor

elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended

by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.





B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied

in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent

floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic

cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended

by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials:For concrete exposed to freezing and thawing cycles with frequent

exposure to water and exposure to deicing chemicals, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious

materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.

2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.

C. For reinforced concrete exposed to chloride from deicing chemicals, limit water-soluble, chloride-

ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as

required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs

and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c

ratio below 0.50.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Spread Footings, Strip Footings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.

2. Slump Limit: 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding

high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.




B. Foundation Walls, Piers: Normal-weight concrete.


2. Slump Limit: 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding

high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.

C. Exterior Slabs-on-Grade, Exterior Stairs-on-Grade, Exterior Pads and Curbs: Normal-weight

concrete.


2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.40.

3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd..

4. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for1-inch] nominal

maximum aggregate size.

D. Interior Slabs-on-Grade, Interior Stairs-on-Grade, Interior Pads and Curbs: Normal-weight

concrete.


2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 520 lb/cu. yd..


4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

E. Slabs on Metal Deck: Lightweight concrete.


2. Calculated Equilibrium Unit Weight: 110 lb/cu. ft. , plus or minus 3 lb/cu. ft. as determined

by ASTM C 567/C 567M.


4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

5. Steel-Fiber Reinforcement (in lieu of synthetic macro fibers, at contractor’s option): Add

to concrete mixture, according to manufacturer's written instructions, at a rate of 25 lb/cu.

yd..

6. Synthetic Macro-Fiber (in lieu of steel fibers, at contractor’s option): Uniformly disperse

in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 4.0

lb/cu. yd..

2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.15 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.




1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from

1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and

delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can

support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation,

and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces (surfaces permanently exposed to

public view).

2. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces (surfaces permanently concealed).

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide

crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms

for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations

and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use

strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork

is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent

loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.




L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face

of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and

other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does

not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F

for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-

removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support

weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved its 28-day design compressive

strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without

loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new

form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align

and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless


3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide

adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.




3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643

and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce

bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support

reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing

reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps

of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

F. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating

according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated

steel reinforcement.

3.7 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations

indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through

sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints

in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.




5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,

near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-

fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting

action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops

random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and

other locations, as indicated.

1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below

finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants," are indicated.

2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is

required, lace or clip sections together.

E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or

asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints where movement is expected and at other joints

indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and

protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints where movement is not expected

and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive

bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths

practicable.

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items

is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.




C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If

a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit

concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6

inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have

begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to

consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items

without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab

surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits

on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and

defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface

irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be

covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick

paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine

sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in

amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub




grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean

burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed

surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed

surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated

or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one

direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings or to receive mortar

setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or

inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat

float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish or to be covered with fluid-applied

or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand

or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel

marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would

telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring,

carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-

finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly

trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-

grade.

b. Specified overall value of flatness, F(F) 30; with minimum local value of flatness,

F(F) 24; for slabs on metal deck. Note that levelness criteria F(L) is not applicable

to slabs on metal deck.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry

tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly

scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.




F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere

as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish

with Architect before application.

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in

place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-

place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete

the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green

and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and

terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

2. Construct concrete bases 4 inches high unless otherwise indicated, and extend base not less

than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment

unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support.

3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi at 28 days for exterior installations and 4000

psi at 28 days for interior installations.

4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor

into structural concrete substrate. Use epoxy-coated anchor bolts at exterior applications.

6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings,

templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper

attachment to supported equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.

Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete

surfaces.

3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather

protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing




operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and

bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs,

and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms.

If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces,

including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least

12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days.

Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and

waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with

bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair

damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound

manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with

bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3.14 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler where indicated, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.




1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until

construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces

of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints.

Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and

replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2

parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains

and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of

cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes

and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent

has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with

bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard

portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test

area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with

patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural

performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces

sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate

to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and

other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired

areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.

Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's




written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges

to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,

by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square

cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen

concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching

concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse

aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in

same manner as adjacent concrete.

6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose

particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching

mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match

adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field

tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Headed bolts and studs.

4. Verification of use of required design mixture.

5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction

thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for

each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional

tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;

ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test




for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete

mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is

40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete;

one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each

concrete mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more

than 500 psi.

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor

within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project

identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and

inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28

days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type

of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of

concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency

may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with

ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply

with the Contract Documents.

D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of

finishing.


HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 03 5416 - 1




SECTION 03 5416 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement underlayment for

application below interior floor coverings.






A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: A single firm that specializes in the installation of hydraulic cement underlayment; that has successfully completed installations similar in material, design, and

extent to that required for Project, on not less than three projects of similar scope, to the

satisfaction of Architect; and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of

successful in-service performance for a period of 5 years.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate

temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting

underlayment performance.

1. Place hydraulic cement underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature

of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Hydraulic Cement Underlayment: Polymer-modified, self-leveling, hydraulic cement product

that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch and that can be feathered at edges

to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended

hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

3. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,

formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.

B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by

underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for

underlayment thickness required.

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.

D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,

conditions, and application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to

prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions,

laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and

other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.





1. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to

hydraulic cement underlayment manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less

stringent than the following:

a. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative

humidity level.

C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after

application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion to substrate and

between coats.

3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to

continue through underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.

2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination

during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in

writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including

areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION



STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200 - 1

SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel.

2. Field-installed shear connectors.

3. Grout.


1. Section 05 3100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck.

2. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to

structural-steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as

structural steel.

3. Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting", Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting", and Section 09

9600 "High-Performance Coatings" for surface-preparation and priming requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in

AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction

without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and

directions for installation.








B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment Drawings.

3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed

and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify

pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design

loads, include analysis data signed and sealed by the Structural Engineer licensed in the State of

Illinois responsible for their preparation.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Nonshrink grout.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category BU (previously noted

as acronym “STD”).

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.

2. AISC 360.

3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off

ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members

and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.




1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or

overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or

structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes

repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected

or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

licensed Structural Engineer in the State of Illinois, to withstand loads indicated and comply with

other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.

2. Use Load and Resistance Factor Design; data are given at factored-load level.

B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.

C. Construction: Combined system of moment frame and braced frame.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes and WT-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50(as noted).

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M,Grade C, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

1. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.




2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts;

ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened

carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 where indicated on drawings, Type 1,

heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and

ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish.

C. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel

structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436,

Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating.

D. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852 or ASTM F 2280

as applicable, Type 1, round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends,

heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Plain.

E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished

carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

4. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C (where noted).

G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

3. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C (where noted).

2.4 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting,"

and Section 09 9600 "High-Performance Coatings."

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20 ASTM A 780/A 780M.




2.5 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged,

nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency

suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according

to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.

2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.

3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected.

4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to

metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1,

"Solvent Cleaning."

F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors.

Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and

manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to

pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel

surfaces.

3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.




B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding

procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel

according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep

holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels shelf angles and all structural steel exposed to weather in the completed

building.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and

locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods,

bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and

elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel

secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity

to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and

bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303

and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of

bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of

plates.




1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do

not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before

packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.

Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with

manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for

Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before

permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in

permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for

discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut

sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be

enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors.

Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and


3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural

Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened (unless noted otherwise on drawings).

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding

procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary

connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings

and Bridges," for mill material.





A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following

special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.

2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.

3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to

requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree

flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear

connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 09 9113 "Exterior

Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 09 9600 "High-

Performance Coatings."




STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 1

SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.

2. Composite floor deck.


1. Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for lightweight structural concrete fill over steel

deck.

2. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors.

3. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel

shapes.

4. Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting

of deck.

5. Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting

of deck.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut

deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.







A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M,

"Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and

handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof

covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to

AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of

another qualified testing agency.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. ASC Profiles, Inc.

2. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc.

3. Epic Metals Corporation.

4. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.

5. Nucor Corp.

6. Verco Decking, Inc., a Nucor company.

B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI

Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the

following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33

(minimum), G60 zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: As indicated on drawings.

3. Profile Depth: As indicated on drawings.











4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on drawings.

5. Span Condition: As indicated on drawings.

6. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option.

2.3 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ASC Profiles, Inc.

2. Canam Steel Corporation; Canam Group, Inc.

3. Epic Metals Corporation.

4. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.

5. Nucor Corp.

6. Verco Decking, Inc., a Nucor company.

B. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and

interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel

Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with

the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc

coating.

2. Profile Depth: As indicated on drawings.

3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on drawings.

4. Span Condition: As indicated on drawings.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with

requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven

carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel

screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi,

not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of

profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material

and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for

overhang and slab depth.











G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,

finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

H. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck.

For drains, cut holes in the field.

I. Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as

deck, with 3-inch- wide flanges and level recessed pans of 1-1/2-inch minimum depth. For drains,

cut holes in the field.

J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI

Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned

and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract

side-lap interlocks.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through

or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,

continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,

appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.




3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface

diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches

long, and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal, unless noted otherwise.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per

deck unit at each support. Space welds 12 inches apart, maximum [as indicated].

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between

supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 36 inches, and using one

of the following methods::

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.

3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 2 inches,

with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum or butted at Contractor's option.

D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges

to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld at each corner.

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld.

E. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures,

and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate

to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.

F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated.

Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.

3.4 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface

diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal, unless noted otherwise.

2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average

of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between

supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 36 inches, and using one

of the following methods:




1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.

3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of2 inches

with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Butted.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure

according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,

according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides

of deck.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck

with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded

areas of both deck surfaces are included in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and

Section 099123 "Interior Painting."


METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1




SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments.

2. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.

3. Steel framing and supports for overhead equipment.

4. Aluminum supports for countertops.

5. Steel framing for medical equipment.

6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.7. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.

8. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats

are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work.

Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,

concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in

concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Paint products.

2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments.

2. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions.

3. Steel framing and supports for overhead equipment.

4. Steel framing and supports for wall mounted equipment.

5. Steel framing and supports for countertops.





6. Steel framing and supports for ceiling framing system.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For steel supports for operable partitions and for ceiling framing

system, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified structural engineer

responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For structural engineer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a licensed structural engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality

Requirements," to design steel supports for operable partitions.

B. Structural Performance:

1. Operable Partition Framing: Provide framing capable of withstanding live and dead loads

of operable partition specified in Section 10 2239, without exceeding the allowable

design working stress of the materials involved, including anchors and connections, or of

exhibiting excessive deflection in any of the components supporting operable partitions.

2. Countertop Framing: Provide countertop framing capable of withstanding the following

structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials

involved, including anchors and connections, or of exhibiting excessive deflections in

any of the components making up the countertops:

a. All dead loads.

b. 500 pound live load placed on the countertop.





c. Deflection at Midspan: L/1000 times span or 1/8-inch, whichever is less.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches or as indicated.

2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0677-

inch minimum thickness; hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,

ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,

ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.

D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,

where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being

fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the

load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in

concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified

independent testing agency.

F. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.





1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts,

ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

G. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying

with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than

3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts,

complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as

needed for fastening to inserts.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9123 Interior Painting."

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by

manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed

surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.





F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or

welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head

(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,

and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring

devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to

complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent

construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.

C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended

by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by

partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger

rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D. Fabricate supports for medical equipment from steel tubing of sizes recommended by

equipment manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by

equipment manufacturer.

E. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.7 SUPPORTS FOR COUNTERTOPS

A. Aluminum Brackets: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Rakks, EH Series

extruded aluminum brackets in sizes indicated, or comparable products by one of the following:

1. Doug Mockett & Co.

2. Richelieu Hardware.





2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown

with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed

field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with

other work.

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry

construction.

2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into

surrounding surface.

2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of

grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic phosphate process.

C. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on

fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool

Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification

No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M12.





PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with

edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and

levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


resistance of base metals.2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.


4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent

surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for

use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and

other connectors.

E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout,

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,

including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for ceiling hung toilet partitions and overhead equipment securely to, and

rigidly brace from, building structure.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field

painting according to Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."





B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair


END OF SECTION




METAL PAN STAIRS 055113 - 1

SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled and precast concrete treads.

2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.

3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.


1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms.

2. Section 05 52 13 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings.

1.3 COORDINATION


and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are

compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items

with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they do not encroach on

required stair width and are within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.


A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs and the following:

1. Prefilled metal-pan-stair treads.

2. Precast concrete treads.

3. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate finishes.

4. Abrasive nosings.





5. Paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of nosing and tread.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and sealed by

the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.



B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Alfab, Inc.

2. American Stair, Inc.

3. Pacific Stair Corporation.

4. Worthington Metal Fabricators.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00

"Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m).

2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm).





3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to

loads specified above.

5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm),

whichever is less.

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the


1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.

(0.093 sq. m).

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.3 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks,

roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer

recycled content not less than 25 percent.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless


F. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or

structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.

G. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or

structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads.

H. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating, either commercial steel,

Type B, or structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230), unless another grade is required by design

loads.

I. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, refer to drawings for criteria.






J. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

K. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

L. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).

M. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400

(leaded semired brass).

N. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze).

2.4 ABRASIVE NOSINGS

A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, aluminum, bronze, or nickel silver, with an integral abrasive, as-cast

finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in

lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc.

b. Balco, Inc.

c. Barry Pattern & Foundry Co., Inc.

d. Granite State Casting Co., Inc.

e. Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc.

f. Wooster Products, Inc.

2. Configuration: Cross-hatched units, 3 inches (75 mm) wide without lip.

B. Extruded Units: Aluminum or Bronze units with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide,

silicon carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths

necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc.

b. Amstep Products.

c. Armstrong Products.

d. Balco, Inc.

e. Granite State Casting Co., Inc.

f. Nystrom, Inc.

g. Upnovr, Inc.

h. Wooster Products, Inc.

2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above

aluminum extrusion.

3. Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs.

4. Nosings: Two-piece units, 3 inches (75 mm) wide, with subchannel for casting into

concrete.

C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard

with manufacturer.





D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete.

E. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or

ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls.

Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts,

ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and,

where indicated, flat washers.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of

sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit

masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing

according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and


B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated metal and

compatible with finish paint systems indicated.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and

compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day

compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa) unless otherwise indicated.





G. Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from fused,

aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing,

moisture, or cleaning materials.

H. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm), W1.4 by

W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,

brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and

platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only

as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and

coordinated installation.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of

approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on

exposed surfaces.

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise

impairing work.

E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

F. Weld connections to comply with the following:





4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint

Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed.

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where

possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or

bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.8 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed

Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class, unless more

stringent requirements are indicated.





B. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels, as indicated in the drawings.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members

as needed to comply with performance requirements.

3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers.

If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.

4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board or shaft-wall assemblies, provide hanger rods

or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods

and struts where they do not encroach on required stair width and are within the fire-

resistance-rated stair enclosure.

5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed

for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.

C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel

sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 0.067 inch

(1.7 mm).

1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.

2. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they are

concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.

3. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld

brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting.

4. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.

5. Attach abrasive nosings to risers.

6. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal pan subtreads filled with

reinforced concrete during fabrication.

7. Provide epoxy-resin-filled treads, reinforced with glass fibers, with slip-resistant, abrasive

surface.

8. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as subtreads.

Weld subplatforms to platform framing.

a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces to

produce smooth soffits.

D. Abrasive-Coating-Finished, Formed-Metal Stairs: Form risers, treads, and platforms to

configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance

requirements, but not less than 0.097 inch (2.5 mm).

1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.

2. Directly weld risers and treads to stringers; locate welds on underside of stairs.

3. Provide platforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as treads. Weld

platforms to platform framing.

4. Finish tread and platform surfaces with manufacturer's standard epoxy-bonded abrasive

finish.





2.9 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Comply with applicable requirements.

1. Fabricate newels of square steel tubing and provide newel caps of pressed steel, as shown.

2. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated

fittings.

3. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,

dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, and

anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.

1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter, 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square top and

bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square posts.

2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) round or square pickets as indicated on Drawings, and

spaced less than 4 inches (100 mm) clear.

3. Expanded-Metal Infill: Expanded-metal panels edged with U-shaped channels made from

steel sheet and not less than 0.043 inch (1.1 mm) thick. Orient expanded metal with long

dimension of diamonds as indicated on Drawings.

4. Perforated-Metal Infill: Perforated-metal panels edged with U-shaped channels made from

metal sheet, of same metal as perforated metal, and not less than 0.043 inch (1.1 mm) thick.

Orient perforated metal with pattern as indicated on Drawings.

5. Mesh Infill: Woven wire mesh crimped into 1-by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm)

steel channel frames. Orient wire mesh with as indicated on Drawings.

6. Intermediate Rails Infill: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at

connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at

connections, including at fittings.

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1

welds: no evidence of a welded joint as shown in NAAMM AMP 521.

D. Form changes in direction of railings as follows:

1. As detailed.

2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.

3. By flush bends or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.

4. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius

indicated.

5. By inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of type and radius indicated.

E. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each

repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend

without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.





G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of

returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.

H. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other

work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.

1. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other

ferrous-metal components.

2. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,

fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and

concrete construction.

3. Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt,

or with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage, and that provides 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)

clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface.

J. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where

needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to

suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and

overstressing of substrate.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel

and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.


adhesion.

2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain

as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-

SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized

finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting

of Steel," for shop painting.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS

A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for

securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry

inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal

stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines

and levels and free of rack.

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete

unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,

masonry, or similar construction.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not

to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not

weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication

and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread

width.

H. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS

A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space

posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each

direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:

1. Anchor posts to steel by welding or bolting to steel supporting members.

2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends

and anchored with post-installed anchors and bolts.

B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at

spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as

required to comply with performance requirements or as follows:





1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or

lag bolts.

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.

3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between

studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.

4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood

backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.

5. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to

concealed steel reinforcements.

6. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or

through concealed steel reinforcements.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to

comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123

"Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair






COLUMN COVERS 055813 - 1

SECTION 055813 - COLUMN COVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes snap-together metal column covers.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for column covers.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or

design, including mechanical finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- (150-

mm-) square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers certifying that products furnished

comply with requirements.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing column covers similar to that

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as

sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

B. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying

organic coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and that employs competent

control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance

with requirements.






A. Deliver column covers wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs

or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished

surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SNAP-TOGETHER COLUMN COVERS

A. Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and minimum thickness indicated

below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that engages continuous mounting clips.

1. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), with not less than strength and

durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32, 0.063 inch (1.60 mm)thick.

a. Finish: High-performance organic coating

2. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed,

0.060 inch (1.52 mm) thick.

a. Finish: Powder coat.


A. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise

indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined.

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting column covers and for attaching them to

other work unless[ otherwise indicated.

B. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by column cover manufacturer.

2.3 PAINTS AND COATINGS

A. Shop Primers: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior

Painting."

B. Universal Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal

modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.







A. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of column covers with those of adjoining

construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and

surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.

B. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush

surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends.

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible.

After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet

finish.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to

minimize contrast.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Threecoat fluoropolymer finish complying with

AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat

and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with

coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample

2.7 STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove

dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust,

if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast

Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

B. Pretreatment: Immediately after cleaning, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic

coating applied over it.

C. Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard

thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less





than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin manufacturer's

written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of column

covers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place column covers plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform

cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install column covers.

1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items

with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing,

or provide new units as required.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible.

C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and

openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.

D. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on

concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials

that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish.

E. Apply joint treatment at joints of spackled-seam metal column covers. Comply with

requirements in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean abraded areas of shop paint and paint

exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for

touching up shop-painted surfaces.






3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective

coverings at time of Substantial Completion.





DECORATIVE METAL STAIRS 05 71 00 - 1

SECTION 05 71 00 - DECORATIVE METAL STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes steel-framed decorative metal stairs.


1. Section 03 35 43 “Polished Concrete Finishing” for finishing of decorative metal stair

treads.

2. Section 05 73 13 “Glazed Decorative Metal Railings” for glazed metal railings.

1.2 COORDINATION


and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats

are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and


with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following:

1. Paint products.

2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.







B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL STAIRS, GENERAL

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for

Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Architectural class, unless

more stringent requirements are indicated.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise

indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without

seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

D. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 25

(Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.

E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.

F. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or

ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where

built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property

Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563

(ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.





1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to

be shop primed with zinc-rich primer.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of

sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit

masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing

according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise

indicated.


A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and


B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout




A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets,

bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on

supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of


exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or

otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld connections to comply with the following:





4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary

Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.





F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners

where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)

screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as

indicated.

3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.

B. Subtreads, Risers, and Subplatforms:

1. Fabricate subtreads and subplatforms of steel shapes indicated.

2. Form subtreads, risers, and subplatforms to configurations indicated from cold-rolled

steel sheet 0.075 inch (1.9 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated.

3. Weld substreads to stringers. Locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be

concealed by finished treads.

4. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as

subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.

a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with gypsum board under

surfaces to produce smooth soffits.

2.7 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 057313 "Glazed Decorative Metal Railings."

1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.


adhesion.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-

SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."





D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with

galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise

indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop

painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary

for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and

masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing

metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from

established lines and levels and free of rack.

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete


D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete or

masonry.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.

G. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.


B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and






C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair


END OF SECTION 05 71 00

GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 05 73 13 - 1




SECTION 05 73 13 - GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Post-supported railings with glass infill.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided

floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.

1.3 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING


and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are

compatible.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and


with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project

site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.

2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: For certified wood products. Include statement of costs.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or

design, including mechanical finishes.






E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.1. Each type of glass required.

2. Fittings and brackets.

3. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top rail,

post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need

not be full height.

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

C. Preconstruction test reports.

D. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill

area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24 inches(600 mm) in length.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with

railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Sadev USA.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.






C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by

dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate

to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are

indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods, including structural analysis,

preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory

data to Architect for review.


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00

"Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable

design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:

1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate

tensile strength divided by 1.95.

2. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.

3. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.

C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions

indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.

(0.093 sq. m).

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller

marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise

indicated.





2.4 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.

C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.

D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

2.5 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.

2.6 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Safety Glazing: Glazing shall comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

B. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type 1

(transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have been tested for surface and edge

compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for

Category II materials.

1. Glass Color: Clear.

2. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, but not less than 1/2 inch.3. Polished edges.

C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or another

certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate

manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass

complies.

D. Glazing Gaskets for Glass Infill Panels: Glazing gaskets and related accessories recommended or

supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill panels in post-supported railings.

2.7 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.2. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.





B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required

to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and

capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to

other work unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the

design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based

on ICC-ES AC193.


ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise

indicated.


A. Wood Rails: Clear, straight-grained hardwood rails secured to recessed metal subrail.

1. Species: Maple.

2. Finish: Transparent polyurethane.3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Profile: Round, 2-inch (50-mm) diameter, unless otherwise indicated..5. Certified Wood: Wood products shall be certified according to the American Tree Farm

System's "AFF Standard," the AF&PA's Sustainable Forestry Initiative, FSC STD-01-001

and FSC STD-40-004, or the standards of the Programme for Endorsement of Forest

Certification.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer

complying with MPI#79.


D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout



E. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion

cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching,

and grouting compound.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,

member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support

structural loads.






B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for

reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined

pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of


exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

F. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is

manufacturer's standard splicing method.

G. Form changes in direction as follows:

1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.2. .

3. .

H. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain

cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise

deforming exposed surfaces of components.

I. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

J. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,

and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work where indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-

resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports

and to prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

2.10 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on

glazing panels.

1. Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges with

slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

2. Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges with

slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

B. Infill Panels: Provide tempered glass panels.






A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipment.

2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and

leave surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in

location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished

after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means

without further cutting or fitting.2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm

in 3 m).

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals

and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for

securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.





3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing

components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings.

Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish

of railings.

3.3 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS

A. Post-Supported Glass Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written

instructions and with requirements in other Part 3 articles. Erect posts and other metal railing

components, then set factory-cut glass panels. Do not cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field.

Protect edges from damage.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing with

clean water, and wiping dry.

B. Clean wood rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective

coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial

Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required

alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.





WOOD FENCE 06 10 63 - 1

WOOD FENCE SECTION 06 10 63

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wood fencing and related work as indicated and as specified

1.3 SUBMITTAL

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout, fabrication, and installation shop drawings.

C. Samples: Submit 3 samples, approximately on four inches long, rails and infill panel (pickets).

D. Test Reports: Submit design mix for ready mixed concrete and delivery pickets.

E. Hardware: Provide product information for all gate hardware including frame, gate hinges, slide

bar, drop bars, post to rail brackets and fasteners.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has at least three years’

experience and has completed at least five fence projects with similar material and scope to that

indicated for this Project with a successful construction record of in-service performance

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preconstruction conference at the project site in

compliance with requirements of Division 01

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp

or wet surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary

coverings including polyethylene and similar material

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Fit wood fencing to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER




WOOD FENCE 06 10 63 - 2

A. Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 “American Softwood Lumber Standard” and with

applicable grading rules of inspection agencies by American Lumber Standards Committee’s

(ALSC) Board of Review.

B. Rails: Nominal 2 inches by 4 inches rough sawn, seasoned, clear cedar lumber

C. Trim Board: Nominal 1” x 4” rough sawn, seasoned, clear cedar lumber

D. Fence boards: Nominal 1 inch by 6 inch, rough sawn, seasoned, clear cedar lumber, straight cut

at top end and square cut at bottom end.

E. Trim Cap: Nominal 2” x 6” rough sawn, seasoned, clear cedar lumber

2.2 POST AND ACCESSORIES

A. Round Steel Pipe: Standard weight. Schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe complying with ASTM

F 1083. Comply with ASTM F 1043, Material Design Group IA, external and internal coating

Type A, consisting of not less than 1.8-oz./sq. ft. (0.55-kg/sq. m) zinc; and strength and stiffness

requirements per requirements for heavy industrial fence.

1. Line Posts: 2.375” O.D. (WPS-2)

2. End, corner, Gate Posts: 4” O.D. (WPS-2½)

B. Rail Supports: Minimum 1/8” thick “C” clamps with setscrews; hot dipped galvanized steel

C. Post Tops: Hot-dipped galvanized pressed steel or cast-iron driven onto posts to form

weathertight closure

2.3 PANEL ASSEMBLY

A. Top, bottom, and intermediate rail with pickets set tight and power nailed with galvanized and

coated framing nails set slightly recessed, 2 staggered each crossing of rail per picket; squared

units to provide complete coverage when installed 8-foot sections.


A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as

recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for

nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and

framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including

recommended nails.

1. Provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153).

2.5 CONCRETE

A. Provide minimum 3,500 PSI air entrained ready mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C-94,

maximum 3” slump. Top 8” of footing shall be formed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION




WOOD FENCE 06 10 63 - 3

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Do not use lumber of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated,

not adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate the Work with a minimum of joints or the

optimum jointing arrangement.

B. Do not begin fence installation and erection before the final grading is completed, with finish

elevations established, unless otherwise permitted.

1. Space line posts no more than 8 feet on center.

C. Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate (using post-hole digger) to uniform diameters at the spacing

required, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil.

1. Remove from the site the same day as it was dug and dispose at a Permitted Subtitle D

landfill. If not indicated on Drawings, excavate holes for each post to not less than four

times the largest cross section of post.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, excavate hole depths approximately 3 inches lower than post

bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches below finish grade surface.

D. Setting Posts: Center and align posts in holes at correct height, 3” above bottom of excavation


1. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.

2. Check each post for vertical top alignment, and hold in position during placement and

finishing operations. Protect portion of posts above ground from concrete splatter.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2 inches above grade and trowel to a

crown to shed water.

E. Concrete Strength: Allow concrete to attain at least 75% of its minimum 28-day compressive

strength, but in no case sooner than7 days after placement.

F. Fit fence work to other Work. Scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.

G. Set fence work accurately to required levels and lines with members plumb and true.

H. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to

view or will receive finish materials. Make right connections between members. Install

fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.

I. Set wood infills accurately to required lines and levels. Secure rails to posts with “C” clamps

using 3/8” galvanized steel lag screws. Fasten set screw on clamps to maintain rails tight to

posts.

J. Trim exposed post ends with wood trim matching fence infill.

END OF SECTION

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 1




SECTION 06 1053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

2. Plywood backing panels.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal

size in least dimension.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include

physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent

testing agency.

2. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before

and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent

testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of

treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Fire-retardant-treated wood.

2. Power-driven fasteners.

3. Post-installed anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-

retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that

periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is

representative of the material tested.






A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.

Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide

for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is

indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with

requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-

test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test

method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread

index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant

progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame

front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during

the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where

exterior type is not indicated.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry

plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing

agency.

E. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.





2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other

construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Cants.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber

of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will

interfere with its attachment and purpose.

D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to

eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

2.4 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant

treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in

this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather or in area of high relative humidity, provide

fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw

manufacturer for material being fastened.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC58 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5.





PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit

carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar

supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities

requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with

classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,

specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where

framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips

not more than 16 inches o.c.

D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with

fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with

function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or

optimum joint arrangement.

E. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying

with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated

and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other

work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces


C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not

less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness

of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

END OF SECTION

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 4116 - 1




SECTION 06 4116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets.

2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad

architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.


1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims,

and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other

construction before cabinet installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related

units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded

cabinets.





B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Show large-scale details.

3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate

architectural cabinets.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1. Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish

required.





a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material applied to

one edge.

2. Exposed Cabinet Hardware and Accessories: One full-size unit for each type and finish.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage a qualified fabricator, acceptable to the Architect, that is

an AWI-member firm; that has not less than 10 years' experience in the custom fabrication and

installation of architectural woodwork comparable to that indicated, on not less than 5 projects,

acceptable to the Architect, that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated;

that has production facility with capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the

Work; and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service

performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage

architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation

areas or in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field

Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet-

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative

humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction

period.

B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to

avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field

measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork

Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other

requirements.

B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Custom.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.

D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay.

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as

required by quality standard.

F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.

3. Edges: Match Architect’s samples. Grade HGS.

4. Pattern Direction: As indicated.

G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies:Thermoset decorative panels.

a. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding.

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide

surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge

banding.

3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative

laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws

from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical

fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures

of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.





2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard

for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of

referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified


1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

3. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally fused,

melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of

NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of

opening.

B. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.

D. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

E. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-overtravel-extension type; zinc-

plated-steel, ball-bearing slides.

2. For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide

Grade 1.

3. For drawers more than 3 inches high, but not more than 6 inches high and not more than

24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

4. For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-

200.

5. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100.

6. For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide, provide Grade 1HD-200.

G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.





J. Tempered Float Glass for Cabinet Doors: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I,

Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3, 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Finish: Match Architect’s sample.

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class

requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to

less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.

Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-

metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent

possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for

shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for

scribing, trimming, and fitting.

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work,

and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to

produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and

burrs.

D. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 8000 "Glazing" and in

GANA's "Glazing Manual."

1. For glass in frames, secure glass with removable stops.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less

than 72 hours.





3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard

grade of item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to extent that it was not completed in

the shop.

C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with

wafer-head cabinet installation screws.

D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using

concealed shims.

1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged

finish at cuts.

2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately

aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide

unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as

indicated.

3. If hanging cleats are not indicated, fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and

bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal

screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.


A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual

defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform

appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.

END OF SECTION




FLUSH WOOD PANELING 064216 - 1

SECTION 064216 - FLUSH WOOD PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Flush wood paneling.

2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing flush wood paneling that

is not concealed within other construction.

3. Shop finishing of flush wood paneling.


1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips

required for installing paneling that is concealed within other construction before

paneling installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that paneling can be installed as indicated.





1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: For flush wood paneling.






2. For paneling veneered in fabrication shop, show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain

direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence

within the flitch for each leaf.

3. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and finish specified, in manufacturer's or

fabricator's standard size.

D. Samples for Verification: For the following:

1. Lumber for Transparent Finish: Not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 12 inches (300

mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.

2. Veneer Leaves: Representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent-

finished paneling.

3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products for Transparent Finish: 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm),

for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. Retain "Product Certificates" Paragraph below to require

submittal of product certificates from manufacturers.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

C. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: [WI Quality Certification Program

D. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated materials, from ICC-ES.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-

service performance.

1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant

B. Installer Qualifications: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant


A. Do not deliver paneling until painting and similar operations that might damage paneling have

been completed in installation areas. Store paneling in installation areas or in areas where

environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.






A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet-

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature between 60

and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between 25 and 55percent during the

remainder of the construction period.

B. Established Dimensions: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, establish

dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and

coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELING FABRICATORS

A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility

for production of paneling andwood trim

2.2 PANELING, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork

Standards" for grades of flush wood paneling (wood-veneer wall surfacing) indicated for

construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

2.3 FLUSH WOOD PANELING (WOOD-VENEER WALL SURFACING)

A. Grade: Premium

B. Wood Species and Cut:

C. Veneer Matching Method:

1. Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Pleasing (Random) match.

2. Within Panel Face: Running match.

3. Adjacent Veneer Leaves and within Panel Face: Slip, center-balance, or book match.

D. Panel-Matching Method:

1. No matching is required between adjacent panels. Select and arrange panels for similarity

of grain pattern and color between adjacent panels.

2. [Premanufactured panel sets used full width] [Premanufactured panel sets selectively

reduced in width] [Made-to-order, sequence-matched panels] [Made-to-order, blueprint-

matched panels and components] within each separate area.

a. See Section 011000 "Summary" for requirements concerning flitches reserved by

Architect.





E. Panel Core Construction: Fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant MDF.

1. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm)

F. Exposed Panel Edges: Applied solid-wood banding 11/16 inch (18 mm) thick by depth of

panels.

G. Panel Reveals: Matte black plastic laminate

H. Fire-Retardant-Treated Paneling: Panels shall consist of wood-veneer and fire-retardant

particleboard or fire-retardant, medium-density fiberboard (MDF). Panels shall have a flame-

spread index of [25] [75] or less and a smoke-developed index of 450 or less per ASTM E 84,

and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

I. Assemble panels by gluing and concealed fastening.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Materials, General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality

standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Moisture Content: [5 to 10] [8 to 13] [4 to 9] percent.

C. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of

referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130

2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2

3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.

2.5 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated,

use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response

characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by

a qualified testing agency.

1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do

not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise

adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from

untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of

qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that

will be concealed from view after installation.





B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less

when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion

when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more

than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and

15 percent, respectively.

2. For items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use organic resin chemical

formulation.

3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed

fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking shop certified by testing and

inspecting agency.

4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement procedures during treatment and drying

processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying

sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of paneling.

C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed

together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-

developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2

except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa);

modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2070 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and

screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf (1100 and 1000 N),

respectively.

D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: MDF panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood

fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel

manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or

less per ASTM E 84.

2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln-

dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.

Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-

metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls.

C. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by panel fabricator for each substrate for secure

anchorage.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before

fabrication.





B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to

Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where

necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times paneling fabrication will be

complete.

C. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing

fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or

roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts

to remove splinters and burrs.

2.8 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Finish paneling at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final

touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling

countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing

paneling, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to

concealed surfaces of paneling.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium

2. Finish: System - 4, water-based latex acrylic

3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from

closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.

4. Staining: None required

5. Sheen: Satin, 31-45gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition paneling to humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing paneling, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as

required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install paneling to comply with quality standard grade of paneling to be installed.





B. Install paneling level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Shim as required with

concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400

mm). Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.6 mm in 2400-mm) vertical cup or bow

and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) horizontal variation from a true plane.

1. For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment

of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/16 inch

(1.5 mm).

C. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips

1. Do not use face fastening unless [covered by trim] [otherwise indicated].

D. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before

installation of paneling. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces

where only sealer/prime coats are shop applied.


A. Repair damaged and defective paneling, where possible, to eliminate defects. Where not

possible to repair, replace paneling. Adjust for uniform appearance.

B. Clean paneling on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or

soiled areas.





THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1

SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board, Type VI for under-slab installation

2. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board.

a. Exterior walls, above-grade.

3. Mineral-wool blanket.

a. Miscellaneous areas to attain a continuous thermal barrier on exterior envelope.


1. Section 07 21 19 "Foamed-in-Place Insulation" for spray-applied polyurethane foam

insulation.

2. Section 07 54 23 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for insulation specified as

part of roofing construction.

3. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic

insulation.




A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and

concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project

site until just before installation time.





3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each

area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type VI: ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum

compressive strength; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450,

respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Dow Chemnical Company “Styrofoam”

b. Owens Corning “Foamular”

c. Tenneco Building Products “AMOFOAM Insulation”

2.2 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD

A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Glass-Fiber-Mat Faced: ASTM C 1289, glass-fiber-mat faced, Type II,

Class 2.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; R2+ Matte.

b. Firestone Building Products; Enverge CI Glass Exterior Wall Insulation.

c. Hunter Panels; Xci CG.

d. Johns Manville: CI Max Foam

2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced (Curtain Wall Insulation): ASTM C 1289, foil faced,

Type I, Class 1 or 2.


a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; R2+ Silver.

b. Dow Chemical Company (The); THERMAX (ci) Exterior Insulation.

c. Hunter Panels; Xci Foil.

d. Johns Manville; AP Foil

2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.

3. Provide 3” panels unless noted otherwise.













2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS

A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled

content not less than 75 percent.

B. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);

consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,

respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.


a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC); MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire

Batt.

b. Roxul Inc; AFB.

c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company; SAFB (Sound Attenuation Fire

Blankets).

2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of

holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products that are

compatible with insulation system.

2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches

(50 mm) square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in

diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.

B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick

galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold

insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread

and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.

2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum

flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier

materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without

damaging insulation and substrates.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.











2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of

Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental

Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the

indoor recommended exposure limit, or 33 mcg/cu. m, and that of acetaldehyde shall not

exceed 9 mcg/cu. m.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections

capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,

rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill

voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,

and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or

required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's

recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below

exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) in from

exterior walls.






3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following

requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a

snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not

rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),

support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of

insulation to flanges of metal studs.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required

to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum

volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION

A. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction according to curtain-wall manufacturer's


1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets within

window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation manufacturer

to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity

width of dimension indicated on Drawings between insulation and glass.

2. Install insulation to fit snugly without bowing.

3. Tape all joints including perimeter condition at curtainwall framing to provide a

continuous vapor barrier.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and

other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse

and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after

installation.





FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07 2119 - 1

SECTION 07 2119 - FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Closed-cell spray polyurethane foam.


1. Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation" for foam-plastic board insulation.

2. Section 07 54 23 “ Thermoplastic-Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing”

3. Section 01 4010 “Pre-Construction Project Mockup.”





B. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Evaluation Reports: For spray-applied polyurethane foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.

D. Evaluation Report: Compatibility matrix for spray-applied polyurethane foam-plastic insulation.

1. Matrix indicating adhesion and chemical compatibility with each substrate spray-applied

insulation adjoins.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLOSED-CELL SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM

A. Closed-Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam: ASTM C 1029, Type II, minimum density of 2.0 lb/cu.

ft. and minimum aged R-value at 1-inch thickness of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.


following:

a. BASF Corporation “Wall Tite”

b. Dow Chemical Company (The) “SPF Insulation – MX2045”

c. Henry Company “Permax 2.0 Closed-Cell SPF Insulation”

d. SWD Urethane Company “Quik-Shield / 250”

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.


A. Primer: Material recommended by insulation manufacturer where required for adhesion of

insulation to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that substrates are clean, dry, and free of substances that are harmful to insulation.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by insulation manufacturer. Apply primer to

comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas to be

insulated; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.

B. Spray insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated and fill voids.

C. Apply in multiple passes to not exceed maximum thicknesses recommended by manufacturer. Do

not spray into rising foam.










D. Framed Construction: Install into cavities formed by framing members to achieve thickness

indicated on Drawings.

E. Miscellaneous Voids: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and

other causes.





BELOW SLAB VAPOR BARRIERS 07 26 16 - 1

SECTION 07 26 16 – BELOW SLAB VAPOR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Below slab vapor barriers.


1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete".

2. Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation" for thermal insulation.




A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC VAPOR BARRIERS

A. Plastic Vapor Barriers: Provide one of the following.

1. Extruded Plastic Vapor Barrier: Polyolefin membrane.

a. Properties

1) Thickness: 15 mil

2) Water vapor permeance: Less than 0.01 perms, as tested in accordance with

mandatory conditioning tests as per ASTM E 1745 Section 7.1.

3) Strength: ASTM E1745 Class A

b. Manufacturers:

1) Stego Industries ::C “Stego Wrap 15 mil Vapor Barrier”

2) Reef Industries “Vaporguard”

3) Sundance, Inc. “Sundance 15 mil Vapor Barrier”

2. Miscellaneous:




BELOW SLAB VAPOR BARRIERS 07 26 16 - 2

a. Adhesive: Manufacturer’s recommended pointing mastic.

b. Joint tape: Manufacturer's recommended joint tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site verification of conditions: Examine and correct conditions of area to receive the Work prior

to installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions,

submittals, and applicable industry standards.

B. Plastic Vapor Barrier:

1. General: Provide vapor barrier as a continuous membrane through slab-on-grade areas

throughout the project area.

2. Install in compliance with ASTM E 1643.

3. Place vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour.

4. Lap Vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. Seal all penetrations.

5. Lap joints 6 inch and seal and recommended pressure sensitive tape.

6. Seal pipe penetrations with pipe boot made from vapor barrier and tape.

7. Protect vapor barrier from damage during installation of reinforcing steel and utilities.

8. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6

inches and taping all four sides with pressure sensitive tape.

9. Continuously tape perimeter of under slab vapor barrier to foundation wall.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect vapor barriers from damage until concealed by permanent construction.


THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 1




SECTION 07 5423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.

2. Substrate board.

3. Vapor retarder.

4. Roof insulation.

5. Cover board.

6. Walkways.


1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking;

and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.

2. Section 07 6200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and

counterflashings.

3. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing Manual: Membrane Roof Systems" apply to Work of this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and

installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof

accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's


3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,

including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.





7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if

applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after

installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.



B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including

the following:

1. Layout and thickness of insulation.

2. Base flashings and membrane termination details.

3. Flashing details at penetrations.

4. Tapered insulation layout, thickness, and slopes.

5. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

6. Tie-in with adjoining air barrier.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Roof membrane and flashings, of color required.

2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.

D. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind uplift

performance requirements.



B. Manufacturer Certificates:

1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying

that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements"

Article.

a. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.

2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying that all

materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.

C. Product Test Reports: For roof membrane and insulation, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, indicating compliance with specified requirements.

D. Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.

E. Field Test Reports:





1. Fastener-pullout test results and manufacturer's revised requirements for fastener

patterns.2. Leak-detection; submit EFVM (Electric Field Vector Mapping) test results.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed or listed in FM

Approvals' RoofNav for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive

manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled

with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or

listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location

and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid

material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated

shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,

moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent

deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions

and warranty requirements.





1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Special warranty includes roof membrane, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover

boards, vapor retarder, substrate board, and other components of roofing system.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Leak Detection System: Contractor shall warrant system for a period of 5 years after final

inspection

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form acceptable to

Owner, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of

roofing system such as roof membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards,

substrate boards, vapor retarders, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Installed roofing system and flashings shall withstand specified uplift

pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof system

and flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when

tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to

ASTM D 3746, ASTM D 4272, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM

Approvals 4470.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent

materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roof

membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift pressures

when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897:

1. Wind Loads: The roofing assemblies shall be designed, fabricated, and installed to

withstand the maximum inward and outward wind pressures as determined according to

ASCE/SEI 7-10.

D. FM Approvals' RoofNav Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component materials

shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470 as part of a

roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for Class 1 or noncombustible

construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals Certification markings.





1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.

2. Hail-Resistance Rating: SH .

E. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): Three-year-aged SRI not less than 64 or initial SRI not less than

82 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a

qualified testing agency.

F. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes

indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.

2.2 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

A. TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878/D 6878M, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, TPO sheet.


following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

b. Firestone Building Products.

c. Flex Membrane International Corp.

d. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane

manufacturer or manufacturers approved by roof membrane manufacturer.3. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal, or as indicated.

4. Exposed Face Color: Light grey to meet SRI requirements.

2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use

and compatible with other roofing components.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils thick,

minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.

C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or aluminum bars,

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.

F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,

approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.










G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-

resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofing components to

substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

H. Vector Mapping Grid: Roofing system manufacturer's standard stainless steel (Type 304) grid to

serve as conductive medium.

1. Accessories: Provide EFVM Connection Kit and other accessories recommended by

roofing system manufacturer for field quality control testing of installed roof membrane.

I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,

preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination

reglets, and other accessories.

2.4 SUBSTRATE BOARDS

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board or

ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, fiber-reinforced gypsum board.

1. Thickness: Type X, 1/2 inch thick.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-

resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof

deck.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDER

A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M, polyethylene film laminated to

layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive, minimum 40-mil total thickness; maximum permeance

rating of 0.1 perm; cold applied, with slip-resisting surface and release paper backing. Provide

primer when recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Carlise;

VapAir Seal MD or comparable product as approved by Architect.

2.6 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO roof membrane

manufacturer, approved for use in FM Approvals' RoofNav-listed roof assemblies.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber

mat facer on both major surfaces.

1. Size: 48 by 48 inches.

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or if not indicated, 6 inches minimum.

a. Base Layer: 2 inches, minimum





b. Upper Layer: As indicated, or as required to provide indicated minimum total R

Value.

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards.

1. Material: Match roof insulation.

2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch.

3. Slope:

a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use

and compatibility with other roofing system components.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners with metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-

resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,

and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof

insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer, one of the following:

1. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive.

2. Full-spread, spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.

D. Cover Board: Provide one of the following:

1. Glass-Mat: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2

inch thick.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Georgia-Pacific Building Products.

2) National Gypsum Company.

2. Gypsum-Fiber Board: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, cellulosic-fiber-reinforced, water

resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

1) United States Gypsum Company.





2.8 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured

walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system

manufacturer.

1. Size: Approximately 24 by 24 inches.

2. Color: Contrasting with roof membrane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and

roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at

penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that the roof deck is clean, dry, supported, and suitable for installation of the

roofing system.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing system

installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp

projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or

migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking

place or when rain is forecast.

C. Perform fastener-pullout tests according to roof system manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Submit test result within 24 hours after performing tests.

a. Include manufacturer's requirements for any revision to previously submitted

fastener patterns required to achieve specified wind uplift requirements.

3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, FM

Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data

Sheet 1-29.





B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from

entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast.

Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning Work on adjoining roofing.

C. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain

weathertightness of transition.

3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, with end joints staggered not

less than 24 inches in adjacent rows.

1. At steel roof decks, install substrate board at right angle to flutes of deck.

a. Locate end joints over crests of steel roof deck.

2. Tightly butt substrate boards together.

3. Cut substrate board to fit tight around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks.

4. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM

Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss Prevention

Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: Prime substrate if required by manufacturer. Install self-

adhering-sheet vapor retarder over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each

sheet a minimum of 3-1/2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Seal laps by rolling.

B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air

movement into roofing system.

3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or

left exposed at end of workday.

B. Comply with roofing system and roof insulation manufacturer's written instructions for

installing roof insulation.

C. Installation Over Metal Decking:

1. Install base layer of insulation with joints staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent

rows.

a. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks.

b. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width.





c. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each

side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.

1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.

d. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

e. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

f. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation through substrate board using

mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-

type roof insulation to metal decks.

1) Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' RoofNav for

specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2) Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and

field of roof.

2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer offset not

less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.

a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows.

b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks.c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in width.

d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with each

side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.

1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.

e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

g. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to FM

Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss

Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as

follows:

1) Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied or uniform coverage

of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining

insulation in place.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS

A. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints

staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each

direction.

1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks.2. At internal roof drains, conform to slope of drain sump.

a. Trim cover board so that water flow is unrestricted.





3. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations.

4. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to FM Approvals' RoofNav

assembly requirements and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for

specified Windstorm Resistance Classification, as follows:

a. Set cover board in ribbons of bead-applied or uniform coverage of full-spread

insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF VECTOR MAPPING GRID

A. Install vector mapping grid over cover board, overlapping at edges and ends according to roof

manufacturer's and EFVM system manufacturer’s written instructions, and the roof

manufacturer’s full system’s warranty.

3.9 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's


B. Unroll roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.

C. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

D. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum

dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

E. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by

manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice

area of roof membrane.

F. Roof Membrane Adhesive: Apply to substrate at rate required by manufacturer, and install roof

membrane.

G. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations,

penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

H. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

I. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roof membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roof

membrane and sheet flashings, to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut

edges of roof membrane and sheet flashings.2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with

requirements.

J. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane in

place with clamping ring.





3.10 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to

roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow

to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet

flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side

and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through

termination bars.

3.11 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways:

1. Install flexible walkways at the following locations:

a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit.

b. Between each rooftop unit location, creating a continuous path connecting rooftop

unit locations.

c. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting rooftop

unit locations.d. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements.

2. Provide 6-inch clearance between adjoining pads.

3. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive

according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Coordinate location of walkway pads so that they are not installed directly on roof

membrane seams.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface

preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to

furnish reports to Architect.

1. Electronic Leak-Detection Testing:

a. Testing agency shall test each deck area for leaks using an electronic leak-

detection method that locates discontinuities in the roofing membrane.

b. Testing agency shall perform tests on abutting or overlapping smaller areas as

necessary to cover entire test area.





c. Testing agency shall create a conductive electronic field over the area of roofing to

be tested and electronically determine locations of discontinuities or leaks, if any,

in the roofing.

d. Testing agency shall provide survey report indicating locations of discontinuities if

any.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage roofing-membrane manufacturer's authorized service

representative to provide periodic inspection of roof assembly installation and prepare

inspection reports.

C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect

roofing installation on completion.

D. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that

they do not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if

replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.

3.13 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When

remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect roofing system for

deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to

Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair

substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration

at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1




SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.

2. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.

3. Formed equipment support flashing.


1. Section 06 1053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

2. Division 23 for mechanical unit roof curbs.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of

penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.

B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials,

joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.



1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment curbs,

and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and trim.

3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.


2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details.

Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.





3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location

in Project.4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of

fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.

7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing

direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.

8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.

9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and

counterflashings as applicable.10. Include details of special conditions.

11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.

12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 6 inches square.



B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in



A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing

and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful

in-service performance.


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might

cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials

away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to

sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and

trim installation.





1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal

flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within

specified warranty period.

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural

movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed

sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing

Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and

profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint

sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying

strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth,

flat surface.

1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled).

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet

according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; prepainted by

coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.





1. Surface: Smooth, flat.

2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply

coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'


1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry

film thickness of 0.5 mil.

2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistant

polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified

asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal

temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of

underlayment manufacturer.


a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; “CCW WIP 300HT”.

b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc. (formerly Grace Construction Products); “Grace

Ice and Water Shield HT” or “Grace Ultra”.

c. Henry Company; “Blueskin PE200 HT”.

2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.

3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or

lower.

B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. minimum.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other

miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as

recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and

bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by

manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.





a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or

factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers

under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal

being fastened.

2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) and Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet:

Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M

or ASTM F 2329.

C. Solder: Types recommended by metal manufacturers for indicated applications.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape

with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2

inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane or silicone polymer sealant; of

type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim

and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited

movement.

G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.

H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and

recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,

metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and

trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with

performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,

buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded

back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners

on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to

a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within

1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.





1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled

with butyl sealant concealed within joints.2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide

for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard

for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

1. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored

or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Stainless Steel Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be

seamed, form seams, and solder.

G. Metallic-Coated Steel Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams

and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for

intended use.

H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.6 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Fascia: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long sections. Furnish

with 6-inch-wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch-wide, concealed backup plate.

2. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

a. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

b. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

B. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following

materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.2. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

3. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.

C. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following

materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.


D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.







E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:



2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch-long, but not

exceeding 12-foot-long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous

lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings; and form

with 2-inch-high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:


B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to

extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high, end dams.

Fabricate from the following materials:




2.8 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of

the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely

anchored.

3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.






3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.

Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature

restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing

underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not

less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2

inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

B. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing and

trim.


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in

place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective

coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal

flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat

seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating

sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners.

Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of

buckling and tool marks.

5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-

treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as

recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

1. Coat concealed side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous

coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious

construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or

wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space

movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or

intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled

with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.





D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener

manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to

minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight

installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.

1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint

members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.

When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint

members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for

installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at

temperatures below 40 deg F.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint

Sealants."

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges

of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned

surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet.

2. Do not use torches for soldering.

3. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.

Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless steel

and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering.

Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and

neutralization.

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and

cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line,

levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and

weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations

in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge

flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top

edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install

stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.

Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend

counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches.





Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam with anchor and washer at

36-inch centers unless otherwise indicated.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation

of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric or butyl sealant and clamp

flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture

according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of

wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and

louvers. Provide a minimum 3” lap where sheet metal flashing components overlap.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar

flashings to extend beyond wall openings.

3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with

installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to

equipment support member.

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance

of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch

offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and

weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim

are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean

finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain

sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION




ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Roof hatches.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders, ships' ladders, and stairs

for access to roof hatches.

2. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for safety railing systems not attached to roof-

hatch curbs.

3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal

flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet

metal trim and accessories.

4. Section 077100 "Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae, copings, gravel stops,

gutters and downspouts, and counterflashing.

5. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for special curbs designed

to accommodate seismic and vibration controls.

6. Section 108213 “Roof Screen Wall” for roof top mechanical equipment screen wall

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing

and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leak proof, weathertight, secure, and

noncorrosive installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be

supported.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.


and profiles, and finishes.





B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.

1. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate

dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-

assembled work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on

Samples of size to adequately show color.


A. Coordination Drawings: Project specific roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating

penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.

2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.

3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,

piping, and conduit.

4. Required clearances.

5. Details or method of maintaining continuity of building thermal and air barriers.

B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:


b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally

induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective

manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Wind-Restraint Performance: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 ROOF HATCH

A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded or

mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and

weathertight perimeter gasketing, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter

bottom.


following:

a. Babcock-Davis.

b. Bilco Company (The).

c. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.

d. Dur-Red Products.

e. Hi Pro International, Inc.

f. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

g. O'Keeffe's Inc.

B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 54 inches (750 by 1370 mm).

C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa) external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa) internal

uplift load.

D. Hatch Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

1. Thickness: 0.079 inch (2.01 mm).

2. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Construction:

1. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board.

a. R-Value: 12.0 according to ASTM C 1363.

2. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer continuous around hatch perimeter.

3. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal

liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.













4. Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard, of same material and finish as metal curb.

5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches (305 mm) above roofing surface unless


F. Hardware: Spring operators, hold-open arm, stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles,

stainless-steel butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside.

1. Provide two-point latch on lids larger than 84 inches (2130 mm).

G. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps,

fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation;

attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having

jurisdiction.

1. Height: 42 inches (1060 mm) above finished roof deck.

2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches (31 mm) in diameter or galvanized-

steel tube, 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) in diameter.

3. Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21 inches

(533 mm) in diameter.

4. Chain Passway Barrier: Galvanized proof coil chain with quick link on fixed end.

5. Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing

system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism.

6. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated end

fittings.

7. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of

handrail and railing members.

8. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight.

9. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system.

10. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

H. Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-access

ladder.

1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to closed

position.

2. Height: 42 inches (1060 mm) above finished roof deck.

3. Material: Steel tube.

4. Post: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter pipe.

5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 METAL MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating

designation and mill phosphatized for field painting where indicated.





1. Mill-Phosphatized Finish: Manufacturer's standard for field painting.

2. Factory Prime Coating: Where field painting is indicated, apply pretreatment and white

or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat, with a minimum dry film

thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm).

3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with

ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to

comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer and

fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by

weight.

4. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and

thermosetting topcoat to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).

5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or

polyester-backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat, with a minimum total dry

film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M


D. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube.

E. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other

miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness and thermal resistivity as

indicated.

C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for

aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or

chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.

D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

E. Underlayment:

1. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,

nonperforated.





2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick polyethylene sheet complying with

ASTM D 4397.

3. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.

4. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick,

consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or

SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer

when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

5. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application

and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being

fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the

following unless otherwise indicated:

6. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless

steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

7. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

8. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

F. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or

silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane silicone polymer sealant as

recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type,

grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.

H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586/D 4586M, asbestos free, of consistency required for

application.


A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,

dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.





C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without warping, jogs

in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.

3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete

installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.

4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or

loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from

contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with

bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of stainless-steel roof accessories with bituminous coating where in

contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood

substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's recommended

slip sheet.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of

roof accessories for waterproof performance.

C. Roof-Hatch Installation:

1. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating

mechanism and hardware.

2. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.

3. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to

Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."

C. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Clean off excess sealants.





E. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.





APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 1

SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials.


1. Division 1 “General Requirements”.

2. Division 7 Section “Penetration Firestopping” for fire-stopping sealants

3. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for gypsum board fireproofing.

4. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies” for gypsum board

fireproofing.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements:

1. Structural frame shall be considered thermally unrestrained.

2. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction which are identical

to those tested for the following fire performance characteristics, according to test

method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.

a. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designation in UL

"Fire Resistance Directory" for fire-rated assemblies in which sprayed-on

fireproofing serves as direct-applied protection, tested per ASTM E 119.

b. Surface Burning Characteristics: As indicated for each sprayed-on fireproofing

product required, tested per ASTM E 84 and listed in UL "Building Materials

Directory"

B. Definitions

1. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive materials.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.

1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, densities,

thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements.







B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Submit product data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating

percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content.

2. Submit product data for adhesives, sealants and sealant primers applied on site and used

inside the weatherproofing system, include printed statement of VOC content.

3. Submit product data for paints and coatings applied on site and used inside the

weatherproofing system, include printed statement of VOC content.

C. Shop Drawings: Framing plans or schedules, or both, indicating the following:

1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating.

2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of

each structural component and assembly.

4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.

D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 4 inches (102 mm)

square in size.


A. Qualification Data: For installer and testing agency.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.

C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.

D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For fireproofing.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by

fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install

manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, to set quality standards for materials and execution, and for preconstruction

testing.

1. Build mockup of each type of fireproofing and different substrate and each required

finish as shown on Drawings.





2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations

in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Coordinate with owner to engage a qualified testing agency to

perform preconstruction testing on field mockups of fireproofing.

1. Field Mockup: Sizes and configurations of assemblies to be determined on a case-by-case

basis.

2. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and

construction.

B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with requirements for

specified performance and test methods.

1. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM E 736.

Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than

minimum specified in Part 2.

2. Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in

referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.

3. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, attests

that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing.

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

5. For materials failing tests, obtain applied-fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions

for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated bonding agents or

primers.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is

44 deg F (7 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain

temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product

application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing

complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or,

if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of

each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source.

C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263;

testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable

testing agency.

1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. VOC Content: for field applications, coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of

authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.

3. Primers, Sealants, and Undercoatings: 200 g/L.

E. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry

formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project

site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application, or conveyed in a dry state and

mixed with atomized water at place of application.


a. Carboline Company; a subsidiary of RPM International; Polycrete 239.

b. W.R. Grace & Co. – Conn.; Grace Construction Products; Monokote Z106.

c. Isolatek International; Cafco 400.

2. Application: Designated for exterior use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to


3. Bond Strength: Minimum 430-lbf/sq. ft. (20.59-kPa) cohesive and adhesive strength

based on field testing according to ASTM E 736.

4. Density: Not less than density specified in the approved fire-resistance design, according

to ASTM E 605.

5. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to

requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less

than 0.375 inch (9 mm).

6. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.





7. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing


a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 10 or less.

8. Compressive Strength: Minimum 100 lbf/sq. in. (689 kPa) according to ASTM E 761.

9. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937.

10. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759.

11. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to

ASTM E 760.

12. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) in 24 hours

according to ASTM E 859.

13. Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial

formulation to result in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21 or rating of 10

according to ASTM D 3274 when tested according to ASTM D 3273.

14. Sound Absorption: NRC of 0.50 to 0.75 according to ASTM C 423 for Type A mounting

according to ASTM E 795.

15. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard finishes, or Spray-textured

finish, or Rolled, spray-textured finish, or Skip-troweled finish, or Skip-troweled finish

with corner beads. Apply separate, colored topcoat after finishing.

a. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations or Match Architect's sample or

as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are

approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or

both of the following requirements:

1. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance design by UL

or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified bond

strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in

the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E 736.

C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with

requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish

required, according to fire-resistance designs indicated and fireproofing manufacturer's written

instructions. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices

required to attach lath to substrates and to receive fireproofing.





E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply

with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply

with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.

Include pins and attachment.

G. Sealer: Transparent-drying, water-dispersible, tinted protective coating recommended in writing

by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.

H. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing by

fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.

1. Cement-Based Topcoat: Factory-mixed, cementitious hard-coat formulation for trowel or

spray application over SFRM.

2. Water-Based Permeable Topcoat: Factory-mixed formulation for brush, roller, or spray

application over applied SFRM. Provide application at a rate of 60 sq. ft./gal. (1.5

sq. m/L)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and

according to each fire-resistance design.

1. Verify that substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill

scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign

substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of

normal use or fire exposure.

2. Verify that objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and

similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

3. Verify that substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping,

equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing

application.

B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck is complete before beginning fireproofing work.

C. Verify that roof construction, installation of rooftop HVAC equipment, and other related work

are complete before beginning fireproofing work.

D. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions to verify that

substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

E. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.





F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during

application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by

fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory

condition to receive fireproofing.

D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface

imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of

fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-

resistive products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and

products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers,

topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application

procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable

to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings

indicated.

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or

remove fireproofing.

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items

penetrating fireproofing are in place.

2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying

fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D. Metal Decks:

1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete topping, if

any, is completed.

2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing is completed;

prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing.

E. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and

fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for conditions of exposure and intended use. For

auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by

fireproofing manufacturer.





F. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. After the spraying operation in each area,

complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in

writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

G. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

H. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by

fireproofing manufacturer.

I. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants,

apply fireproofing that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied.

J. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofing

over which they are applied.

K. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing

material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

L. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied,

inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

N. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:

1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions

for each finish selected.

2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment.

3. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish with

a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness.

4. Skip-Troweled Finish: Even leveled surface produced by troweling spray-applied finish

to smooth out the texture and neaten edges.

5. Skip-Troweled Finish with Corner Beads: Even, leveled surface produced by troweling

spray-applied finish to smooth out the texture, eliminate surface markings, and square off

edges.


A. Special Inspections: Coordinate with owner to engage a qualified special inspector to perform

the following special inspections:

1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, Subsection 1705.13, "Sprayed Fire-Resistant

Materials."

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with

application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed

applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or

exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.





C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest.

2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results

indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project,

remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed

surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting

from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing is without damage or deterioration

at time of Substantial Completion.

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas

and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using

manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.


PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 1




SECTION 07 8413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through the

following fire-resistance-rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings

containing penetrating items:

1. Floors.

2. Roofs.

3. Walls and partitions.


C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 07 8443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated

construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.


A. For the following constructions, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced

and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke

and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls, including partitions, with fire-protection-rated openings.

2. Fire-resistance-rated floor and roof assemblies.


A. Product Data: For each type of through-penetration firestop system product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each kind of construction

condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and kind of penetrating item.

Include firestop design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting

agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for

construction and penetrating items.

2. Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing and inspecting

agency's illustration to suit a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit

illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system

manufacturer's fire-protection engineer.





C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design

designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting

agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit

illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping

manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-

resistance-rated assembly.


A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project

names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information

specified.

B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in

compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products

certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop

system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to

comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed through-penetration

firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and

whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration

and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply

with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A

qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and

follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814.

Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:.





a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of

qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to

through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:

1) UL in "Fire Resistance Directory."

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened

containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and

manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and

inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing

instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their

deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient

or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system

manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural

means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

C. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural

means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration

firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate

penetration firestopping.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping

installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.

2. 3M Fire Protection Products.

3. Nelson Firestop Products.

4. Specified Technologies Inc.

5. RectorSeal Corporation.

6. Tremco.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according

to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-

resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be

compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items

if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include smoke-barrier walls and fire partitions.

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. Horizontal assemblies include floors.

2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated.

3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per

UL 1479.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both

ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested

according to UL 1479.





F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

G. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by

penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency

for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.c. Fire-rated form board.

d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.

4. Collars.

5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials

indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by reference

to the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in

directories of the referenced testing and inspecting agencies as fill, void, or cavity materials.

B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete

floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial

extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a

neoprene gasket.

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during

exposure to moisture.

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with

intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric

sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,

inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum

foil on one side.





H. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,

fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a

nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled

with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant

additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect

pillows/bags from being easily removed.

J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

K. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless

indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

L. Outlet Box Protection: Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and

specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable:

1. Hilti Constructions Chemicals, Inc.; FS Series Pads.

2. International Protective Coatings Corp.; Type 1077 Series Putty Pads

3. Minnesota, Mining & Mfg. Co.; Type MPP-4S+ Series Moldable Putty Pads.

4. Nelson Firestop Products; Type FSP Series Putty Pads.

5. Rectorseal Corp.; Metacaulk and Biostop Series Fire-Rated Putty Pads.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration

firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,

water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,

mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with

optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting

performance.






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration

firestop systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and

the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials

that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable

of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose

particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop

system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine

primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from

contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would

otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to

remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without

disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance

Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and

published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support

fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional

shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other

accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and

penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

D. Outlet Box Protection: Install outlet box protective firestop pads for outlet boxes in fire rated

assemblies.





3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible plastic

labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of penetration

firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or

firestopping systems. Use self-adhering type labels with adhesives capable of permanently

bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material,

will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following

information on labels:

1. The words "Warning – Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage."2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and

inspections according to ASTM E 2174.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed

because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with

requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after

inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system

manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure

through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial

Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove

damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new

materials to produce through-penetration firestop systems complying with specified

requirements.

3.7 FIRESTOP SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to the alpha-alpha-numeric designations

listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.





PENETRATION

DESCRIPTIONUL CLASSIFIED SYSTEM FILL MATERIAL

No Penetrating Items C-AJ-0001-0999

C-BJ-0001-0999

F-A-0001-0999

W-J-0001-0999

W-L-0001-0999

Latex sealant

Silicone sealant

Mortar

Intumescent putty

Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or

Tubing

C-AJ-1001-1999

C-BJ-1001-1999

C-B-K1001-1999

F-A-1001-1999

F-B-1001-1999

F-C-1001-1999

W-J-1001-1999

W-K-1001-1999

W-L-1001-1999

Latex sealant

Silicone sealant

Mortar

Intumescent putty

Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or

Tubing

C-AJ-2001-2999

C-BJ-2001-2999

F-A-2001-2999

F-B-2001-2999

F-C-2001-2999

W-J-2001-2999

W-L-2001-2999

Latex sealant

Silicone sealant

Intumescent putty

Intumescent wrap strips

Firestop device

Firestop Systems for

Electrical Cables

C-AJ-3001-3999

C-BJ-3001-3999

F-A-3001-3999

F-B-3001-3999

F-C-3001-3999

W-J-3001-3999

W-L-3001-3999

Latex sealant

Silicone sealant

Intumescent putty

Silicone foam

Firestop Systems for Cable

Trays

C-AJ-4001-4999

C-BJ-4001-4999

F-A-4001-4999

F-B-4001-4999

F-C-4001-4999

W-J-4001-4999

W-K-4001-4999

W-L-4001-4999

Latex sealant

Intumescent putty

Silicone foam

Pillows/bags

Firestop Systems for

Insulated Pipes

C-AJ-5001-5999

C-BJ-5001-5999

F-A-5001-5999

F-C-5001-5999

W-J-5001-5999

W-L-5001-5999

Latex sealant

Intumescent putty


Silicone foam

Miscellaneous Electrical

Penetrants

C-AJ-6001-6999

F-A-6001-6999

W-L-6001-6999

Latex sealant

Intumescent putty

Mortar





PENETRATION

DESCRIPTIONUL CLASSIFIED SYSTEM FILL MATERIAL

Miscellaneous Mechanical

Penetrations

C-AJ-7001-7999

F-C-7001-7999

W-J-7001-7999

W-L-7001-7999

Latex sealant

Mortar

Groupings of Penetrations C-AJ-8001-8999

C-BJ-8001-8999

F-A- 8001-8999

F-C-8001-8999

W-J-8001-8999

W-L-8001-8999

Latex sealant

Mortar


Firestop device

Intumescent composite sheet.

END OF SECTION

JOINT FIRESTOPPING 07 8443 - 1




SECTION 07 8443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.

2. Joints in smoke barriers.


1. Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls,

horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers and for wall identification.

2. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for firestop tracks for metal-framed

partition heads.





B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of

firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified

testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit

illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system

manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-

resistance-rated assembly.



B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.


A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been

installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.






A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to

comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate

temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when

substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural

means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed

according to specified firestopping system design.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to


2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide

rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing

agency.

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."

2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS

A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases,

and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping

systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements

without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.





B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems

with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.


following:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products.

b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

c. Grabber Construction Products.

d. Hilti, Inc.

e. Nelson Firestop; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.

f. RectorSeal.

g. Specified Technologies, Inc.

h. Tremco, Inc.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor,

or roof in or between which it is installed.

C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per

UL 2079 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.


following:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products.

b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.

c. Hilti, Inc.

d. Nelson Firestop; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.

e. RectorSeal.

f. Specified Technologies, Inc.

g. Tremco, Inc.

2. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft. of joint at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

D. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than

25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming

materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required.

Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the

qualified testing agency for conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.























3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to

comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following

requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with

adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum

bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning

operation.


B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer

using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of

bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill

materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and

depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove

combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent

components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce

the following results:

1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to

achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.

3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish

to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible plastic labels. Attach labels

permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels are visible to

anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use self-adhering type labels with

adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in





combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is

attempted. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Joint Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management

of Any Damage."2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Designation of applicable testing agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and

inspections according to ASTM E 2393.

B. Where deficiencies are found or joint firestopping systems are damaged or removed due to

testing, repair or replace joint firestopping systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing joint firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection

reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.


A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system

manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint

firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If

damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or

deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-

resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to the alpha-alpha-numeric designations

listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN or Category XHDG.

JOINT

DESCRIPTION

UL

SYSTEM

NOMINAL

JOINT WIDTH

UL CLASSIFIED

SYSTEMS

ASSEMBLY

RATING

JOINT

MATERIAL

Floor to Floor FF-D As Indicated 0001-0999

1000-1999

2000-2999

3000-3999

4000-4999

2 Hours Latex Sealants

Silicone Sealants





Wall to Wall WW-D As Indicated 0001-0999

1000-1999

2000-2999

3000-3999

4000-4999


Silicone Sealants

Floor to Wall FW-D As Indicated 0001-0999

1000-1999

2000-2999

3000-3999

4000-4999


Silicone Sealants

Head of Wall HW-D As Indicated 0001-0999

1000-1999

2000-2999

3000-3999

4000-4999


Silicone Sealants

B. Where Intertek Group-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in Intertek

Group's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under product category Expansion/Seismic

Joints or Firestop Systems.

END OF SECTION

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1




SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.

3. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants.

4. Latex joint sealants.


1. Section 07 8443 "Joint Firestopping" for sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated

construction.

2. Section 07 9219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in sound-rated

construction.


A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers,

for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint

substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates,

shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.

5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data

that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for

adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those

submitted.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to

Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.





3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be

erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative

present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant

Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail

Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.

Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include

data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants

that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing

adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with

requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to

joint substrates during testing.



1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect

of scheduled meeting dates.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants

showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples

with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material

matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.






A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.

B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

C. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each

sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

E. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,

indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for

compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

F. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation

methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in

"Preconstruction Testing" Article.

G. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved

for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single

manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements

specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic

movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated

to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods

specified in this Section.






A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-

sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated.

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or

replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in

this Section within specified warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant

manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with

performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period - Silicones: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period - Urethanes: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from

the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design

or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's

written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as

demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.





B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for

each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920

classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have

not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match Architect's samples.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone; Medium-Modulus: Single-component, nonsag, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS.

b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikasil WS-295.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.

B. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.


a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus.

b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.

c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.

d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,

Class 25, for Use NT and T.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.

b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.

B. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25,

for Use NT and T.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2.

b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 2c NS.





c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227.

2.4 SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS

A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealant: ASTM C 1311.


a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300.

b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremco Butyl Sealant.

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,

Grade NF.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint

substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated

by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin),

and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum

sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to

promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.





C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-

sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and

approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint

sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing

optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning

operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.

b. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.


4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint

sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal.

b. Glass.

c. Porcelain enamel.

d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-

sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.





C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or

by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling

without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products

and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or

curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form

smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure

contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated.4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.






A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and

joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor

per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;

extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure

for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.

c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind

of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion

passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were

installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints

were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration,

and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures

used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new

sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.

Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other

requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated

requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of

products in which joints occur.





3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without

deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage

or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately

so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

TYPE POLYMER EXPOSURE

/TRAFFIC

COLOR USES/APPLICATIONS

Elastomeric Silicone:

Medium

Modulus

Exterior joints in

vertical surfaces and

non-traffic horizontal

surfaces

Selected by

Architect from

manufacturer's

full range

� Control and expansion joints in pre-

cast or cast-in-place concrete.

� Windows and between windows and

other materials.

� Joints between materials listed

above and frames of doors and

windows.

� Other joints as indicated.

Elastomeric One-part

Urethane or

Two-Part

Urethane

Interior moving joints

in vertical surfaces

and horizontal non-

traffic surfaces

Selected by

Architect from

manufacturer's

full range

� Control and expansion joints on

exposed interior surfaces of exterior

walls.

� Perimeter joints of framed wall

openings where indicated.� Joints between tops of

non-load-bearing, non-fire rated unit

masonry walls and underside of

structure above.

� Tile control joints (In non-wet are-

as).

� Perimeter joints between interior

wall surfaces and frames of interior

doors, windows, and elevator en-

trances.

Elastomeric Mildew-

Resistant

Silicone

Interior wet areas White � Perimeter of plumbing fixtures and

tile surfacing.

� Between tile backing board and

plumbing fixtures.

Elastomeric Two-Part

Urethane

Interior horizontal

traffic joints

Selected by

Architect from

manufacturer's

full range

� Paving and flooring control and

expansion joints

� Isolation joints in cast in place

concrete slabs.

� Joints in tile flooring, except in

interior wet areas.





TYPE POLYMER EXPOSURE

/TRAFFIC

COLOR USES/APPLICATIONS

Latex Acrylic

Latex

Sealants

Interior Manufacturer’s

standard painta-

ble

� Interior non-moving exposed seal-

ants in gypsum board construction

Solvent

Release

Sealants

Butyl Seal-

ant

Interior or Exterior

concealed joints

Manufacturer’s

standard

� Concealed sheet metal sealants

� Sealing thresholds.

END OF SECTION

ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 9219 - 1




SECTION 07 9219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical joint sealants.


1. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric, latex, and butyl-rubber-based joint

sealants for nonacoustical applications.


A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant.

B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required, provide

Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of

material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of acoustical joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace acoustical joint sealants that do

not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne

sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as

demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an


2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,

nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834.


a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; RCS20

Acoustical.

b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.

c. Serious Energy Inc.; Quiet Seal Pro.

d. United States Gypsum Company; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's

full range of colors.

B. Fire-Rated Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex

sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission

through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing

representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Hilti, Inc.; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant.

b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.

c. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.

d. United States Gypsum Company; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.


A. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and

sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming















joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum

adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants

to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant

manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining

surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or

by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling

without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more

stringent requirements apply.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings

and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants

at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919,

ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths

around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above

acoustical ceilings.

C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical

ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they

are installed.





D. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for

use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and

conditions indicated.

1. Seal perimeter of partitions as follows:

a. At partitions, provide continuous beads of acoustical sealant at junction of both faces

of runners or plates with floor and ceiling construction, and of gypsum board and

wherever it abuts dissimilar materials. Completely fill void between board and

concrete and/or other materials.

b. At ceilings, provided continuous beads of acoustical sealant wherever work abuts

dissimilar materials.

c. At control joints, provide continuous bead of sealant between edges of gypsum

boards. Seal prior to installation of surface-applied control joint accessories and

locate a proper depth in joint to allow for insertion of expansion portion of control

joint accessory.

d. Provide double seal at laminated (double layer) partition faces. Install face layer with

1/4 inch edge clearance at terminations of work, and install continuous bead of

acoustical sealant all around after each layer of gypsum board is installed.

2. At openings and cutouts, fill open spaces between edges of gypsum board and fixtures,

electrical and telephone outlets, cabinets, ducts and other flush or penetrating items, with

continuous bead of acoustical sealant.

3. Where partitions intersect walls or partitions extend sound-rated construction to completely

close sound flanking paths through non-rated construction. Seal joints between face layers

at vertical interior angles of intersecting partitions.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and

of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating

substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants

are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection,

damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated acoustical

joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original

work.

END OF SECTION




HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Interior and exterior steel doors and frames.


1. Section 08 "Door Hardware", “Flush Wood Doors, “Access Control”, “Glazing”

2. Section 26 “Electrical”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor

bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware, electrified door hardware, and

access control and security systems.





B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions,

fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.





3. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the

supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those

on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.


A. Product test reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests

performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Deliver hollow-metal doors and frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection

during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

B. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of

frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Store hollow-metal doors and frames vertically under cover at Project site

with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between

each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY.

2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.

3. Pioneer Industries.

4. Republic Doors and Frames.

5. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.


A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings

indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide assemblies with gaskets listed and

labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in











compliance with NFPA 105.

2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.

B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3; SDI A250.4, Level A.

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

c. Face: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.

e. Core: Manufacturer's standard.

f. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard core for fire-rated doors.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.

b. Sidelite Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame.

c. Construction: Full profile welded.

3. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.1 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3; SDI A250.4, Level B

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).

c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), with

minimum A40 (ZF120)coating.

d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.

e. Edge Bevel: Provide manufacturer's standard beveled or square edges.

f. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material

as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration.





g. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same

material as face sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to

permit moisture to escape.

h. Core: Manufacturer's standard thermal insulated core.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm),

with minimum A40 (ZF120)

b. Construction: Full profile welded

C. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3; SDI A250.4, Level B.

2.2 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame

standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames

with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches (610 mm) of

frame height above 7 feet (2.1 m).

3. Post installed Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with

expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.

B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.

C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with extension

clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at

top of underlayment.

D. Material: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill

phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M

or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,

Class B.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable

for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of

scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.





C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for

attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting

of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-

developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion

characteristics.

G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing.

FABRICATION

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 1 - Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling

and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections,

provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater

thickness as frames.

1. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,

fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs

by welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners


3. Provide Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door

silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

PRODUCT DATA SHEET 2 - Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to

receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising,

drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

2.1 Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

2.2 Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for hardware.

2.3 STEEL FINISHES

Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.





Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;

compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,

filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed

faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely

fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until

permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary

braces without damage to completed Work.

a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by

welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth,

flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.

2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.

3. Floor Anchors: Secure with post installed expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of post installed

expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

5. In-Place Concrete Construction: Secure frames in place with post installed expansion

anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on

exposed faces.

6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line

parallel to plane of wall.





c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on

parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

A. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances

specified below.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with SDI A250.8

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

B. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-

metal manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.





FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.

2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.

3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


1. Division 8 Sections: “Door Hardware”, “Hollow metal Doors and Frames”, “Access

Control”.

2. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

3. Retain subparagraphs below to cross-reference requirements Contractor might expect to

find in this Section but are specified in other Sections.


A. Product Data: For each type of door, include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;

construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.

2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.

4. Undercuts.

5. Requirements for veneer matching.

6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples: For verification:

1. Factory-finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for

each material and finish. For each wood species and finish, provide a west of three

samples showing typical range of color and grain expected in the finished work.

a. Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.






A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and

maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder

of construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

i. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.

ii. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

span.

B. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. See Editing Instruction

No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about named manufacturers and products. For an

explanation of options and Contractor's product selection procedures, see Section 016000

"Product Requirements."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS : Subject to Compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but not limited to the

following:

1. Eggers Industries.

2. Graham Wood Doors: ASSA ABOLY Group company

3. Masonite Architectural.

4. VT Industries Inc.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4&mf=04&src=wd





1.7 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's" Architectural

Woodwork Standards.

B. Fire rated Doors: Doors complying w with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified

testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure

according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C

1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating

indicated.

2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer

stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

C. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control,

based on testing according to UL 1784.

D. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate

through-bolting hardware.

E. Mineral-Core Doors:

1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced

quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved

for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting

hardware.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved

screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for

exposed edges.

1.8 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium with Grade A faces.

2. Species: Select birch.

3. Cut: Plain sliced.

4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match.

5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.

6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening

7. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive

planed before veneering.

1.9 LIGHT FRAMES

A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads






1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.

1.10 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads.

1.11 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of

referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

1.12 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,

including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,

before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be

omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish doors.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom.

2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 11,

catalyzed polyurethane.

3. Staining: Match Architect's sample.

PART 2 - 4. SHEEN – SATIN.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location,

and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.






PART 4 - INSTALLATION

PART 5 - A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."

PART 6 - B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and

referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

PART 7 - 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.

PART 8 - 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

PART 9 - C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

PART 10 - 3.3 ADJUSTING

PART 11 - A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

PART 12 - B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.

Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair

or refinishing.


ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3113 - 1




SECTION 08 3113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Recessed Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:


following:

a. Acudor Products, Inc.

b. Cendrex Inc.

c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

d. Nystrom, Inc.

2. Description: Door face recessed 5/8 inch for gypsum board infill; with concealed flange

for gypsum board installation and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.

4. Door Size: As required to access concealed equipment.

5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage, factory finished.

6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, key operated.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL ACCESS PANEL AND FRAMES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. STC-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Bauco Access Panel Solutions, Inc.; Bauco Plus II Architectural Access Panel.

2. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and exposed hinge and

integrated gypsum board.










3. Locations: Walls where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.4. Door Size: As indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

5. Frame Material: Extruded aluminum.

6. Panel Infill: For enhanced acoustical performance, provide the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; SilentFX QuickCut, Type X.

7. Accessories:

a. Latch: Manufacturer's standard key operated locking device. Tie into master key

system.

b. Gasketing: Manufacturer's standard, continuous EPDM gaskets.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel

sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for

installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials

with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam

marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish

mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to

types of supports indicated.

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum panels securely

attached to perimeter of frames.

D. Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.

Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. Provide access sleeves for each latch operator

and install in holes cut through finish.

E. Latch and Lock Hardware:

1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed.

2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.





2.5 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for

recommendations for applying and designating finishes.




C. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,

conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Factory Finished: Apply manufacturer's standard powder-coat finish immediately after

cleaning and pretreating, with minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat.

a. Color: Match adjacent surface color unless indicated otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.

END OF SECTION

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES 08 4213 - 1




SECTION 08 4213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Aluminum entrance doors.

1.2 ALLOWANCES

A. Field quality-control testing is part of testing and inspecting allowance.





B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, large scale

details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each type of vertical-to-horizontal intersection of

aluminum-framed entrances, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds.

b. Anchorage.c. Expansion provisions.

d. Glazing.e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor

barriers.4. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the following:

a. Power requirements for each electrically operated door hardware.

b. Location and types of switches, signal device, conduit sizes, and number and size

of wires.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard

sizes.





E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-

inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.3. Expansion provisions.

4. Glazing.5. Flashing and drainage.

F. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing

fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to

ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.



B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-

framed entrance.

C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances.

D. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and

approved by manufacturer.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed

entrances that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within


1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.





B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or

replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within


1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:


b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Basis-of-Design Product for Doors 100-3, 100-4, 101-2: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide EFCO Corporation Series D300. Standard Aluminum Entrance

Doors or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Oldcastle Building Envelope.

b. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.

c. YKK AP America Inc.

2. Basis-of-Design Product for Doors 100-1, 100-2, 101-1: Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide EFCO Corpo ra t ion The rmaS t i l e Se r i e s D302 Standard

Aluminum Entrance Doors or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Oldcastle Building Envelope.

b. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.

c. YKK AP America Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance, including framing

and accessories, from single manufacturer.


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of aluminum-framed entrances representing those indicated for this Project without

failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: The aluminum-framed entrance assemblies shall be designed, fabricated,

and installed to withstand the maximum inward and outward wind pressures as

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7-10.

C. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330/E 330M as follows:











1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, entrance doors do not

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, entrance

doors, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or

permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

D. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Entrance doors shall have U-factor of not more than

0.77 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall

have a SHGC of no greater than 0.40 as determined according to NFRC 200.3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall have an

NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according

to NFRC 500.

E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface

temperature changes.


2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or automatic

operation.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-thick,

extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with

reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate

concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: As indicated.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed

gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch thick and

reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 4-1/2 inches or as indicated on Drawings.

C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not

integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.





E. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.

c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.

d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement:

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.

c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

d. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying

with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and

pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in

SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 08 7100

"Door Hardware."

B. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in door and

frame schedule for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this Section.

C. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.

D. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed fasteners

on mounting strip.

E. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21 raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with

maximum height of 1/2 inch.

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 8000 "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black,

resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.

C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.





2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate

fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials

and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding

flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-

mil thickness per coat.

E. Rigid PVC Filler.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration

of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or

grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.

5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and

for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At interior and exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.





1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable

strip and mortised into door edge.2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest

extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying

finishes.

G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according toShop Drawings.


A. For All Doors:

1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with

AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.

Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and

resin manufacturers' written instructions.

a. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.





B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose

or installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in Section 07 9200

"Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."

F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather

stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware

according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed

fasteners to greatest extent possible.

3.3 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware:

1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and

removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.

END OF SECTION




STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS 084423 - 1

SECTION 084423 - STRUCTURAL-SEALANT-GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Field-glazed, two-sided structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall assemblies.

2. Factory-glazed, four-sided structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall assemblies.


1. 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications” for steel elements, for reinforcing and securing to abutting

construction in conjunction with curtain wall systems.

2. 07 21 00 “Thermal Insulation” for thermal insulation in conjunction with curtain wall

systems.

3. 07 90 00 “Joint Protection” for sealants in conjunction with curtain wall systems.

4. 08 71 00 “Door Hardware” for hardware in conjunction with curtain wall systems.

5. 08 80 00 “Glazing” for glass in conjunction with curtain wall systems.



1. Meet with Owner, Archtitect, testing and inspecting agency representatives, curtain wall

installer, and curtain wall manufacturer’s representative, and installers whose work

interfaces with or affects the curtainwall system.

2. Review methods and procedures related to curtain wall installation, including


3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's


4. Examine structural and attachment conditions for compliance with requirements.









B. Shop Drawings: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections,

full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining

moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of structural-

sealant-glazed curtain walls, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds.

b. Anchorage.

c. Expansion provisions.

d. Glazing.

e. Flashing and drainage.

3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor

barriers.

4. Provide shop drawings for mock up specific conditions.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard

sizes.

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-

inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds.

2. Anchorage.

3. Expansion provisions.

4. Glazing.

5. Flashing and drainage.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and field testing agency.

B. Energy Performance Certificates: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls, accessories, and

components from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each structural-

sealant-glazed curtain wall.

C. Product Test Reports: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls, for tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Quality-Control Program: Developed specifically for Project, including fabrication and

installation, according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401. Include periodic quality-control

reports.





E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls to include in maintenance

manuals.

B. Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls to include

in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for postinstallation-phase

quality-control program.




B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated

by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they

relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to

Architect for review.

D. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of curtain-

wall assemblies.

1.8 MOCKUPS

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.

2. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality

Control" Article.



in writing.







1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum

curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.

b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering.

d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.

e. Failure of operating components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by

testing of structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project

without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in

construction.

1. Structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure

including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and

deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

b. Glass breakage.

c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.

d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.

e. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to

glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite

or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1

mm), whichever is less.





2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm),

whichever is smaller.

3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:

a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4-inch

(6.35-mm) for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m) or 1/175 times span,

for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches (3.6 m).

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or

permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-

pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested

according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-

load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. (480 Pa).

G. Water Penetration under Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.2 as follows:

1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at

pressure of 30 – 35 psi.

2. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not include

water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained to exterior. Water

leakage contained on exposed interior surfaces is not acceptable.

H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:

1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor

of not more than 0.36 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain

coefficient of no greater than 0.38 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified

condensation resistance rating of no less than 45 as determined according to NFRC 500.

I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface

temperature changes:





1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material

surfaces.

J. Structural-Sealant Joints:

1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing.

2. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi (138 kPa).

K. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-

sealant-glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for

preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before

adhesive failure.

1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no

sealant material behind.

2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate

from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal

strength.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. EFCO Corporation.

2. Oldcastle, Inc.

3. Pittco Architectural Metals, Inc.

4. YKK AP America.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of curtain-wall system, including framing entrances

and accessories, from single manufacturer.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of

thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

1. Glazing System, typical: Retained with structural sealant on four sides

2. Glazing System, end conditions: Retained mechanically with gaskets on two sides and

structural sealant on two sides.

3. Finish: High-performance organic finish.

4. Fabrication Method: Either factory- or field-fabricated system.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

C. Materials:








1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish

indicated.

a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.

d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer

complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation

and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in

SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.

c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 ENTRANCES

A. Entrances: Comply with Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts."

2.5 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."

B. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is

compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and

tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in

curtain-wall assembly indicated.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors

C. Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O;

chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other

system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant,

weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall manufacturers for this use.

1. Color: Match structural sealant.

D. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.





1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of [1 inch (25.4 mm)] that

accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with

adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel

inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

C. Concealed Flashing: Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,

nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per

coat.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.

3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.

4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.

5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.

6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

C. Factory-Assembled Frame Units:

1. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

2. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure compatibility and adhesion.

3. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

4. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

5. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

D. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to

Shop Drawings.






A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with

AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat

and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with


1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Structural Sealant: Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401

recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures,

sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's

written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not

limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Do not install damaged components.

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.

6. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize

distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.

7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:





1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by

painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing

nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by

painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

D. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

1. Prepare surfaces that are in contact with structural sealant according to sealant

manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation

includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

E. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to

sealant manufacturer's written instructions, to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler

behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Erection Tolerances: Install structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls to comply with the following

maximum tolerances:

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m).

2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m).

3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to

1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch

(12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm)

wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch

(12.7 mm) over total length.


A. Testing Agency: BECxA will perform tests and inspections.

B. Test Area: Perform tests on one bay at least 30 feet (9.1 m), by one story.

C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of structural-

sealant-glazed curtain walls.





1. Pressure Test for Water Penetration of Curtain Walls: Before installation of interior

finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to

AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

a. Perform a minimum of four tests in areas as directed by Architect.

D. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in

ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab (Destructive)," Appendix X2.

1. Test a minimum of two areas on each building facade.

2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing.

E. Structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.





DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 – GENERAL




1.1 SUMMARY


1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

b. Other doors to the extent indicated.

2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.

3. Electrified door hardware.


1. Hardware Schedule

2. Division 8 Sections; “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, “Flush Wood Doors”, “Glazing”

3. Division 26 Electrical,

C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having

Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.

3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.

5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.

7. UL/ULC and CSA C22.2 – Standards for Automatic Door Operators Used on Fire and

Smoke Barrier Doors and Systems of Doors.

8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

D. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156Series

2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies


A. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements

in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s),

Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving,

handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to

instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of

their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware

(including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors.

Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and

physical product samples as required.





2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other

preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.

4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.

5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures

B. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section

"Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying

schedule document:1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.

2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.

3. Requirements for key control storage and software.

4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.

5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and

finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate

the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,

thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and

Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets

indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.

Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of

Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware

Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each doorhardware

item.b. Manufacturer of each item.

c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule.e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

f. Mounting locations for door hardware.

g. Door and frame sizes and materials.

h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible

date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede

fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include

Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and

other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring

diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access





control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and

field-installed wiring. Include the following:

a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and

interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in

the respective door openings.

b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams.

c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.

2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details

required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate

keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format.

Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and

special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of

permanent cylinders/cores.

E. Informational Submittals:

1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on

evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a

qualified independent testing agency.

F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance

manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as

required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.


A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of

documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this

Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard

and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this

Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service

performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors

with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and

electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that

indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the

manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity.

Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during

the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both

standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section

from a single source unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product

line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.

2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as

mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced

standards.





1.5 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified

in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions

of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace

components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are

not limited to, the following:1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.

2. Faulty operation of the hardware.

3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods:

1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches.

2. Five years for exit hardware.

3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.Five years for motorized electric

latch retraction exit devices.

4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Manufacturers and products listed in SpecAgent and Masterworks Paragraph Builder are neither

recommended nor endorsed by the AIA or ARCOM. Before inserting names, verify that

manufacturers and products listed there comply with requirements retained or revised in

descriptions and are both available and suitable for the intended applications. For definitions of

terms and requirements for Contractor's product selection, see Section 016000 "Product

Requirements."


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware

complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-

protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or

UL 10Retain "Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies" Paragraph below if required. The

International Building Code requires fire door assemblies to comply with smoke- and draft-

control requirements in corridors, smoke barriers, and smoke partitions.

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are

required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according

to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential

of 0.3-inch of water.





C. Electrical Hook-Up: Coordinate with Electrical and Security Contractors/Consultants. Hardware

supplier will provide: power supplies and hardware wiring as required to produce the intended

functions. Supplier is responsible to obtain and provide wiring diagrams to the hardware installer.

D. Power Supplies.

1. “Basis of Design:

a. Securitron Dual Voltage power supply BPS 24/7.

E. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do

not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.

F. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the

DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design"

2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware

Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other

distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at

the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each

door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers'

names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and

electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in

writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01,

Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and

their designated consultants.

2.4 HANGING DEVICES

A. General: Products shall meet or exceed requirements of the following types defined in ANSI

/BHMA standard A156.1. The following types of butt hinges shall be used for the types of doors

listed, except where otherwise specified

1. Interior Doors: Type A8111 (Wrought steel, forged steel or malleable iron, full mortise, ball

bearing, heavy weight) for doors. Out swinging corridor doors with lock sets shall have non-

removable pins.

a. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wooden

doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

b. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head all-purpose or machine screws for installation of units,

except provide Phillips flat-head all-purpose or wood screws for installation of units into

wood. Use threaded-to-the-head type screws for installation onto fire rated wood doors.

Finish screw heads shall match surface of hinges, butts or pivots.

c. Finish:

1) Non-rated Doors: BHMA 652, Satin Chromium Plated Steel

2) Fire-rated Doors: BHMA 652, Satin Chromium Plated Steel

3) Exterior Doors: BHMA 630, Satin Stainless Steel

d. Sizing Hinges:

1) Height of Hinge:

a) Door 36 inch (914.4 mm) Wide or Less: 4-1/2 inch (114.3 mm) tall hinge.





b) Door over 36 inch (914.4 mm) to 48 inch (1219.2 mm) Wide: 5 inch (127 mm)

high hinge.

c) Door over 48 inch (1219.2 mm) wide: 6 inch (152.4 mm) high hinge.

2) Width of Hinge:

a) Hinge up to 5 inch (127 mm) High: 4-1/2 inch (114.3 mm) wide hinge.

b) Hinge over 5 inch (127 mm) High: 5 inch (127 mm) wide hinge.

3) Hinge Weight:

a) Non-rated Doors: Standard weight.

b) Fire-rated Doors up to 96 inch: Standard weight.

c) Fire-rated Doors over 96 inch: Heavy weight.

4) Number of Hinges:

a) Doors 60 inch (1524 mm) High or Less: 2 hinges

b) Doors over 60 inch (1524 mm) not over 90 inch (2286 mm): 3 hinges

c) One (1) additional hinge for each 30 inch (762 mm) over 90 inch (2286 mm).

e. Hinge Designation:

1) Five (5) knuckle.

2) Pin: Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into

a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-

swinging lockable doors

3) Button tip.

4) Full Mortise Butt Type – Ball Bearing :

f. Standard weight and Heavy weight:

1) Finish: BHMA #652 (Satin chromium plated steel) – 26D”

a) Hager “BB1279 - 26D”

b) McKinney “TA - 2714 - 26D”

2) Finish: BHMA #630 (Satin stainless steel).

a) Hager “BB1191 - 32D”

b) McKinney “TA - 2314 - 32D”

g. Heavy weight:

1) Finish: BHMA #652 (Satin chromium plated steel)

a) Hager “BB1168 - 26D”

b) McKinney “T4A - 3786 - 26D”

2) Finish: BHMA #630 (Satin stainless steel) – 32D”

h. Standard weight:


a) Hager “BB1279 x ETW - 26D”

b) Ives “5BB1 x TW – 26D

c) McKinney “TA - 2714 x CC - 26D”

d) Stanley “CE - FBB179 -26D”

i. Heavy weight:


a) Bommer “BB5064ETW – 26D”

b) Hager “BB1168 x ETW - 26D”

c) Ives “5BB1HW x TW – 26D

d) McKinney “T4A - 3786 x CC - 26D”

e) Stanley “CE - FBB168 - 26D”

B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 certified continuous geared

hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6060 T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a





minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template

screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cutouts.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories(MK).

b. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories(PE)

2.5 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES

A. Electrified Quick Connect Continuous Geared Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer

continuous geared hinges with a 12" removable service panel cutout accessible without de-

mounting door from the frame. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors with

sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified

in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for

connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not

acceptable.


a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - SER-QC (#

wires) Option.

b. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE) - SER-QC (#

wires) Option.

B. Electric Door Wire Harnesses: Provide electric/data transfer wiring harnesses with standardized

plug connectors to accommodate up to twelve (12) wires. Connectors plug directly to through-

door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide

sufficient number and type of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified

hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to

junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length

required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size and construction,

minimum of two per electrified opening.

1. Provide one each of the following tools as part of the base bid contract:

a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - Electrical

Connecting Kit: QC-R001.

b. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - Connector

Hand Tool: QC-R003.


a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - QC-C

Series.

2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational

Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be

field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body

1. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

2. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire

doors, and as follows:

a. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw.

b. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.

3. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

B. Lock Trim:





1) Description: As designated:

2) Levers: Forged.

a) Basis of Design; Sargent J Lever.

3) Escutcheons (Roses): Forged

a) Basis of Design: Sargent LN Rose

4) Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

C. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with

requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to

protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.

3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum

framing

4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.

5. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1 stamped steel case with steel or brass

parts; Series 1000.

D. Lock Function: As indicated in door hardware schedule (Part 3)

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) – ML2000 Series.

2. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – 8200 Series.

3. Schlage (SC) – L9000 Series

2.7 AUXILIARY LOCKS

1. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.

2. Narrow Stile Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.36; Grade 1; with strike that suits frame.

2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES

A. Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty, cylindrical and mortise lock electric strikes conforming to

ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire rated

door assemblies. Stainless steel construction with dual interlocking plunger design tested to

exceed 3000 lbs. of static strength and 350 ft-lbs. of dynamic strength. Strikes tested for a

minimum 1 million operating cycles. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied

standard as fail-secure unless otherwise specified. Option available for latch bolt and latch bolt

strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latch bolt and locked condition of the strike.


a. Folger Adam EDC (FO).

b. HES (HS).

c. Von Duprin (VD).

2.9 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS

A. Electromechanical Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): Subject to same compliance

standards and requirements as mechanical mortise locksets, electrified locksets to be of type and

design as specified below.

1. Electrified Lock Options: Where indicated in the Hardware Sets, provide electrified options

including: outside door lock/unlock trim control, latch bolt and lock/unlock status monitoring,





deadbolt monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling. Support end-of-line resistors contained

within the lock case. Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrified locksets standard as fail

secure.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ML20900 Series.

b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 8200 Series.

c. Schlage (SC) - L9000 EL/EU/RX Series].

2.10 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following

criteria:

1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and

labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by

manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80

and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper

fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and

template book for specific requirements.

3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the push

bar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices

where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of

the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends

behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5. Electromechanical Options: Subject to same compliance standards and requirements as

mechanical exit devices, electrified devices to be of type and design as specified in hardware

sets. Include any specific controllers when conventional power supplies arenot sufficient to

provide the proper inrush current.

6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy

duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match

that of the specified locksets.

b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rimor Mortise) as

specified in Hardware Sets.

7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at

interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust

proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor.

8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in

Hardware Sets, provide devices designed for maximum 2” wide stiles.

9. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.

10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.

11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified

panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets.

Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pull man type, with deadlock feature.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series.






c. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 XP Series.

2.11 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS

a. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch throw; designed for mortising

into door edge.

2.12 AUTOMATIC AND SELF-LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS

a. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch throw;

designed for mortising into door edge. Include wear plates.

2.13 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer (Best) to have minimum (10) years of experience designing

secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source

manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.

2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim

ring.

3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.

4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush

and be free spinning with matching finishes.

5. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard.

D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the

following:

E. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other

manufacturers' cylinders.

2.14 KEYING

A. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.

1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions

and requirements.

2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual

3. Key control number as directed by Owner.

4. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.

B. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2)

2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5).

3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).

C. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.

D. Key Registration List (Bitting List):

1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into

key control software.

2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.





E. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with

self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent

markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150%

of the number of locks required for the project.


a. Lund Equipment (LU).

b. MMF Industries (MM).

c. Telkee (TK).

2. Key Control Software: Provide one network version of "Key Wizard" branded key

management software package that includes one year of technical support and upgrades

to software at no charge. Provide factory key system formatted for importing into “Key

Wizard” software.

2.15 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS

a. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf

release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in,

adjustable safety release and with internal override.

b. Carry-Open Bars: BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the

active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for inactive

leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.

c. Astragals: BHMA A156.22.

2.16 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the

same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to

be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside

of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed

for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and

verified by UL

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door

closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.

Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped,

provide units complying with ANSIICC/A117.1.

5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in

Hardware Sets.

6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install

closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special

mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide

through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted,

heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully

operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be

rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable





back check and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide

non-handed units standard.


a. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040 Series.


c. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 7500 Series.

C. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and

latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions

for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency

of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for

opening force.

2.17 CLOSER HOLDER RELEASE DEVICES

A. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15; Grade 1; closer connected with separate or

integral releasing and fire- or smoke-detecting devices. Door shall become self-closing on

interruption of signal to release device. Automatic release is activated by smoke detection system.

2.18 ELECTROMAGNETIC STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15, Grade 1; wall-mounted electromagnetic single

unit with strike plate attached to swinging door; coordinated with fire detectors and interface with

fire-alarm system for labeled fire-rated door assemblies.

2.19 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware

Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall

bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated,

unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor

stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide

overhead type stops and holders.


a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).

b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories(RO).

c. Trimco (TC).

C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and

holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and

jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy

tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper

operation and function.


a. Glynn Johnson (GJ).

b. Rixson Door Controls (RF)





c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA

2.20 DOOR GASKETING

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified

below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and

provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior

applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control

ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL1784.

1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a

testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings

indicated, based on testing according toUL-10C.

1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire

Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door

Assemblies.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency,

for sound ratings indicated.

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily

replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. National Guard Products (NG).

2. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE).

3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

2.21 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.

2.22 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim

1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the

Hardware Sets.

2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width

(LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more

than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as

required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the

bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog

and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.

4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop),

fabricated from the following:

a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inchthick.

B. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the

Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers:





a. Hiawatha, Inc. (HI).

b. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories(RO).

c. Trimco (TC)

2.23 AUXILIARY ELECTRIFIED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Push-Button Switches: Industrial grade momentary or alternate contact, back-lighted push buttons

with stainless-steel switch enclosures. 12/24 VDC bi-color illumination suitable for either flush or

surface mounting.


a. Security Door Controls (SD) - 400 Series.

b. Securitron (SU) - PB Series.

B. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for

use in commercial door applications. On recessed models the contact and magnetic housing snap-

lock into a 1" diameter hole. Surface mounted models include wide gap distance design complete

with armored flex cabling. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet

installation on steel doors with flush topchannels.


a. Security Door Controls (SD) - DPS Series.

b. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series.

C. Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC

(field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with

integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage

failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed

the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment.


a. Security Door Controls (SD) - 630 Series.

b. Securitron (SU) - BPS Series.

D. Auxiliary Electrified Door Hardware:

1. Exit Device Rim electric retract latch

a. Basis of Design: Sargent 19 55 56 8804 ETJ

2. Exit Device vertical rod electric retract

a. Basis of Design “Sargent 19 55 56 AD8410 X 862 US 32D”

3. Mortise electric lock

a. Basis of Design: “Sargent RX271 LNJ”

2.24 ELECTROHYDRAULIC DOOROPERATORS

A. General: Provide low energy operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size,

weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for compliance with UL 325. Coordinate

operator mechanisms with door operation, hinges, and activation devices.

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Provide door operators for fire-rated door assemblies that comply with

NFPA 80 for fire-rated door components and are listed and labeled by a qualified testing

agency.

B. Standard: Certified ANSI/BHMA A156.19.

C. Performance Requirements:

1. Opening Force if Power Fails: Not more than 15 lbf required to release a latch if provided, not

more than 30 lbf required to manually set door in motion, and not more than 15 lbf required

to fully open door.





2. Entrapment Protection: Not more than 15 lbf required to prevent stopped door from closing or

opening.

D. Configuration: Surface mounted or in-ground as required. Door operators to control single

swinging and pair of swinging doors.

E. Operation: Power opening and spring closing operation capable of meeting ANSI A117.1

accessibility guideline. Provide time delay for door to remain open before initiating closing cycle

as required by ANSI/BHMA A156.19. When not in automatic mode, door operator to function as

manual door closer with fully adjustable opening and closing forces, with or without electrical

power.

F. Features: Operator units to have full feature adjustments for door opening and closing force and

speed, back check, motor assist acceleration from 0 to 30 seconds, time delay, vestibule interface

delay, obstruction recycle, and hold open time from 0 up to 30seconds.

G. Provide outputs and relays on board the operator to allow for coordination of exit device latch

retraction, electric strikes, magnetic locks, card readers, safety and motion sensors and specified

auxiliary contacts.

H. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard, fabricated from aluminum with

nonferrous shims for aligning system components. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to

compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Dorma Products (DO) – ED900 Series.

2. LCN Closers (LC) – 9100 Series.

3. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 5700 LEO Series

2.25 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless

otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. If retaining second option in "Mounting Heights" Paragraph above, retain subparagraphs

below and revise to suit Project.

2. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

3. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.

4. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush

Doors."

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface

protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have

been completed on substrates involved.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the

number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches

of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door,

such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.





D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots

in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot

per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches of door height greater

than 90 inches.

E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction

period.

F. Retain one of two subparagraphs below.

G. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner.

H. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

I. Key Control Cabinet: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system

cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

J. Retain "Boxed Power Supplies" Paragraph below if electrified door hardware is required. Verify,

with authorities having jurisdiction, acceptable location for power supplies.

K. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible

ceilings. Verify location with Architect.

1) Configuration: Provide a power supply for each hardware device requiring one,

provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with

electrified door hardware.If thresholds on doors other than exterior doors are set in

full bed of sealant, indicate locations in door hardware schedule or on Drawings or

revise “Thresholds” Paragraph below.

2) Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of

sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint

SealantsRetain “Stops” Paragraph below for default specification of floor stops at

every door. Where floor or wall stops are inappropriate, use overhead holders.

Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door

hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.

3) Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware.

Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.

Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation

or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust

door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and

to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. The hardware schedule represents the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They

are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies,

conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with

corrections made prior to the bidding process. The contractor is responsible for coordination

between the architectural drawings and the hardware set. Omitted items not included in a

hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper

application and functionality.

DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE:





AC3: Single Electrically controlled lock Card Reader

Hinges

Electric hinge

Fail Secure Mortise Electric Lock

Power Door Opener

Coordinator position switch

Kick plate

Door stop

Card reader

Kick plate

Electric Hook-up

Sequence of Operation

Door normally locked, upon Entry authorization by card reader will activate outside door

switch. Activation shall retract latch. Egress is allowed at all times. Inside door switch always

active, upon activation of inside button latch releases latch and opener opens door. Upon loss of

power, door remains locked (Fail secure).

AC4: Rim Exit Device, Power Opener Card Reader

Electric Hinge

Exit Devices- electric latch retract

Power Opener Closer

2 Coordinator position switches

Card reader

Door buttons both sides

Electric Hook-up

Sequence of operation

Operation electrically controlled

Door normally closed and locked. Outside switch inactive. Entry authorization by card reader

or key or time signal from security system to and activate outside door switch. Activation shall

retract latch. Egress is allowed at all times. Inside door switch always active, upon activation

of inside button latch retracts and opener opens door. Upon loss of power, door remains locked

(Fail secure). Door to be tied to fire alarm system if alarm is activated door is fail safe.

E1: Exam Room Passage, Non-Rated

Hinges

Latch set

Door Stop

Smoke seal

Kick plate

Coat hook

E2: Exam: Room-Rated

Hinges





Closer

Latch set

Door Stop

Smoke seal

Kick plate

Coat hook

E3: Exam Room Card Reader

Hinges

Power Opener Closer

Lockset Storeroom function

Electric strike

Card Reader

Door stop

Kick plate

Coat Hook

Electric Hook-up


Door normally locked, upon Entry authorization by card reader will activate outside door

switch. Activation shall retract latch. Egress is allowed at all times. Inside door switch always

active, upon activation of inside button latch releases latch and opener opens door. Upon loss of

power, door remains locked (Fail secure).

M1: Classroom Non-Rated

Hinges

Closer

Lockset Classroom Function

Door stop

Kickplate

M2: Exit Device Non-Rated

Hinges

Closer

Exit Device Passage Function

Doorstop

Kickplate

O1: Office Lockset, Non-Rated

Hinges

Lockset Office Function

Door Stop

kickplate

Coat Hook

Kick plate

O2: Office Lockset, Rated

Hinges

Closer





Lockset Office Function

Door Stop

Kick plate

O3: Classroom Lockset, Rated

Hinges

Closer (Provide stop Arm as needed

Lockset Classroom Function

Door Stop (stop arm on closer where needed)

Kick plate

S1: Storeroom Non-Rated

Hinges

Lockset Store room Function

Door Stop

Kick plate

S2: Storeroom Rated

Hinges

Closer


Door Stop

Kick plate

S3: Storeroom Card Reader-Rated

Hinges

Closer

Electric Strike

Card reader

Electric Hook-up



Door normally closed and locked. Entry authorization by key or card reader activate electric

strike. Activation shall unlock the outside lever handle. Egress is allowed at all times. Inside

door switch always active upon loss of power, latch remains locked (Fail secure)

S4: Storeroom Rated Card Reader Isolation

Hinges

Closer

Lockset Store room function

Electric strike

Door stop

Kick plate

Smoke seal

Automatic door bottom

Card reader

Electric Hook-up







Door normally closed and locked. Entry authorization by key or card reader to activate electric

strike. Egress is allowed at all times. Upon loss of power, latch remains locked (Fail secure)

S5: Double Storeroom- Rated

Hinges

2Closers (w stop arms)


Automatic flush bolts

Coordinator

Dust proof strike

2 Kick plates

T1: Toilet room Non- Rated

Hinges

Closer

Lockset Privacy function

Door stop

Kick plate

Mop plate

Coat hook

T2 Toilet room Push pull Non- Rated

Hinges

Closer

Push plate

Door Pull

Door stop

Kick plate

Mop plate

Sequence of operation electrically controlled; Door normally closed and locked. Entry

authorization by card reader key or push button. Activation shall retract the latch then allow

auto opener to cycle. Egress is allowed at all times. Upon loss of power lock remains locked

(Fail secure

X1: Exterior Double Exit Device, Power Opener Card Reader

Continuous Hinges

Electric Hinges

2 Exit Devices- Concealed vertical rod electric retract

2 Power Opener Closer

2Coordinator position switches

Set Weather stripping

Threshold

Card reader

Door buttons

Electric Hook-up







Door normally closed and locked. Outside switch inactive. Entry authorization by card reader

or key or time signal from security system to and activate outside door switch. Activation shall

retract vertical rods. Egress is allowed at all times. Inside door switch always active. Upon

loss of power, door remains locked (Fail secure)

X2 Exterior Double Exit Device

Continuous Hinges

2 Exit Devices- Concealed vertical rod(night latch)

2 Closers (w stop arms

Weather striping

Threshold

X3 Double Vestibule Exit Device, Power Opener

Continuous Hinges

2 Power Opener Closers

2 Push Pull units

Door buttons

Electric Hook-up



Door normally closed and latched. Outside switch active. Door open by switch or sequenced

with exterior door egress is allowed at all times. Inside door switch always active. Upon loss

of power, door remains locked (Fail secure)

X4 Double Vestibule Exit Device, Power Opener

Continuous Hinges

Electric Hinges

2 Exit Devices- Concealed vertical rod



Electric Hook-up

X5 Single Vestibule Exit Device,

Continuous Hinges

Rim Exit Device (classroom)

X6: Single Exterior Exit Device Card Reader

Continuous Hinges

Electric Hinge

Rim Exit Device- electric retract (night latch)

Door Closer

Overhead Stop (surface)

Kick plate

Threshold

Door sweep

Drip cap





Weather stripping

Card reader

Electric Hook-up



Door normally closed and locked. Entry authorization by key or card reader .


Activation shall retract the latch. Egress is allowed at all times. Upon loss of power, lock

remains locked (Fail secure)

END OF SECTION




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1

SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Glass for windows, doors, interior borrowed lites, storefront framing, glazed curtain walls

2. Glazing sealants and accessories.


1. Section 05 73 13 "Glazed Decorative Metal Railings" for glazing in railings.

2. Section 08 88 13 “Fire-Resistant Glazing” for glazing that is fire-resistant.

3. Section 084423 “ Structural Sealant-Glazed Curtainwalls

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and

face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.



1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's


2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2



B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square.

1. Coated glass.

2. Laminated glass.

3. Insulating glass.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants and colored spacers, in 12-inch (300-mm)

lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the

adjoining framing system.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and

design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer

responsible for their preparation.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated,

low-E coatings, glass testing agency, and sealant testing agency.

B. Product Certificates: For glass.

C. Product Test Reports: For coated glass, insulating glass, and glazing sealants, for tests

performed by a qualified testing agency.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations

within previous 36-month period.

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings:

A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited

according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3

D. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for

materials and execution.

1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Section 084423 "Structural Sealant Glazed

Aluminum Curtain Walls" to match glazing systems required for Project, including

glazing methods.




A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or

other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to

avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when

glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace

coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated

glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or

to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects

include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of

laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass

breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written

instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision

through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.





GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace

insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of

insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to

glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written

instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior

surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. AGC Glass North America

2. Guardian Glass

3. Oldcastle Building Envelope™.

4. Pilkington North America

5. Viracon, Inc.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each

glass type.

1. Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain reflective-coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single

manufacturer for each product and installation method.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and

impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to

the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to

remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in

construction.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00

"Quality Requirements," to design glazing.

C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and

under conditions indicated determined according to the CBC and ASTM E 1300.

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at thinnest part

of the glass.







GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5

3. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15

degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001.

4. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass

deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/100 times the short-side length or 1

inch (25 mm), whichever is less.

D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with

16 CFR 1201, Category II.

E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated

below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.

3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite.

4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers

and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these

publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and

AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."

3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped

Glazing."

4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with

certification label of the SGCC. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,

thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one

component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IgCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with

performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-

strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass. Where heat-strengthened float glass is




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6

indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass. Where fully

tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated)

unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I,

Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as

indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

D. Ceramic-Coated Vision Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2

(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3; and complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's

"Engineering Standards Manual."

E. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Condition B, Quality-Q3.

2.5 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to

bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer


2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to

comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a

dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary

sealants.

2. Spacer: Aluminum with black, color anodic finish.

3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,

including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates,

under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer

based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at

time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.

2.8 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric

tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer

rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and

complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous

pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive

on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for

application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in

installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or

minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side

walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and

density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant

performance.

2.10 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face

clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product

manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance

requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on

glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges

with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the

following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and

offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.

Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so

that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible

marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in

referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from

Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge

damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or

impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by

preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and

glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances

and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to

sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed

thickness of tape.

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to

requirements in referenced glazing publications.

H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket

on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is

subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by

gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with

sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 10

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to

make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover

horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.

Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and

installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners

and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without

developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket

manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and

press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-

glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to

produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with

sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.




GLAZING 08 80 00 - 11

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass

lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding

into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and

backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance

for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond

of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry

surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of

dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,

remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for

inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in

writing by glass manufacturer.

3.8 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass

1. Minimum Thickness: ½” or 3/8” as indicated in drawings.

2. Safety glazing required.

3.9 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type : Clear laminated glass with two plies of heat-strengthened float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 6 mm.

2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch (0.76 mm).





GLAZING 08 80 00 - 12

3.10 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type [GL-1] (Typical vision glass at narrow openings): Low-E-coated, clear insulating

glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm.

3. Outdoor Lite: Heat treated, where required.

4. Interspace Content: Air.

5. Indoor Lite: Heat treated, where required.

6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.

7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum.

8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum.

9. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum.

10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38 maximum.

B. Glass Type [GL-3] (Fitted translucent glass at narrow openings): Ceramic-coated, low-E,

insulating glass.

1. Ceramic Coating Color and Pattern: Vertical line pattern, high opacity white, ¼” lines,

1/4” spaces, 50% coverage. Basis of Design: Viracon High Opacity White V175 in

pattern “Screen 2050.”



4. Outdoor Lite: Heat treated where required.


6. Indoor Lite: fully tempered float glass.

7. Low-E Coating: Pyrolitic on second surface.

8. Ceramic Coating Location: second and third surfaces.

a. Second surface: Vertical line pattern, high opacity white, ¼” lines, ¼” spaces, 50%

coverage, Basis of Design: Viracon High Opacity White V175 in pattern “Screen

2050”

b. Third surface: Silk screened translucent frit. Basis of Design: Viracon Simulated

Sandblast V1086.

9. Insert performance properties, if required, in "Winter Nighttime U-Factor," "Summer

Daytime U-Factor," "Visible Light Transmittance," and "Solar Heat Gain Coefficient"

subparagraphs below to suit product(s).






C. Glass Type [GL-4] (Typical spandrel): Insulating Coated Silk-Screened Glass.

1. Ceramic coating color and pattern: Vertical line pattern, high opacity white, on Surface

#2 (Basis of design Viracon High Opacity White V175 in pattern “Screen 2050.”.

2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm)


4. Outdoor Lite: Heat treated where required.





GLAZING 08 80 00 - 13

6. Indoor Lite: fully tempered flat glass.

7. Low-E Coating: Pyrolitic on second surface

8. Ceramic Coating Location: second and fourth surface.

a. Second surface: Vertical line pattern, high opacity white, 1/4” lines, 1/4” spaces,

50% coverage. Basis of Design: Viracon High Opacity White V175 in pattern

“Screen 2050.”

b. Fourth surface: Silk-screened opaque coating. Basis of design: Viracon Medium

Gray V933.



D. Glass Type [GL-5] (Typical vision glass at large openings): Low-E-coated, clear insulating

glass.



3. Outdoor Lite: Heat treated, where required.


5. Indoor Lite: Heat treated, where required.

6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.





11. Relative heat gain: 61

12. Shading coefficient: 0.43






FIXED ALUMINUM LOUVERS 08 9120 -1

SECTION 08 91 20 - FIXED ALUMINUM LOUVERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Fixed metal wall louvers.

a. Sightproof horizontal.

2. Screen:

a. Bird screen.

3. Blank-off panels.

B. Related Sections: Requirements that relate to this section are included but not limited to the

sections below.

1. Division 1 “General Requirements”.

2. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrication” for miscellaneous support.

3. Division 7 Section “Joint Protection” for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver

frames and adjoining construction.

4. Division 8 Section “Structural-Sealant Glazed Curtain Walls” for coordination with

installation with curtain wall system.

5. Division 8 Section "Environmental Performance Requirements and Testing" for performance

requirements.

6. Division-23 for ductwork connected to metal wall louvers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Refer to AMCA Publication 501 for definitions of terms for metal louvers

not otherwise defined in this section or referenced standards.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements:

1. Design, engineer, fabricate, and install exterior metal wall louvers to withstand the effects of

loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement, without evidencing permanent

deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal

fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; and permanent damage to fasteners and

anchors.

2. Standard: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for

fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Refer to Division 8 Section “Environmental Performance Requirements and Testing” for

uniform pressure loads and thermal movement requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS





A. General: Submit in compliance with Division 1 Section “Submittal Procedures”.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit for action. Describe the properties of items to be used in the Work.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit for action. Show fabrication and installation of the Work. Include the

following.

1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details showing profiles, angles, spacing of louver blades; unit

dimensions related to wall openings and construction; free areas for each size indicated; and

profiles of frames at jambs, heads and sills.

2. Design Requirements: Include structural computations, material properties, and other

information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by the structural

engineer who was responsible for their preparation.

a. Submittal will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the contract

documents. The Architect will not apply action stamp and will return calculation data and

comments if any for information only.

3. Calculations and shop drawings to be submitted simultaneously.

D. Samples:

1. Verification: Submit for action. Furnish materials to be used with labels indicating colors,

finish characteristics, and locations of the Work. Samples will be reviewed for color and

appearance only. Furnish the following.

a. Extrusions: 12 inch (304.8 mm) long in range of finish selected.

b. Sheet or Plate: 6 inch (152.4 mm) square in range of finish selected.

E. Quality Assurance: Submit the following for information:

1. Certificates:

a. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with

requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article.

b. Storm resistant louver certificate signed by testing agency certifying that louvers comply

with “Louver Effectiveness Ratio” requirements in this section.

F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following to the Owner.

1. Record documents.


A. Qualifications:

1. Contractor: Contractor is responsible for quality control of the Work.

2. Manufacturer: A firm experienced in successfully producing work similar to that indicated

for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient

production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.

3. Installer: An installer trained in the use of the materials and equipment to be employed in the

Work.

4. Welders: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.2.

5. Engineer: A licensed structural engineer qualified to practice in jurisdiction where project is

located. Experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated which has

resulted in the successful installation of assemblies similar in material, design, and extent to

that indicated for this Project.

a. Licensed in the State of Minnesota.





B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all applicable requirements of the laws, codes,

ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain

necessary approvals from all such authorities.

C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain work from a single manufacturer.

D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Contractor to conduct meetings at site with installer prior to start of

Work. Familiarize installer with conditions at site and related Work.


A. General: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original packaging with label indicating pertinent

information identifying the item. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

in a protected dry location off ground. Do not open packaging nor remove labels until time of

installation.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: Field measure at location of the Work prior to preparation of the shop

drawings. Include measurements of adjacent construction to which the Work must fit. Coordinate

construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to fabricated dimensions of the

Work.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions

and proceed with fabrication of products without field measurements. Coordinate

construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum:

1. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the producer or finisher

for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability

properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5.

2. Aluminum Sheets: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the producer or finisher for

type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties

specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005-H34.

B. Miscellaneous:

1. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do

not use metals which are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.

a. Use types, gages, and lengths to suit unit installation conditions.

b. Use Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for type of loading and installation

indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior

installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or

expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.





3. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12

requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762 mm) thickness per

coat.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Fabricate louvers and vents to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,

materials, joinery, and performance.

2. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head

and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

3. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of size indicated with allowances

made for fabrication and installation tolerances of louvers, adjoining construction, and

perimeter sealant joints.

4. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

5. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacing indicated but not further apart than

recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inch (1.828.8 mm) on center, whichever is less.

6. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers, where indicated, or

required for drainage to exterior and to prevent water penetrating to interior.

7. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades as follows, unless otherwise

indicated, or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members

necessary:

a. With fillet welds, concealed from view.

B. Sightproof Drainable Horizontal Fixed Blade Louvers: Extruded aluminum frames and louver

blades; designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in blades and of

channels in jambs and mullions.

1. Continuous Blades:

a. Louver Depth: 5 inch (127 mm).

b. Frame Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.057 mm), unless otherwise indicated or required by

design requirements.

c. Blade Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.057 mm), unless otherwise indicated or required by

design requirements.

d. Blade Angle: 19 degrees.

e. Free Area: Minimum of 8.82 sq. ft. per 16 sq. ft. louver sample. (55.125 %)

f. Blade Corners: Mitered.

g. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following.

1) Airolite Co. “CB 605D"

2) C/S Construction Specialties, Ltd. “RS-5300"

C. Finish:

1. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations and

designations of finishes.

2. Aluminum:

a. High Performance Organic Coating - Fluorocarbon (PVDF): AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical

Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating,

acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as specified below)

Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and

resin manufacturer's instructions.





1) 2-Coat Fluorocarbon Coating System (primer, color): Manufacturer's standard 2-coat

thermo-cured system, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and

fluorocarbon color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinyldene resin by

weight; complying with AAMA 2605.

2) Color and Gloss: Custom color to match Architect’s sample.


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Examine and correct conditions of area to receive the Work prior

to installation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate and Furnish: Anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and

directions for installation of items having integral anchors embedded in concrete or masonry

construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions, submittals,

applicable industry standards, and governing regulatory requirements for the Work.

2. Locate and place louver units plumb, level, and in proper alignment with adjacent work.

3. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws

where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

4. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

5. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as

indicated.

6. Protect galvanized and nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by

application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces which will be in contact with

concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.

7. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation

progresses where required to make louver joints weathertight. Comply with Division 7

Section "Joint Sealers" for sealants applied during installation of louver.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction period, so that no evidence remains

of correction work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by Architect, remove

damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Clean and touch-up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and

gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.

3.5 CLEANING





A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents, which are not protected by temporary

covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period; do not let soil accumulate

until final cleaning.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and with a mild soap or detergent not

harmful to finishes. Rinse thoroughly and dry surface.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect the Work so it will not deteriorate or be damaged. Remove protection at time of

Substantial Completion





NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.

2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.

3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

B. Evaluation reports for embossed steel studs and tracks, firestop tracks, post-installed anchors,

and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to



A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing

members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud

Association, the Steel Framing Industry Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers

Association.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified

according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.





2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless


2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A

653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

3. Metal Stud thickness shall be based on delegated design; refer to Architectural Drawings

for more information. All metal thicknesses listed below are minimum thickness

required.

B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and tracks or embossed steel studs and

tracks.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

b. MarinoWARE.

c. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.

d. Steel Network, Inc. (The).

2. Steel Studs and Tracks:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness:

1) Typical: 0.0179 inch.

2) Partitions Supporting Wall Mounted Casework: 0.0329 inch.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations

to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally equivalent to conventional

ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness:

1) Typical: 0.0147 inch.

2) Partitions Supporting Wall Mounted Casework: 0.0220 inch.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a

positive attachment of studs to tracks while allowing 1-1/2-inch minimum vertical

movement.

2. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C 645 top track with 2-inch-deep flanges in

thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track

and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide

lateral bracing.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with

movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated;

in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.





F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with

minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches or as indicated.

2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.


2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Metal Stud thickness shall be based on delegated design; refer to Architectural Drawings for

more information. All metal thicknesses listed below are minimum thickness required.

B. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire,

or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal

thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-

wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

3. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0147 inch.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.


F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system

composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.


following:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

b. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

c. USG Corporation.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.





1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:

1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener

penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

PART 4 - EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,

cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely

fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,

grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

4.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements


2. Multilayer Application: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements


3. Tile Backing Panels: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements


B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.





C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports

or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at

suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install

track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to

match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated

assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to

underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-

rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along

arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6

inches o.c.

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than

1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

4.4 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by

building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.





a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, counter splaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension

system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of

trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,

and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.

5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms.

6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems

meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other

and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet

measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between

parallel members that will receive finishes.





GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Tile backing panels.


1. 1. Section 09 2216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and

suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.



B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack

panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an


B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

1. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each

area and that correspond with support system indicated.


following:

1. American Gypsum.

2. CertainTeed Corporation.

3. National Gypsum Company.

4. USG Corporation.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be

more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch .


C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch .


D. Acoustically Enhanced Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M. Multilayer products constructed

of two layers of gypsum boards sandwiching a viscoelastic sound-absorbing polymer core. The

foil backing on gypsum board in "Foil-Backed Gypsum Board" Paragraph below creates a vapor

barrier. Verify limitations and proper uses with manufacturers.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following

or a comparable product:

1. National Gypsum Company; SoundBreak XP.





2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.


2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's

standard edges.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

B. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced

galvanized-steel sheet

2. Shapes:

1. Cornerbead.

2. Bullnose bead.

3. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

4. Expansion (control) joint.

5. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

C. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

D. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

E. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,

use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

1. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: or third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

F. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel

manufacturer.






A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and


B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by

panel manufacturer.

C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag

wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative

assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with

Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of

the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid

abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels

not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with

not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.





D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered

edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not

make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,

etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow

1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments.

Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where

edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with

acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to

open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings

and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both

faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with

manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths

around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

2. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies

3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.

4. Acoustically Enhanced Type: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest

extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end

joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses

of panels.

3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:





1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers

vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring

member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer

joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger

joints on opposite sides of partitions.

J. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

K. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,

across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to

them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c.

Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws

spaced 12 inches o.c.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tile. Install with 1/4-inch gap where

panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a

uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners

used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved

by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

b. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

c. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for

decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C

840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.

3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.





4. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

E. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other

non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall

application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction,

and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


CERAMIC TILING 09 3013 - 1




SECTION 09 3013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wall and floor tile.

2. Waterproofing crack isolation membrane for thinset applications.

3. Metal edge strips.


1. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and

isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 09 2900 "Gypsum Board" for glass-mat, water-resistant backer board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1

apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,

ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,

ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14,

C.

D.

ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications

for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.

1.3

A.

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.







B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and

locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished

tile surfaces.

C. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.

2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and

composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12

inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors

approved for completed Work.3. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.



B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile

manufacturer and Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.

D. Product Test Reports: For tile-setting and -grouting products.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and

that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount

installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type,

composition, and color indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association or a Trowel of

Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.

2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.








A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact

until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in

referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or

producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent

quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality

for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate

from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain waterproofing crack isolation membrane from manufacturer of setting and

grouting materials.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this

Section from a single manufacturer:

1. Metal edge strips.





2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,

compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with

ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced

by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements

specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and

package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from

other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard

with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile: Porcelain tile.

1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Finish Product List on Drawings or comparable products approved by

Architect by one of the following:

a. Daltile.

b. Florida Tile, Inc.

c. Florim USA.

2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.

3. Face Size: As indicated on drawings.

4. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.

5. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: Through color finish. Refer to Schedule.

6. Grout Color: To be selected from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

7. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows,

selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Bullnose to match tile.

2.4 WATERPROOFING CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and ANSI A118.12

and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement

and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Waterproofing Crack Isolation Mortar: Flexible, waterproof mortar

consisting of cement-based mix and latex additive.










a. ARDEX Americas; ARDEX 8+9 Rapid Waterproofing and Crack Isolation

Compound.

b. H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. / TEC; Triple Flex Waterproofing, Crack

Isolation Membrane and Mortar.

c. MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic 315.

2.5 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.15.


following:

a. ARDEX Americas.

b. H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. / TEC.

c. MAPEI Corporation.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or

acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging

mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.15.

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS

A. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.


following:

a. ARDEX Americas.

b. H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. / TEC.

c. MAPEI Corporation.

2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout

mix.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations

indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic

or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring

applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

















C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated

on Drawings as manufactured by Schluter Systems; or comparable product by one of the

following:

1. Blanke Corporation.

2. Custom Building Products.

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and

grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout

manufacturers.

E. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change

color or appearance of grout.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout

manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and

other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance

characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting


1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are

incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other

substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances

required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with

surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically

scarified.

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or

grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical

units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.





4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if

not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset

mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-

setting material manufacturer.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and

packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from

other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to

manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA

installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the

ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA

installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and

grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile

installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Tile floors in wet areas.b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.

c. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete

covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other

penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are

flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize





the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise

indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within

tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same

size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on

floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with 1/8 inch joint widths.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting

materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above

them.

J. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated and where exposed edge of tile flooring meets

carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is

indicated.

K. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer

manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove

excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 WATERPROOFING CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13, ANSI A 107.17 and manufacturer's

written instructions to produce waterproofing crack isolation membrane of uniform thickness

that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow membrane to cure and verify by testing that it is watertight before installing tile or setting

materials over it.


A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new

matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are

free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.





2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended

by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by

testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and

plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and

after cleaning.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to

prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral

protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is

completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from

tile surfaces.

3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F122; thinset mortar on full-coverage waterproofing

crack isolation membrane.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation Insert designation: TCNA W245 or TCNA W248; thinset

mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board.

END OF SECTION

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 1




SECTION 09 5113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.





B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension-system members.

2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.

3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

4. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger-wire attachment where

conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing.

5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Diffusers.

c. Grilles.

d. Speakers.

e. Sprinklers.

f. Perimeter moldings.

7. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.

B. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and

fastener type, from ICC-ES.






A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent

of quantity installed.


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and

store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage

from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and

other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized

moisture content.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed

and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing


1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ACT-1, ACT-2, and ACT-4

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Finish Schedule on Drawings or comparable product approved by Architect by one of the

following:







2. USG Corporation.

B. Edge/Joint Detail: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.

C. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM


on Finish Schedule on Drawings or comparable product approved by Architect by one of the

following:


2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

3. USG Corporation.

B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal

suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type,

structural classification, and finish indicated.

C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll

formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip

galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.

3. Face Design: Flat, flush.

4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel.

5. Cap Finish: Painted white.

D. Narrow-Face, Uncapped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll

formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip

galvanized, G30 coating designation; to produce structural members with 9/16-inch- wide faces.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.

2. Face Design: With 1/8-inch- wide, slotted, box-shaped flange.

3. Face Finish: Painted white.

4. Reveal Finish: Painted to match flange color.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,

Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows:











1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft

temper.

2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but

not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.

2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not

indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with

seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that

used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.

1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated

and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms

reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at

exposed suspension member.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9219 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical

panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified

in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel

ceilings.

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture

damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless

otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.





3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:


plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces

by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.


spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard

suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in

form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a

minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye

screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not

deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,

install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of

each member.

8. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced standards.

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and

where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more

than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

D. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.

Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system

runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise

fit.

1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of

reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed

panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel

manufacturer.






A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet,

non-cumulative.

B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension

system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and

suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and

touchup of minor finish damage.

B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to

permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION




LINEAR METAL CEILINGS 095423 - 1

SECTION 095423 - LINEAR METAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes strip, linear metal pans and suspension systems for ceilings.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

B. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of linear metal pans and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color and other decorative

finishes.

C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,

prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Linear Metal Pan: Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of each type and color and a

12-inch- (300-mm-) long spliced section.





2. Suspension System Members: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Sample of each type.

3. Exposed Molding and Trim: Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of each type,

finish, and color.

4. Filler Strips: Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of each type, finish, and color.

5. Sound Absorber: 12 inches (300 mm) long.

6. End Cap: Full size.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Linear pattern.

2. Joint pattern.

3. Ceiling suspension members.

4. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

a. Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment

devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

5. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and

access panels.

6. Ceiling perimeter and penetrations through ceiling; trim and moldings.

7. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:48).

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Product Test Reports: For each linear metal ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing

agency.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Linear Metal Ceiling Components: Quantity of each pan, carrier, accessory, and exposed

molding and trim equal to 2percent of quantity installed.






A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation

Program for testing indicated.


A. Deliver linear metal pans, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in

original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they

are protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight,

surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Handle linear metal pans, suspension system components, and accessories carefully to avoid

damaging units and finishes in any way.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Exterior linear metal ceilings shall withstand exterior exposure and the

effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without showing permanent

deformation of ceiling system components including pans and suspension system; noise or

metal fatigue caused by vibration, deflection, and displacement of ceiling pans; or permanent

damage to fasteners and anchors:

1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure as indicated on Drawingsacting inward or outward.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient;.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing


1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50or less.

2.2 LINEAR METAL CEILING PANS

A. Acoustical Metal Pan Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard linear metal pans of

configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,

acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.





1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of

test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795.

B. Sheet Metal Characteristics: For metal components exposed to view in the completed Work,

provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with

exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, roughness, stains, or discolorations.

1. Aluminum Sheet: Roll-formed aluminum sheet, complying with ASTM B 209

(ASTM B 209M); alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for

type of use and finish indicated.

2. Steel Sheet: Commercial-quality, cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet; stretcher leveled; with

protective coating complying with ASTM C 635/C 635M.

a. Chemical/Mechanical Finishes: Uncoated steel sheet complying with

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M with luster or bright finish as required by finisher for

applying electroplating or other metallic-finishing processes.

C. Pan Fabrication: Manufacturer's standard units of size, profile, and edge treatment indicated,

formed from metal indicated to snap on and be securely retained on carriers without separate

fasteners, and finished to comply with requirements indicated.

D. Pan Splices: Construction same as pans, in lengths 8 to 12 inches (200 to 300 mm); with

manufacturer's standard finish.

E. End Caps: Manufacturer's standard material; fabricated to fit and conceal exposed ends of pans.

F. Filler Strips: Manufacturer's standard material; fabricated to uninterruptedly close voids

between pans.

G. Moldings and Trim: Provide manufacturer's standard moldings and trim for exposed members,

and as indicated or required, for edges and penetrations of ceiling, around fixtures, at changes in

ceiling height, and for other conditions; of same metal and finish as linear metal ceiling pans.

H. Sound-Absorbent Fabric Layer: Provide fabric layer, sized to fit concealed surface of pan, and

consisting of black, nonwoven, nonflammable, sound-absorbent material with surface-burning

characteristics for flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as

determined by testing per ASTM E 84.

1. Bond fabric layer to pan in the factory with manufacturer's standard nonflammable

adhesive.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Metal Suspension Systems Standard: Provide ceiling manufacturer's standard metal suspension

systems of types and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635/C 635M

requirements.

B. Suspension Systems: Provide systems complete with carriers, splice sections, connector clips,

alignment clips, leveling clips, hangers, molding, trim, retention clips, load-resisting struts,





fixture adapters, and other suspension components required to support ceiling units and other

ceiling-supported construction.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,

Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory

devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without

failure, a load equal to 10times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by

testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wire complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft

temper.

2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.

3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.

4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times the hanger design load indicated in

ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, Direct Hung is less than yield stress of wire, but provide

not less than 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-)diameter wire.

E. Carriers: Factory finished with matte-black baked finish

1. Main Carriers: Aluminum, not less than 0.240-inch (6.0-mm) rolled sheet, alloy and

temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish

indicated, complying with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

2. Main Carriers: Steel, not less than 0.0209-inch (0.53-mm) nominal thickness, cold-rolled

sheet, with factory-applied protective coating, complying with ASTM C 635/C 635M.

a. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel: ASTM A 879/A 879M, not less than 08Z (24G)

zinc coating.

b. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G60 (Z180) zinc

coating.

3. Adaptable Carriers: Manufacturer's standard carriers for direct attachment to existing

suspended tees.

4. Expansion Carriers: Manufacturer's standard carriers allowing for irregularities or other

unusual space conditions.

F. Carrier Splices: Same metal, profile, and finish as for carriers.

G. Stabilizer Channels, Tees, and Bars: Manufacturer's standard components for stabilizing main

carriers at regular intervals and at light fixtures, air-distribution equipment, access doors, and

other equipment; spaced as standard with manufacturer for use indicated; and factory finished

with matte-black baked finish.

H. Exterior Bracing: Cold-rolled steel channels and angles, hot-dip galvanized to comply with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation; size and profile as required to

withstand wind load.





I. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced as standard with

manufacturer.

J. Edge Moldings and Trim: Provide exposed members as indicated or required to comply with

seismic requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, to conceal edges of penetrations through

ceiling, to conceal ends of pans and carriers, for fixture trim and adapters, for fasciae at changes

in ceiling height, and for other conditions; of metal and finish matching linear metal pans or

extruded plastic unless otherwise indicated.

1. For Circular Penetrations of Ceiling: Fabricate edge moldings to diameter required to fit

penetration exactly.

2.4 STEEL PANS AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR LINEAR METAL CEILING MC1 (interior

condition), MC2 (exterior condition)

A. Steel Pans and Suspension System:

1. Basis of Design: Armstrong METALWORKS Linear and METALWORKS Linear

Exterior

B. Classification: Units complying with ASTM E 1264 Type XIII, steel strips with mineral- or

glass-fiber-base backing; Form 2, unperforated .

C. Pan Thickness: Not less than 0.028”.

D. Pan Edge Detail: Square

E. Linear Module Width and Pan Face Width: 4-inch (102-mm) module width and 3-1/4-inch (83-

mm) face width, and 8-inch (203-mm) module width and 7-1/4-inch (184-mm) face width .

F. Pan Depth: Manufacturer’s standard depth.

G. Pan Face Finish: Effects Maple.

H. End Cap, Finish of Exposed Portions: To match pan.

I. Filler Strip Design: An integral extension of pan profile.

J. Filler Strip, Finish of Exposed Portions: Matte black

K. Suspension-System Main-Carrier Material: Manufacturer's standard material and protective

finish

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Access Panels: For access at locations indicated, provide door hinge assembly, retainer clip, and

retainer bar, assembled with ceiling panels and carrier sections into access doors of required

size, permitting upward or downward opening.






A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,





C. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating

Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are

indicated.

2.7 STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Powder Coated Finish: Powder coating process complying with finish manufacturer's written

instructions for surface preparation, pretreatment, process, and minimum thickness to produce a

coating uniform in appearance and free of blisters, pits, roughness, nodules, burning, cracks,

unplated areas, and other visible defects.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which

linear metal ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of linear

metal ceilings.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of linear metal pans to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width pans at borders, and comply

with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans and on Coordination Drawings.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic requirement indicated, per manufacturer's

written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:






plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces

by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.


spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard

suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in

form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a

minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate to which

hangers are attached and for type of hanger involved.

5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,

install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported

directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches

(200 mm) from ends of each member.

8. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four

tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers but

without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires

into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of linear metal ceiling area and

where necessary to conceal edges and ends of linear metal pans.

1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system

to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and

connect securely.

2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension system carriers so they are aligned and securely interlocked with one another.

Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Cut linear metal pans for accurate fit at borders and at interruptions and penetrations by other

work through ceilings. Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of buckling

or variations in flatness exceeding referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet.

G. Install linear metal pans in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and

trim.

1. Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis in

both directions unless otherwise indicated.

2. Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut units for accurate fit at

borders and around construction penetrating ceiling.





3. Install pans with butt joints using internal pan splices and in the following joint

configuration:

a. Aligned, every other pan length.

4. Install directionally textured metal pans in directions indicated.

5. Where metal pan ends are visible, install end caps unless trim is indicated.

6. Install filler strips where indicated.

7. Install sound-absorbent pads at right angle to perforated metal pans so pads do not hang

unsupported.

H. Install hold-down clips where indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed installations of linear metal ceiling

hangers and anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and

using methods as follows. Do not proceed with installations of linear metal ceiling hangers for

the next area until test results for previously completed installations show compliance with

requirements.

1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor

has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.

a. Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 power-actuated

fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test

them for 200 lbf (890 N) of tension; it will also select 1 of every 2 postinstalled

anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf

(1957 N) of tension.

b. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with

requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20

pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.

C. Linear metal ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners will be considered defective if they do

not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of linear metal ceilings, including trim and edge moldings after

removing strippable, temporary protective covering if any. Comply with manufacturer's written

instructions for stripping of temporary protective covering, cleaning, and touchup of minor

finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and

repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including dented and bent units.






RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 1




SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Thermoset-rubber base.

2. Rubber molding accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12

inches long.




1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each

type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than

50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than

70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following

periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range

recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.





C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE, RB-2


on Drawings or comparable product approved by Architect by one of the following:

1. Flexco.

2. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company.

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid,

homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove: .

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.

H. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.2 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Description: Rubber transition strips.

B. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.

C. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated.

D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product

manufacturer for applications indicated.








B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified

in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and

foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are

to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation

materials into spaces where they will be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

products.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.





E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter corners to minimize open joints.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates

throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would

otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09 6519 - 1




SECTION 09 6519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Polyester composition floor tile.



B. Samples: Full-size units of each color, texture, and pattern of floor tile required.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,

and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in

techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate

aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.





a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by

Architect.



in writing.




A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient

temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50

deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than

70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range

recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing identical

products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 POLYESTER COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE, SV-1 and SV-2


on Drawings or comparable product approved by Architect.






B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 2982.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer

for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit

floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified

in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and

foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion

of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor

tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.

Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale

recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and

perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly

spaced in installation areas.





a. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity

level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be

installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation

materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor

offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using

cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis unless otherwise indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as

manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed

tiles.

1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent

fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles

to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting

by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking

device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers,

and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between

pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that

abut covers and to cover perimeters.





H. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a

completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing

of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

WALL COVERING MARKERBOARDS 09 7210 - 1




SECTION 097210 - WALL COVERING MARKERBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. White wall covering markerboards.


1. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board” for gypsum board and Level 5 finish used as wall

covering markerboard substrates.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics,

durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings showing location and extent of each wall covering markerboard type. Indicate

seams and termination points.

C. Samples for verification in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full

range of variations expected in these characteristics.

1. Wall Covering Marker Board Material: Full-width sample, not less than 36 inches long,

from dye lot used for the Work.

a. Submit sample with specified treatments applied.

b. Mark top and face of material.

D. Schedule of wall covering markerboard using same room designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Maintenance data for wall covering markerboard to include in the operation and maintenance

manual.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of

the manufacturer for installation of products required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain wall covering marker boards through one source from a single

manufacturer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide wall covering markerboard with the following

surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing assembled materials composed of





facings and backings identical to those required in this Section per ASTM E 84 by a testing and

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.

2. Smoke Developed: 10 or less.


A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements before preparation of Shop Drawings and

before fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction

progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might

delay the Work.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Wall Covering Markerboard Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer

agreeing to replace wall covering markerboards that do not retain their original writing and

erasing qualities, become slick and shiny, or exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking within the

specified warranty period, provided the manufacturer's written instructions for handling,

installation, protection, and maintenance have been followed.

1. Warranty Period: Life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis-of-Design – WC8: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products named in

the Wall Finish Schedule, by Walltalkers a Division of RJF International Corporation, or by one

of the following:

B. Wall Covering Standard: FS CCC-W-408A and CFFA-W-101-A, Type II, Medium Duty.

1. Laminate Thickness: 26 mils.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate

application, as recommended by wall covering manufacturer.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for moisture content and other conditions

affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold, mildew,

oil, grease, incompatible primers, and dirt.

C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,

cracks, and defects.

1. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.

2. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete

masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.3. Prime new gypsum board with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer.

D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with

fine sandpaper.

E. Acclimatize wall covering markerboard materials by removing them from packaging in the

installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation.

3.3 Wall covering markerboard INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with wall covering markerboard manufacturers' written installation

instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent

requirements apply.

B. Cut wall covering markerboard in roll number sequence. Change run numbers at partition

breaks and corners only.

C. Install wall covering markerboard with no gaps or overlaps.

D. Railroad Installation: Install seams horizontal and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners

and 3 inches from inside corners.

E. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.

F. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt

seams.






A. Verify that accessories required for each surface have been properly installed.

B. Clean surfacing according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

EXTERIOR PAINTING 09 9113 - 1




SECTION 09 9113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

exterior substrates:

1. Galvanized metal.2. Aluminum


1. Division 08 Sections for factory priming doors.

2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint

systems on interior substrates.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat

indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.3. Label each coat of each Sample.

4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.




1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied.






A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at

temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Behr Process Corporation (Behr).

2. Benjamin Moore & Co. (BM).3. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG).

4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (The) (S-W).5. Tnemec.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in the

Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: Match Architect's samples.





2.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based.

1) Behr: Behr Premium Plus Int/Ext Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer 436.

2) BM: Ultra Spec DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel HP29.3) PPG: 90-912 Pitt Tech Plus 100% Acrylic DTM Primer.

4) S-W: Pro Industrial ProCryl WB Metal Primer, B66-310 Series.

5) Tnemec: Series 115 Uni-bond DF

b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).

1) Behr: Behr Direct To Metal Semi-Gloss Enamel 3200.2) BM: Ultra Spec DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel HP29.

3) PPG: 6-900XI Speedhide Exterior Semi-Gloss.4) S-W: Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-651 Series.

5) Tnemec: Series 115 Uni-bond DF.

B. Aluminum Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum.

1) Behr: Behr Premium Plus Int/Ext Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer 436.2) BM: Ultra Spec DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel HP29.

3) PPG: 17-921 Seal Grip Primer.4) S-W: Pro Industrial ProCryl WB Metal Primer, B66-310 Series.

b. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).

1) Behr: Behr Direct To Metal Semi-Gloss Enamel 3200.2) BM: Ultra Spec DTM Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel HP29.

3) PPG: 6-900XI Speedhide Exterior Semi-Gloss.4) S-W: Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-651 Series.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.





B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.

C. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces

are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.

If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-

applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required

to produce paint systems indicated.

C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal

fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that

promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

D. Aluminum Substrates (previously coated): Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP1. Abrade

surface to remove existing gloss and obtain a minimum surface profile of 1.0 mil. Solvent wipe

to remove dust.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.

2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.





D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any

time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,

and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product

requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-

paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with

rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from

previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are

incompatible.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials fromProject site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION

INTERIOR PAINTING 09 9123 - 1




SECTION 09 9123

INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

interior substrates:

1. Steel.2. Gypsum board.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this

Section.

2. Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint

systems on exterior substrates.



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat

indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.


C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.2. Include color designations.




1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied.






A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to

verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects

and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of

each paint system specified in the Interior Painting Schedule.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply mockups after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been

activated.

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.



in writing.






1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than

5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:






2. Benjamin Moore & Co. (BM).3. PPG Paints (PPG).

4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The) (S-W).5. Tnemec.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in theInterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL


1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another



2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Using Environmental Chambers."

C. Colors: Match Architect's samples.

2.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board Substrate:

1. Walls:

a. One (1) coat, latex primer:

1) Behr: Behr Premium Plus Interior Drywall Primer & Sealer 73 (50 g/L)2) BM: N534 Ultra Spec 500 Interior Latex Primer (0 g/L)

3) PPG: 6-4900XI Speedhide Zero VOC Primer (< 50 g/L VOC).

4) S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600 (< 50 g/L

VOC).

5) Tnemec: Series 1026 Enduratone (48 g/L).

b. Two (2) coats, -acrylic-latex enamel (eggshell):

1) Behr: Behr Pro i300 Interior Eggshell Paint 330 (5 g/L)2) BM: N538 Ultra Spec 500 Acrylic Zero VOC Eggshell Enamel (0g/L)

3) PPG: 6-4310XI Speedhide Zero VOC Eggshell(< 50 g/L VOC).

4) S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex EgShel, B20W2600 (< 50 g/L

VOC).


2. Ceilings:





a. One (1) coat, latex primer:

1) Behr: Behr Premium Plus Interior Drywall Primer & Sealer 73 (50 g/L)2) BM: Coronado 40 Super Kote 5000 Acrylic Latex Primer (<50g/L) or Super

Hide Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer 354 (0g/L)3) PPG: 6-4900XI Speedhide Zero VOC Primer(< 50 g/L VOC).

4) S-W: ProMar 400 Zero VOC Interior Primer, B28W4600 (< 50 g/L VOC).5) Tnemec: Series 1026 Enduratone (48 g/L).

b. Two (2) coats, Acrylic-Latex (flat):

1) Behr: Behr Pro i300 Interior Flat Paint 310 (5 g/L)

2) BM: Coronado 88 Super Kote 1000 Latex Flat (<50g/L) or Super Hide Zero

VOC Interior Flat 355 (0g/L)

3) PPG: 6-4110XI Speedhide Zero VOC Flat (0g/L).

4) S-W: ProMar 400 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-4600 (< 50 g/L).

B.

5)

Steel Substrate:

Tnemec: Series 1026 Enduratone (48 g/L).

1. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

a. One (1) coat, water based primer:

1) Behr: Behr Premium Plus Int/Ext Multi-Surface Primer & Sealer 436 (50

g/L)2) BM: 0790 Advance Waterborne Interior Primer (44g/L VOC)

3) PPG: 90-712 Pitt-Tech Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Primer/Finish (123

g/L VOC).

4) S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 ( < 100 g/L).

5) Tnemec: Series 27WB Typoxy, waterbased (6.6 g/L)

b. Two (2) coats, alkyd/oil eggshell enamel:

1) Behr: Behr Int/Ext Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel 3900 (50 g/L)2) BM: 0792 Advance Waterborne Interior Satin (48g/L)

3) PPG: 6-1410 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior WB Alkyd Satin (36 g/L VOC).

4) S-W: ProMar 200 Interior WB Acrylic-Alkyd EgShel, B33-8200 (< 100 g/L

VOC).


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.





B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

2. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing


D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces

are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and

conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.

If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-

applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to


2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants.


to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in

writing by paint manufacturer.

E. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and

sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture

with prime coat only.





hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide


C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and

occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping.

b. Uninsulated plastic piping.

c. Pipe hangers and supports.d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.

e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets.

f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material.

g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

2. Electrical Work:

a. Switchgear.

b. Panelboards.c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any

time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,

and certified in presence of Contractor.2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-

paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with





previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are

incompatible.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by


C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and


D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION

ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 09 9653 - 1




SECTION 09 9653 - ELASTOMERIC COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of elastomeric coatings to the following

exterior substrates:

1. Concrete.



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of elastomeric coating indicated and in each color and

gloss.

1. Submit Samples on same type of substrate as that to receive application, 8 inches square.

2. Step coats on Samples to show each separate coat, including primers and block fillers as

applicable.

3. Label each coat of each Sample.



A. Mockups: Prepare two mockups of each coating system indicated and each color and finish

selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select two wall surfaces of at least 100 sq. ft. to represent surfaces and

conditions for application of each type and texture of elastomeric coating.2. Final approval of color and texture selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, prepare additional mockups of

additional color and textures selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.




1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.






A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air temperatures are

between 50 and 90 deg F unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at

temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

C. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before

starting or continuing coating operation.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace elastomeric coatings that fail within specified warranty period.


a. Water penetration through the coating.

b. Deterioration of coating beyond normal weathering.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS



1. Provide elastomeric finish coatings and crack fillers, primers, and block fillers as

applicable for use within elastomeric finish coatings that are compatible with one another



2. For each material or coat, provide products and spreading rates recommended in writing

by elastomeric coating manufacturer for use on substrate indicated.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC FINISH COATINGS

A. Exterior Non-Flat Waterborne, Pigmented Elastomeric Coating.


a. BASF Building Systems; MasterProtect EL 750.

b. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Moorlastic.

c. Envirocoat Technologies Inc.; Envirocoat, Ceramic Insulcoat - Wall.

d. Euclid Tamms; Tamms Tammolastic.

2. Surface Profile: Smooth texture.





3. VOC Content: 100 g/L or less.4. Moisture-Vapor Transmission: Minimum 5, based on testing according to

ASTM D 1653.

2.3 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Crack Fillers: Elastomeric coating manufacturer's recommended, factory-formulated crack

fillers or sealants, including crack filler primers, compatible with substrate and other materials

indicated; VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Elastomeric coating manufacturer's recommended, factory-formulated, alkali-resistant

primer compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with manufacturer's

requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity, and other conditions affecting

performance of work.

B. Begin coating only when moisture content of substrate is 12 percent or less when measured with

an electronic moisture meter.

C. Begin coating no sooner than 28 days after substrate is constructed and is visually dry on both

sides.

D. Verify that substrate is within the range of alkalinity recommended by manufacturer.

E. Verify suitability of substrates including surface conditions and compatibility with existing


F. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces

are dry.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates and coating systems

indicated.

B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light fixtures, and

similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible

because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation

and coating.

1. After completing coating operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to






C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of

surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.


to produce coating systems indicated.

2. Perform cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminants from cleaning

process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.

D. Crack Repair: Fill cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions before coating

surfaces.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply elastomeric coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use equipment and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being

applied.2. Coat surfaces behind movable items the same as similar exposed surfaces.

3. Apply each coat separately according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Primers: Apply at a rate to ensure complete coverage.

C. Block Fillers: Apply at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

D. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats similar to color of topcoat, but provide


E. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform finish, color, and appearance.

F. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush

marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines

and color breaks.

G. Apply coatings to prepared surfaces as soon as practicable after preparation and before

subsequent surface soiling or deterioration.

H. Spray Application: Use spray equipment for application only when permitted by authorities

having jurisdiction. Wherever spray application is used, do not double back with spray

equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following testing procedures:





1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample materials being

used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and

certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of materials with product requirements.

3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop coating application if test results show materials

being used do not comply with requirements. Remove noncomplying materials from

Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces that were coated with rejected materials.

Remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with

complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.

B. Field Testing and Inspection: Owner reserves the right to engage the services of a qualified

testing agency to verify installed thickness of elastomeric coatings.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials fromProject site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by


C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application. Correct damage to work

of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and


D. At completion of construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated

surfaces.

3.6 COATING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates:

1. Primer: Concrete primer if required by manufacturer.

2. Elastomeric Finish Coat(s): Manufacturer's recommended number of coats and total dry

film thickness for condition of substrate.

3. Finish-Coat Color: Match Architect's samples.

END OF SECTION

DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 101419 - 1




SECTION 101419 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cutout dimensional characters.

2. Illuminated, fabricated channel dimensional characters.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Illuminated: Illuminated by lighting source integrally constructed as part of the sign unit.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Furnish templates for placement of electrical service embedded in permanent construction by

other installers.



B. Shop Drawings: For signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other

installers, and accessories.

3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half

size.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the

required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Dimensional Characters: Half-size Sample of each type of dimensional character.

2. Full-size Samples, if approved, will be returned to Contractor for use in the Project.

D. Product Schedule: For dimensional letter signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings

or specified.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For signs indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Include structural analysis calculations for signs indicated to comply with design loads;

signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.






A. Qualification Data: For Installer .



A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.





A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of electrical service embedded in permanent construction

by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on

Shop Drawings.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design sign structure and anchorage of dimensional character sign

type(s) according to structural performance requirements.

B. Structural Performance: Signs and supporting elements shall withstand the effects of gravity and

other loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Uniform Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Other Design Load: As indicated on Drawings





C. Thermal Movements: For exterior fabricated channel dimensional characters, allow for thermal

movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.


D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Cutout Characters: Characters with uniform faces; square-cut, smooth, eased edges; precisely

formed lines and profiles; and as follows:1. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum.

2. Character Height: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Finishes:

a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Anodized color as selected by Architect from full

range of industry colors and color densities

5. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Fabricated Channel Characters: Metal face and side returns, formed free from warp and

distortion; with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; internally

braced for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-canning or other surface

deformation, and for securing fasteners; and as follows.

1. Illuminated Characters: Lighted character construction with tube lighting, including

transformers, insulators, and other accessories for operability, with provision for

servicing and concealing connections to building electrical system. Use tight or sealed

joint construction to prevent unintentional light leakage. Space lamps apart from each

other and away from character surfaces as needed to illuminate evenly.

a. Power: 120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A.

b. Weeps: Provide weep holes to drain water at lowest part of exterior characters.

2. Character Material: Sheet or plate aluminum.

3. Material Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character.

4. Character Height: As indicated on Drawings.

5. Character Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

6. Finishes:

a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Anodized color as selected by Architect from full

range of industry colors and color densities.

7. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard for size and design of character.

a. Hold characters at manufacturer's recommended distance from wall surface.





2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTER MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer

for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated.

B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum

producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer

and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs,

noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

2. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise

indicated.

3. Sign Mounting Fasteners:

a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of

sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast

integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of

sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast

integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.

c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of

head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble

signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly

mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from

view after final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist

water penetration and retention.

3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds

and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean

exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.





4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are

inconspicuous.

5. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance

loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners.

6. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where

possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign

construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as

required.

1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish to

match sign-background color color unless otherwise indicated.







C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long

dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication

but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.


3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or

irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.






3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's


1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign

surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous

paint.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of

sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface,

embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully

sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install

washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of

sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until

spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes.

Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with

spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud

ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template.

Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install

through fasteners and tighten.

4. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar

or bracket supports in position, so that signage is correctly located and aligned.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed characters and signs that do not comply with

specified requirements. Replace characters with damaged or deteriorated finishes or

components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair

procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.





C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's

written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean

condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION

PANEL SIGNAGE 10 1423 - 1




SECTION 10 1423 - PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Panel signs.

2. Field-applied, vinyl signs.


C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification

signs and for temporary informational and directional signs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent

construction by other installers.



B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other

installers, and accessories.

3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille,

and layout for each sign at least half size.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the

required finish(es), in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Panel Signs: Full-size Sample.

2. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample.

3. Field-Applied, Vinyl Signs: Full-size Sample of characters on glass.

D. Product Schedule: For panel signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings or specified.









A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.




1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering.

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image.

c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: For exterior signs, allow for thermal movements from ambient and

surface temperature changes.


B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the USDOJ's "2010 ADA

Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1.

2.2 PANEL SIGNS

A. Room-Identification Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters

having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:

1. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated to

acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sheet.





a. Composite-Sheet Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for size of sign.

b. Surface-Applied Graphics: Applied paint.

2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition: Square cut.

b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.

3. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard method for substrates indicated with adhesive or

two-face tape.4. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED, VINYL SIGNS

A. Field-Applied, Vinyl Sign, Type 2 Series Alternate: Prespaced characters die cut from 3- to

3.5-mil thick, weather-resistant vinyl film with release liner on the back and carrier film on the

front for on-site alignment and application.

1. Size: As indicated.

2. Substrate: As indicated.

3. Text and Font: As indicated.

2.4 SIGN MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF

(UV filtering).

B. Vinyl Film: UV-resistant vinyl film of nominal thickness indicated, with pressure-sensitive,

permanent adhesive on back; die cut to form characters or images as indicated and suitable for

exterior applications.

C. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by

manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and

exposure indicated.

2.5 PANEL-SIGN MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF

(UV filtering).

B. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by

manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and

exposure indicated.





2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs,

noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following

unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by sign manufacturer.

C. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with

adhesive on both sides.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and

assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units

for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after

final assembly.

2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist

water penetration and retention.

3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are

inconspicuous.

4. Internally brace signs for stability, to meet structural performance loading without oil-

canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners.

5. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where

possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Surface-Engraved Graphics: Machine engrave characters and other graphic devices into

indicated sign surface to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.

1. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard

enamel.

C. Signs with Changeable Message Capability: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable

messages as follows:

1. For slide-in changeable inserts, fabricate slot without burrs or constrictions that inhibit

function. Furnish initial changeable insert. Furnish two blank inserts for each sign for

Owner's use.

2. For frame to hold changeable sign panel, fabricate frame without burrs or constrictions

that inhibit function. Furnish initial sign panel. .











C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long

dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or

irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Verify that anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction are correctly sized and

located to accommodate signs.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's


1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign

surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.

3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous

paint.

B. Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls as indicated on Drawings and according to the

accessibility standard.

C. Mounting Methods:

1. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose

debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of

suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive

away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility

of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive.

Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.





2. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose

debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support

weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign

edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.


A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified

requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot

be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's

written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean

condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.

END OF SECTION

STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 2113.14 - 1




SECTION 10 2113.14 - STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal

screens.


1. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for supports that attach ceiling-hung compartments

to overhead structural system.

2. Section 10 2800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab

bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.




and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.

B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.

2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars and locations of

blocking for surface-mounted toilet accessories.

3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures.

4. Show ceiling grid, ceiling-mounted items, and overhead support or bracing locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-

inch-square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.2. Each type of hardware and accessory.

1.3

A.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.

1.4

A.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.








1. Door Hinges: One hinge(s) with associated fasteners.

2. Latch and Keeper: One latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners.

3. Door Bumper: One door bumper(s) with associated fasteners.

4. Door Pull: One door pull(s) with associated fasteners.

5. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and

other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before

fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's "2010 ADA

Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as

accessible.

2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS



1. Accurate Partitions Corp.; ASI Group.

2. Bradley Corporation.

3. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.

4. Global Partitions; ASI Group.

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Ceiling hung.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung flat panel.

D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core

material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures;

corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Provide with no-

sightline system. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections.










1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-

impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for

doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters.

2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars

mounted on units of size and material adequate for panel to withstand applied downward

load on grab bar of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446, without

deformation of panel.

3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at

locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.

E. Urinal-Screen Construction:

1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction.

F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses as follows:

1. Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than

0.050 inch.

2. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch.

3. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.031 inch.

4. Flat-Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the panels.

G. Pilaster Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch nominal thickness and 3

inches high, finished to match hardware.

H. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.

I. Stainless-Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard textured finish on exposed faces. Protect

exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering

before shipment.

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch-thick stainless steel paired, self-closing

type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, allowing

emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through-bolts.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface-mounted cast-stainless-steel latch

unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced door

strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply

with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.

Mount with through-bolts.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless-steel hook and rubber-

tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted

accessories. Mount with through-bolts.





4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty rubber-tipped cast-stainless-steel bumper at

out-swinging doors. Mount with through-bolts.

5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast-stainless-steel pull at out-swinging doors that

complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of

doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.

B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished

to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for

through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel,

or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel anchors compatible with related materials.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

B. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate

requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories and solid blocking

within panel where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies

with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished

ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to

finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage.

C. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant

anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide

shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.

D. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for

standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-

wide clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance

of the Work.

1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.






3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,

straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring

devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.

b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full-

height brackets.

a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.

b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten.

Hang doors and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when doors are in

closed position.

C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and

plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's

written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open

approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging

doors to return doors to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION

WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10 2600 - 1




SECTION 10 2600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wall guards.

2. Chair rail.

3. Corner guards.

4. Abuse-resistant wall coverings.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of

individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and extent.


C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared

on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Wall Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, top caps,

and field splices.2. Crash Rails: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, and field splices.

3. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include example top caps.

4. Abuse-Resistant Wall Covering: 6 by 6 inches square.


A. Material Certificates: For each type of exposed plastic material.



A. Maintenance Data: For each type of wall and door protection product to include in maintenance

manuals.





1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining best

condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include

precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to

finishes and performance.


A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-

ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period

plastic materials are stored.2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight.

3. Store plastic wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic

material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and door-

protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including detachment of components from each other or from

the substrates, delamination, and permanent deformation beyond normal use.

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, plastics, and other materials beyond normal

use.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall-protection products of each type from single source from single

manufacturer.


A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.





2.3 WALL GUARDS

A. Crash Rail: Prefabricated extended mount rail with radiused corners and end returns; Type 304

stainless steel with #4 finish.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product approved by Architect by one of the

following:

a. InPro Corporation (IPC).

b. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation.

c. Nystrom, Inc.

2. Dimensions: Nominal 2 inches high by 1/4 inch thick.

3. Accessories: Concealed mounting hardware.

4. Mounting: Stainless steel pipe mounting brackets.

2.4 CORNER AND END GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Plastic-Cover Corner Guards: Manufacturer's standard assembly consisting

of snap-on, resilient plastic cover installed over retainer; including mounting hardware;

fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.



following:



c. Nystrom, Inc.

2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch wall thickness; in dimensions and

profiles indicated on Drawings.

a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

3. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.

4. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover;

field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.

2.5 ABUSE-RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS

A. Abuse-Resistant Sheet Wall Covering, WP1 and WP3: Fabricated from semirigid, plastic sheet

wall-covering material.



following:
















2. Size: As indicated.3. Sheet Thickness: 0.040 inch.

4. Color and Texture: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

5. Height: As indicated.

6. Trim and Joint Moldings: Extruded rigid plastic that matches wall-covering color.

7. Mounting: Adhesive.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,

and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where

exposed to view.

C. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with integral color

throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as indicated.

D. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate wall and door protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance,

dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize

field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges

rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other

imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline

joints.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.










PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls to which wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid

backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support

fasteners.

1. For wall protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of

substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall protection.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Quality: Install wall protection according to manufacturer's written instructions,

level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids,

stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

B. Mounting Heights: Install wall protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated on

Drawings.

C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and other

accessories required for a complete installation.

1. Provide anchoring devices and suitable locations to withstand imposed loads.

2. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum retainers

and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches apart.3. Adjust end caps as required to ensure tight seams.

D. Abuse-Resistant Wall Covering: Install top and edge sealants, trim, corners, and divider bars as

required for a complete installation.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a

standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.





B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by

manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY

ACCESSORIES

10 2800 - 1




SECTION 10 2800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Underlavatory guards.

3. Custodial accessories.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required

for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,

cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent

delaying the Work.





2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in

other work and substrate preparation.3. Include electrical characteristics.

B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified when requested by

Architect.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each

accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.


A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


ACCESSORIES

10 2800 - 2





A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors

that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. American Specialties, Inc.

2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

3. Bradley Corporation.

C. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser:

1. Description: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset.

2. Mounting: Surface mounted.

3. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle.

4. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls.

5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

D. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:

1. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable

waste receptacle.

2. Mounting: Semirecessed.

3. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels.4. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 12 gal..


6. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner.

7. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment.

E. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:






ACCESSORIES

10 2800 - 3




1. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.

2. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted.

3. Refill Indicator: Window type.

F. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit:

1. Mounting: Surface mounted.

2. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover.

3. Receptacle: Removable.


G. Grab Bars:


a. American Specialties, Inc; No. 3200.

b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; No. B-6806.

c. Bradley Corporation; No. 812.

d. Gamco; 150C-T.

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.

3. Material: Stainless steel, not less than 0.05 inch thick (18 gauge).

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.

5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Mirror Unit:


a. American Specialties, Inc; No. 0600 Series

b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; No. B-290 Series

c. Bradley Corporation; No. 780 Series.

d. Gamco; A Series.

2. Frame: Stainless steel.

a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.

b. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with no exposed screws or bolts.

3. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

I. Full-Height Mirror Unit:


a. American Specialties, Inc; No. 0600-A.














ACCESSORIES

10 2800 - 4





d. Gamco; A Series.

2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick.

a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth.

b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices

requiring a special tool to remove.

3. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

2.2 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES

A. Diaper-Changing Station:


a. American Specialties, Inc.: Model No. 9013-9

b. Brocar Products, Inc.: Model No. 100-SS-SM

c. Koala Kare Products: Model No. KB1110-SSWM

2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position, with child-

protection strap and engineered to support a minimum of 250-lb static load when opened.3. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism.

4. Mounting: Surface.

5. Nylon safety belt included

6. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, impact resistant, stain-resistant, molded plastic,

white.

2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

A. Underlavatory Guard:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or

equal:

a. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.; Handy Shield Maxx Safety Covers.

b. Truebro by IPS Corporation; Lav Guard 2 Undersink Protective Pipe Cover

System.

2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that

prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without

removing coverings.






ACCESSORIES

10 2800 - 5




2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain custodial accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Utility Shelf with Mop and Broom Holder:


a. American Specialties, Inc; No.1308-3.



2. Description: Unit with stainless steel shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath

shelf.3. Length: 34 inches.

4. Hooks: Four.

5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.


a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel.

b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch-diameter stainless steel.

C. Utility Shelf:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide shelving from one of the

following:

a. American Specialties, Inc.

b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

c. Bradley Corporation.

2. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch and supported by

two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside.3. Mounting: Wall mounted.

4. Number of tiered shelves: Four.

5. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel, No. 4 finish

(satin).

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless


B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036-

inch minimum nominal thickness.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.










ACCESSORIES

10 2800 - 6




D. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.

E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-

theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

G. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and

access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with

corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.

Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and

firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to

ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 4413 - 1




SECTION 10 4413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguisher.


1. Section 10 4416 "Fire Extinguishers" for portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers

accommodated by fire-protection cabinets

1.2 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE


1. Review methods and procedures related to fire-protection cabinets, including, but not

limited to, the following:

a. Schedules and coordination requirements.



1. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. Include roughing-in

dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-mounting method

and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Product Schedule: For fire-protection cabinets. Indicate whether recessed, semirecessed, or

surface mounted. Coordinate final fire-protection cabinet schedule with fire-extinguisher

schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.





1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers

indicated are accommodated.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-protection cabinets, accessories, and fire extinguishers from

single source from single manufacturer.


A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in

ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.


following:

a. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

b. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

c. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Cabinet Construction: One-hour fire rated.

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from

0.043-inch-thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick fire-barrier

material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

D. Recessed Cabinet:

1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping

surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge

(backbend).

E. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping

surrounding wall surface, with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).









1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.

F. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no

trim.

G. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.

H. Door Material: Steel sheet.

I. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.

J. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).

K. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet

type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide projecting lever handle with cam-action latch.

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim,, permitting door to open

180 degrees.

L. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to

fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers

indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,

size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE

EXTINGUISHER."

1) Location: Applied to cabinet glazing.

2) Application Process: As selected by Architect.

3) Lettering Color: Red.

4) Orientation: As directed by Architect.

M. Materials:

1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

a. Finish: Baked enamel, TGIC polyester powder coat, HAA polyester powder coat,

epoxy powder coat, or polyester/epoxy hybrid powder coat, complying with

AAMA 2603.

b. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with


c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

a. Finish: No. 4 directional satin finish,.





3. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm

thick, Class 1 (clear).

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and

hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth.

2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated

and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2

inch thick.

2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged.

3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames and grind smooth.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground

smooth.


A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal

Products," for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are unacceptable. Variations

in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved

Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and

semirecessed cabinets will be installed.






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and

size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not

indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is

inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.

3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets

are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral

locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as

recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-

finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-

protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful

repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 4416 - 1




SECTION 10 4416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire

extinguishers.


1. Section 10 4413 "Fire Protection Cabinets."



1. Review methods and procedures related to fire extinguishers including, but not limited to,

the following:

a. Schedules and coordination requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and

mounting brackets.


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and

function.





1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable

Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting

bracket indicated.


following:

a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International.

b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

d. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B, and bar coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections,

maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal

capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.










2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall

or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated

or black baked-enamel finish.


following:

a. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International.

b. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.

c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.

d. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,

spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in

red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: As directed by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in

compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations

indicated.

END OF SECTION









ROOF SCREENS 108213-1

SECTION 108213 – ROOF SCREENS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Stand-alone roof equipment screens and supporting steel framework. Screens shall be

designed to attach to the roof structure and not the equipment being screened.

B. Roof screen accessories.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution requirements for embedded anchors

and attachments for metal fabrications specified by this section in concrete.

B. Section 051200 - Structural Steel: Metal Framing.

C. Section 053113 - Steel Floor Deck.

D. Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Frames and supports.

E. Section 077213 - Roof Curbs.

F. Section 099100 - Paints and Coatings: Field applied paint finish.

G. Division 23 - Roof Top HVAC Equipment.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless

Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

D. ASTM A 1008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution

Hardened, and Bake Hardenable.

E. ASTM B 749 - Standard Specification for Lead and. Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate

Products.

F. ASTM D 4811 - Standard Specification for Nonvulcanized (Uncured) Rubber Sheet Used

as Roof Flashing.

G. ASTM D 6878 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing.

H. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.





I. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination.

J. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

K. AWS D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of roofing materials to avoid

damage to installed insulation and membrane materials.


A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Layout and erection drawings showing typical cross sections and

dimensioned locations of all frames and base supports. Include erection drawings,

elevations, and details where applicable. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS

A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips

representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6

inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, shape, and patterns.


A. Design Calculations: 3 copies of structural design calculations for structural components

and components resisting wind loads with seal and signature of professional engineer

licensed in the State of Illinois.

B. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification

within previous 12 months.

D. Warranties: 3 signed copies.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with a minimum five years documented

experience in producing pre-manufactured metal-framed equipment screens.

B. Design Qualifications: Provide structural design calculations stamped by a professional

engineer licensed in the state in which this project is located.

C. Welders: AWS certified within previous 12 months.





D. Pre-Installation Meeting:

1. Convene at job site, at least seven calendar days prior to scheduled beginning of

construction activities of this section, to review requirements of this section.

2. Require attendance by representatives of the installing subcontractor (who will

represent the system manufacturer), the mechanical subcontractors and other

entities affected by construction activities of this section.

3. Notify Architect four calendar days in advance of scheduled meeting date.

E. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and

application workmanship.

1. Locate in area designated by Architect.

2. Construct mock-up, one full screen section wide, including two roof supports.

3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and location is


4. Remove mock-up if required by Architect.

5. Accepted mock-up may remain in place.


A. Deliver materials to the project site clearly marked for proper identification.

B. Receive, handle and store materials in conformance with the manufacturers printed

instructions.

C. Store products under cover, in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for

installation.

D. Protect materials from exposure to moisture.

E. Store materials in a dry, warm, ventilated weathertight location.

F. Protect metal fabrications from damage by exposure to weather.

G. Handling: Use a forklift or crane to move material. Do not lift the bundles by the metal

bands.

1. Fork Lift: Spread the forks as far as possible to balance the load. Drive slowly

when moving long bundles over uneven surfaces to avoid tipping the load

2. Crane: Position the canvas sling straps so that the space between the straps is at

least 1/3 the length of the bundle. Use sling straps with looped ends running one

end of the strap through the loop at the other end to cinch the bundle when lifted.

When setting the load on the roof, put wood blocks under it to protect the roof and

allow space to remove the sling straps.

3. Roof Placement: Spread the bundles and crates out as much as possible to avoid

overloading the roof structure. Place the material directly over major supports such

as beams or trusses.

4. Position bundles of tubing parallel to the slope of the roof and block prior to

opening to prevent the tubing from rolling down the roof slope when unbundled.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under





environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B. Field Measurements: Verify roof screen dimensions and conditions of the installation by

field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without

delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating equipment

enclosure without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that

actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Framing System: Provide manufacturer's standard written limited warranty stating that the

complete framing system shall be warranted against structural failure due to cracking,

buckling, bending, tearing or corrosion arising under normal use and environmental

conditions for the coverage period applicable.

1. Products installed on projects located 2 miles or greater from salt or brackish

bodies of water shall be warranted for twenty (20) years

2. Products installed on projects located greater than 1 mile but less than 2 miles from

salt or brackish bodies of water will be warranted for five (5) years, except for

aluminum, stainless steel or copper Products which will be warranted for twenty

(20) years.

3. Products installed on projects located 1 mile or less from salt or brackish bodies of

water will be warranted for three (3) years, except for aluminum, stainless steel or

copper Products which will be warranted for twenty (20) years

B. Panel Finish:

1. Provide written warranty stating that the paint finish applied on all equipment

enclosure panels will be warranted against chipping, peeling, cracking, fading, or

blistering for the coverage period of twenty (20) years.

2. Provide warranty signed by the panel manufacturer and paint finish applicator (if

separate from manufacturer).

C. Louvers: Refer to Section 089100, Louvers

D. The above warranties are in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may

have under the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Design Loads: Comply with Building Code for site location and building height.

1. Design to resist ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other

Structures.

2. Design all materials, assembly and attachments to resist snow, wind, suction and

uplift loading at any point without damage or permanent set.





B. Structural Design: Prepare structural design calculations for screen framing and attachment

to structure including reactions at base supports for verification of roof structure by

Architect.

C. All welds to be performed by an AWS certified welder. Valid certification to be provided.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: RoofScreen Mfg., which is located at: 347 Coral St. ; Santa

Cruz, CA 95060; Toll Free Tel: 866-766-3727; Tel: 831-421-9230; Fax: 866-253-0738;

Email: request info ([email protected]); Web: www.roofscreen.com.

B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section

[012500, Substitutions Procedures][016000, Product Requirements and Substitutions].

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Square Base Supports: Weldments fabricated from cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM

A 1008, fabricated with pre-punched holes in base plate for fastening to roof structure.

After fabrication, apply minimum 2 to 4 mil baked on powder coat primer.

1. Height 5 inches (127 mm).



B. Square Base Support Extensions: Fabricated from same material and finish as base

supports.



C. Square Base Cap: Weldments fabricated from AISI Type 304 stainless steel with mill

finish, and fabricated to overlap base support and flashing boot a minimum of 2 inches (51

mm). Provide moment resisting adjustable connection to attach framing to base cap.

D. Round Post Supports: 12 inch (305 mm) tall weldments fabricated from galvanized steel

tube conforming to ASTM A 500 and cold rolled steel plate conforming to ASTM A36,

fabricated with pre-punched holes in base plate for fastening to roof structure. After

fabrication, apply minimum 2 to 4 mil shop primer to base plate and weld. Provide height

adjustment with galvanized tube sleeve conforming to ASTM A 500, sized to telescope

over outside of round post tube and fastened at desired height with self-drilling, self-

tapping screws.

E. Round Post Cap: Weldments fabricated from AISI Type 304 stainless steel with mill finish

fabricated to slip over 2-1/2" sleeve tube allowing adjustable height when used with Round

Post Support.

F. Square TPO Roof Flashing: Fabricated from 60 mil, white, single ply TPO sheet

conforming to ASTM D 6878. Provide with base flange that extends a minimum of

5 inches (127 mm) onto the roof surface on all four sides. Riser shall be tapered to allow

easy fit over Square Base Supports with minimal gap at top of flashing. Hot weld all seams

for water tightness.





G. Round TPO Roof Flashing: Fabricated from 60 mil, white, single ply TPO sheet

conforming to ASTM D 6878. Provide with base flange that extends a minimum of 5

inches (127 mm) onto the roof surface on all four sides. Hot weld all seams for water

tightness.

H. Roof Flashing: Refer to Division 07 section that specifies the roof membrane.

I. Base Cap Gasket: EPDM with self-adhesive closed cell foam.

J. Framing: Carbon steel structural tubing in manufacturer’s standard sizes, conforming to

ASTM A 500 with manufacturer’s standard galvanized coating conforming to ASTM

B 117 salt spray testing. Provide with wall thickness as determined by structural

calculations.

K. Connector Fittings: Fabricated from AISI Type 304 stainless steel with mill finish.

L. Steel Z section: Steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 653, Class SS, with a G90 hot-dip

galvanized coating.

M. Steel Hat Channel: Steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 653, Class SS, with a G90 hot-dip

galvanized coating.

N. Hardware: Bolts, nuts, washers and screws 18-8 stainless steel.

O. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

P. Panel:

1. Profile:

a. 7.2 Rib Panel.

b. 3 inch Deep Rib Panel.

2. Base Metal:

a. Minimum 26 gauge Galvalume steel sheet, AZ50, conforming to ASTM A

792 for painted and unpainted panels.

b. Minimum 24 gauge Galvalume steel sheet, AZ50, conforming to ASTM A

792 for painted and unpainted panels.

3. Finish:

a. PVDF fluoropolymer, 1 mil, 2 coat, 70 percent.

b. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range,

20 colors minimum.

c. Coat reverse side with off-white primer coat.

4. Panel Fasteners: No. 14 self-tapping sheet metal screw. Color coat heads to match

panel color.

5. Panel Trim: Same material and finish as panel. Configuration as shown on

Drawings

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints





butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted

otherwise.

E. Fabricate system components so that portions of screen can be dismantled for repairs to

equipment being screened and for future roof replacement.

F. Trim and Closures: Fabricated from 24 gauge metal and finished with the manufacturer’s

standard coating system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area where work will be installed to verify the installation can be performed in

accordance with the Drawings and structural calculation requirements without interference

from other equipment or trades.

B. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.

C. Do not begin installation until conditions have been properly prepared.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the

best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

C. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain indicated

alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

D. Anchor fabrications to structure as indicated.

E. Separate dissimilar metals and use gasketed fasteners, isolation shim, or isolation tape to

eliminate possibility of corrosive or electrolytic action between metals.

F. Exercise care when installing components so as not to damage finish surfaces. Touch up as

required to repair damaged finishes.

G. Install flashing boots at base supports as required to provide a watertight connection. Install

as recommended by the roof membrane manufacturer.





H. Remove all protective masking from material immediately after installation.


A. Remove all protective masking from framing and trim material immediately after

installation. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal

wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer’s written installation

instructions. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

B. Protect installed products until completion of project.

1. Ensure that finishes and structure of installed systems are not damaged by

subsequent construction activities.

2. If minor damage to finishes occurs, repair damage in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations; provide replacement components if repaired

finishes are unacceptable to Architect.

C. Prior to Substantial Completion: Remove dust or other foreign matter from component

surfaces; clean finishes in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Replace metal wall panels and framing members that have been damaged or have

deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.





SITE FURNITURE 12 93 00 - 1

SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNITURE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide site furnishings and installation including anchoring assemblies as indicated on the

drawings and specified herein for:

1. Benches

2. Bike Racks

3. Litter Receptacle

4. Lighted Bollard

5. Security Bollard

B. Related Work

1. Section 31 00 00 – Earthwork

2. Section 32 13 00 – Portland Cement Concrete Paving

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 01 specifications.

B. Prior to fabrication, Contractor shall submit for approval four sets of prints for the site furniture

elements.

C. Prints shall indicate location, manufacturer, materials, finish, color, connection details,

dimensions, and relationship to adjacent materials.

D. Contractor shall submit foundation design shop drawings for approval for the SECURITY

BOLLARD.

E. Contractor shall submit operation/maintenance recommendations, spare parts, manuals and

warrantees to the Owner.

1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Provide blocking and lateral support during transport and storage of site furniture units which is

clean, non-staining, and will not cause harm to exposed finishes.

B. Protect edges of exposed members to prevent staining, chipping, or spalling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BENCHES

A. BENCH design based on “DASH BENCH”, by Forms and Surfaces. Model number #SBDSH-

72C with the following characteristics:





1. Mounting: Surface-mount

2. Finish: Slate Texture for frame

3. Other manufacturer’s products will be considered subject to meeting the design and

performance characteristics described above and indicated on the drawings.

2.2 BIKE RACKS

A. BIKE RACK design based on “TRIO BIKE RACK”, by Forms and Surfaces. Model number

#SKTRO-TD

1. Mounting: Surface-mount

2. Finish: Slate texture



2.3 LITTER RECEPTACLE

A. Litter receptacle design based on “Bevel Litter Receptacle”, by Forms and Surfaces. Model

number #SLBVL-122A

1. Mounting: Surface-mount,

2. Finish: Slate texture for frame

3. Other: Include liner with tensioned bag straps


performance characteristics described above and indicated on the drawings

2.4 LIGHTED BOLLARD

A. LIGHTED BOLLARD design based on “LIGHT COLUMN BOLLARD, SERIES 600”, by

Forms and Surfaces. Model number #LBLCO-604-LED

1. Mounting: Anchored with base plate to concrete footing

2. Shield: 180° standard shield, no design

3. Finish: Standard stainless-steel finish



2.5 SECURITY BOLLARD

A. SECURITY BOLLARD design based on “LIGHT COLUMN BOLLARD, SERIES 600”, by

Forms and Surfaces. Model number #LBLCO-604-N SEC (Non-Lighted)

1. Mounting: Direct bury

2. Finish: Standard stainless-steel finish







PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. All surfaces shall be properly prepared and level prior to the installation and placement of site

furniture. Contractor shall coordinate placement of site furnishings with work of other trades.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Each piece of site furniture shall be installed and placed in accordance with manufacturer's

standards and specifications and in accordance with the plans. Any changes from

manufacturer's specifications must be approved by the Owner's Representative.

B. Surface mounted furnishings shall be securely mounted to concrete paving with tamperproof

anchorage assemblies.

C. All site furniture shall be installed plumb and level.

3.3 CLEANING

A. The area shall be kept clean at all times, and following installation, all materials and debris shall

be removed from the area.

B. Marred areas on metal finishes shall be touched-up with primer and two coats of paint.

C. Exposed mounting hardware shall be touched-up with primer and two coats of approved paint.

D. Acid solutions, steel or any other wool, or any other harsh abrasives shall not be used.

END OF SECTION

ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 1




SECTION 12 2413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Manually operated roller shades with single rollers.

2. Motor-operated roller shades with single rollers.


1. Section 06 1000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller

shades and accessories.

2. Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing the perimeters of installation accessories for

light-blocking shades with a sealant.




and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband

materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

1. Motor-Operated Shades: Include details of installation and diagrams for power, signal,

and control wiring.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.

1. Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark interior face of material if

applicable.

D. Product Schedule: For roller shades.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of shadeband material, for tests performed by a qualified

testing agency.






A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Roller Shades: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color,

and shadeband material indicated, but no fewer than two units.




A. Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and

location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in

spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature conditions are

maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed

units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from

Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS, WS-1



1. Hunter Douglas Contract.

2. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

3. Springs Window Fashions; SWFcontract.









B. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: Continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that stops

shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.

1. Bead Chains: Nickel-plated metal.

a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.

b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.

c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, sill mounted.

2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller shade

weight and for lifting heavy roller shades.

a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 10 lb or for shades as recommended

by manufacturer, whichever criterion is more stringent.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses

required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands

indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and

idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.

1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade.

2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.

3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting into integral channel in tube.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller

assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions

indicated.

E. Shadebands:

1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric as indicated by manufacturer’s designation on

Drawings.2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.

b. Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and

operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

a. Shape: L-shaped.

b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband

assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches.

2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.

3. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at

bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to wall clip

without fasteners.





a. Closure-Panel Width: 2 inches.

4. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 MOTOR-OPERATED, SINGLE-ROLLER SHADES, WS-2



1. Hunter Douglas Contract.

2. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.

3. Springs Window Fashions; SWFcontract.

B. Motorized Operating Systems: Provide factory-assembled, shade-operator systems of size and

capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for conditions indicated,

complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, power disconnect switch,

enclosures protecting controls and operating parts, and accessories required for reliable

operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors. Coordinate

operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with building electrical system.

1. Electrical Components: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.2. Electric Motor: Manufacturer's standard tubular, enclosed in rollers.

a. Electrical Characteristics: 110-V ac.

b. Maximum Total Shade Width: As required to operate roller shades indicated.

c. Maximum Shade Drop: As required to operate roller shades indicated.

d. Maximum Weight Capacity: As required to operate roller shades indicated.

3. Remote Control: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed or

flush mounting. Provide the following for remote-control activation of shades:

a. Individual Switch Control Station: Momentary-contact, wall-switch-operated

control station with open, close, and center off functions.

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Crank-Operator Override: Crank and gearbox operate shades in event of power outage or

motor failure.

5. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to stop

shade movement automatically at fully raised and fully lowered positions.

C. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses

required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands

indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and

idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shades for service.

1. Roller Drive-End Location: Right side of interior face of shade, unless otherwise

indicated.2. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back (exterior face) of roller.









3. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.

D. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller

mounting configuration, roller assemblies, operating mechanisms, installation accessories, and

installation locations and conditions indicated.

E. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to

three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.

1. Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.

2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.

a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.

b. Color and Finish: As indicated by manufacturer’s designation.

F. Installation Accessories:

1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and

operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.

a. Shape: L-shaped.

b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband

assembly when shade is fully open, but not less than 3 inches.

2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.

3. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at

bottom of site-constructed ceiling recesses or pockets and for snap-in attachment to wall

clip without fasteners.

a. Closure-Panel Width: 2 inches.

4. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as

shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of

aligning shadebands with channels at tops.

5. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at

bottoms of shades when shades are closed.

6. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS

A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified

testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.

1. Source: Roller shade manufacturer.

2. Type: Woven polyester and PVC-coated polyester.

3. Weave: Basketweave.

4. Roll Width: 48 inches (1229 mm).

5. Orientation on Shadeband: Up the bolt.





6. Openness Factor: 2-3 percent.

7. Color: As indicated by manufacturer’s designation.

2.4 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including

requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74

deg F (23 deg C):

1. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between

shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical

separations between openings.

C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible,

except as follows:

1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4,

provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure

shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion

of the material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, locations of connections to

building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's


1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 2 inches (51 mm) to

interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.

B. Electrical Connections: Connect motor-operated roller shades to building electrical system.

C. Roller Shade Locations: As indicated on Drawings.





3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or

malfunction throughout entire operational range.


A. Clean roller shade surfaces, after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and

Installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial

Completion.

C. Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,

before time of Substantial Completion.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades.

END OF SECTION

SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 3661.16 - 1




SECTION 12 3661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Solid surface material countertops.

2. Solid surface material backsplashes.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,

methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.

1. Show locations and details of joints.2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches square.




A. Maintenance Data: For solid surface material countertops to include in maintenance manuals.

Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses,

and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Fabricator's Qualifications: Engage a qualified fabricator, acceptable to the Architect, that is an

AWI-member firm; that has not less than 10 years' experience in the custom fabrication and

installation of architectural woodwork comparable to that indicated, on not less than 5 projects,

acceptable to the Architect, that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated;

that has production facility with capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the

Work; and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service

performance.





B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for

fabrication and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings.




A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base

cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS, SS-1

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork

Standards for grades of countertops indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other

requirements.

B. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with IFSA 2-01.

1. Products and Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide solid

surfacing materials matching Architect's samples, which have been selected from the

product lines and manufacturers indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings, or

comparable products as approved by Architect.

C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch

sanded.

2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and

to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Premium.

B. Countertops: 3/4-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.

C. Backsplashes: 3/4-inch-thick, solid surface material.





D. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid surface

material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

E. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field.

1. Joint Locations: Not within 18 inches of a sink and not where a countertop section less

than 36 inches long would result, unless unavoidable.

F. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or

pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and

bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch into fixture opening.

2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers,

and similar items.


A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 9200 "JointSealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive solid surface material countertops and conditions under which

countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 1/4 inch maximum. Do not exceed

1/64-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of

countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces

and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's




Holabird & Root, LLC Project No. 15849written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire

surface.

C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets.

Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's

written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop,

form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth,

remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops

adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

1. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are

properly aligned and joints are of specified width.

F. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive. Mask

areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

G. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes

adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Fasten by screwing through backing. Predrill

holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent

damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to

finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent

snipping.

I. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."

END OF SECTION

ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 4813 - 1




SECTION 12 4813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient entrance mats.

2. Surface mounted frames.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete to receive floor mats and frames.




and profiles, and finishes for floor mats and frames.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Items penetrating floor mats and frames, including door control devices.

2. Divisions between mat sections.

C. Samples: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes:

1. Floor Mat: Assembled sections of floor mat.

2. Frame Members: Sample of each type and color.


A. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Resilient-Tile Entrance Mats: Full-size tile units equal to 2 percent of amount installed,

but no fewer than 10 units.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES, GENERAL

A. Structural Performance: Provide roll-up rail mats and frames capable of withstanding the


1. Uniform floor load of 300 lbf/sq. ft..

2. Wheel load of 350 lb per wheel.

B. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards

for Accessible Design".

2.2 RESILIENT ENTRANCE MATS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide resilient entrance

mats as indicated on the Finish Schedule on the Drawings or comparable product as approved

by Architect.

B. Carpet-Type Mats: Carpet bonded to 1/8- to 1/4-inch-thick, flexible vinyl backing to form mats

3/8 or 7/16 inch thick with nonraveling edges.

1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry

colors.2. Mat Size: As indicated.

2.3 RESILIENT-TILE ENTRANCE MATS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide resilient tile

entrance mats as indicated on the Finish Schedule on the Drawings or comparable product as


B. Carpet-Type Tiles: Carpet bonded to 1/8- to 1/4-inch-thick, flexible vinyl backing to form mats

3/8 or 7/16 inch thick with nonraveling edges.

1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry

colors.

2. Tile Size: As indicated.

2.4 FRAMES

A. Surface-Mounted Frames:

1. Tapered Frames: Taperedaluminum frame members, not less than 2 inches wide with

welded mitered corners.

a. Aluminum Color: Mill finish.





2.5 CONCRETE FILL AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Provide concrete fill and grout equivalent in strength to cast-in-place concrete slabs for recessed

and surface mounted mats and frames. Use aggregate no larger than one-third fill thickness.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise

indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's

recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where

joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter

corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units

without joints.

B. Surface-Mounted Frames: As indicated for permanent surface-mounted installation, complete

with corner connectors, splice plates or connecting pins, and postinstalled expansion anchors.

C. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum frames that contact cementitious material with

manufacturer's standard protective coating.


A. Mill finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes,

minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install surface-type units to comply with manufacturer's written instructions; coordinate with

entrance locations and traffic patterns.

1. Anchor fixed surface-type frame members to floor with devices spaced as recommended

by manufacturer.





3.3 PROTECTION

A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or

fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection

until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION




ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 142100 - 1

SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electric traction passenger elevators.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for purchase contract for elevators negotiated by Owner and

assigned to Contractor.

2. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary use of elevators for

construction purposes.

3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for the following:

a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets.

b. Divider beams.

c. Hoist beams.

d. Structural-steel shapes for subsills.

e. Pit ladders.

f. Cants made from steel sheet in hoistways.

4. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for field painting of hoistway entrance doors and

frames.

5. Section 142113 "Electric Traction Freight Elevators" for electric traction elevators used

primarily for carrying freight and inaccessible to the general public.

6. Section 221429 "Sump Pumps" for sump pumps, sumps, and sump covers in elevator

pits.

7. Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for smoke detectors in

elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation, for heat detectors in shafts and

machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment on or before sprinkler

activation, and for connection to elevator controllers.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Elevator Car Allowances: Provide finished passenger elevator cars under the Elevator Car

Allowance specified in Section 012100 "Allowances." Allowance includes the following:

1. Car wall finishes including trim.





2. Car floor finishes.

3. Car ceiling finishes.

4. Car door finishes.

5. Hoistway door and frame finishes.

6. Car light fixtures.

7. Handrails.

8. Cutouts and other provisions for installing elevator signal equipment in cars.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section.

B. Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is also used to carry freight.


A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and

similar information. Include Product Data for car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and operation,

control, and signal systems.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each

landing, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and

locations of equipment.

2. Include large-scale layout of car-control station and standby power operation control

panel.

3. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of

support, and maximum and average power demands.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For exposed car, hoistway door and frame, and signal equipment

finishes; 3-inch- (75-mm-) square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch (100-mm) lengths of

running trim members.



B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for elevator equipment, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.





3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and

machine room layout and dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, and electrical service as shown

and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and


1. Submit manufacturer's or Installer's standard operation and maintenance manual,

according to ASME A17.1/CSA B44, including diagnostic and repair information

available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel.

B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities

having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to

Owner, in the form of a standard maintenance agreement [minimum one year], starting on date

initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for

agreement period and for future renewal options.

D. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to

Owner with terms, conditions, and obligations as set forth in, and in same form as, a "Draft of

Elevator Maintenance Agreement," starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded.


A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained

and approved by manufacturer.


A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective

packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry

location.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of inserts, sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors,

and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish





templates, inserts, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation

instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of work specified in other Sections that relates to electric

traction elevators including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills;

electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine

rooms.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator

work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including

excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual

deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive

maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and

unsatisfactory conditions.

2. Warranty Period: one or more year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELEVATOR MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EcoSpace™

traction elevators by KONE, Inc. (www.kone.com) or a comparable product by one of the

following:

1. Otis Elevator Co.

2. ThyssenKrupp Elevator

B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators, including freight and hydraulic elevators specified in

other Sections, from single manufacturer.

1. Major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door

operators, car frames, cars, and entrances, shall be manufactured by single manufacturer.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements for accessible elevators in the United

States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.

http://www.kone.com/





2.3 ELEVATORS

A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise

indicated, manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator

systems and as required for complete system.

B. Elevator Description:

1. Elevator Number: P101 per Drawings.

2. Retain gearless type below for speeds of 500 fpm (2.5 m/s) and higher; for speeds up to

450 fpm (2.3 m/s) geared type may be used, although machine-room-less elevators with

gearless machines are becoming more typical for speeds under 500 fpm (2.5 m/s). Verify

availability of geared units before retaining.

3. Machine Type: Gearless traction.

4. Rated Load: 3000 lb (1362 kg)

5. Rated Speed: 150 fpm (0.762 m/s)

6. "Operation System" Subparagraph below is defined in ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

7. Operation System: Selective-collective automatic operation.

8. Auxiliary Operations:

a. Standby power operation.

b. Standby-powered lowering.

c. Battery-powered automatic evacuation.

d. Automatic dispatching of loaded car.

e. Nuisance-call cancel.

f. Loaded-car bypass.

g. Distributed parking.

h. Off-peak operation.

i. Automatic operation of lights and ventilation fans.

j. Priority service at all floors.

k. Independent service for service elevator.

9. Security Features: Review requirements with owner and provide one or more of the

following as directed: Card-reader operation; Keyswitch operation; Keypad operation;

Car-to-lobby feature.

10. Car Enclosures:

a. Inside Width: 80 inches (2032 mm) from side wall to side wall.

b. Inside Depth: 60 inches (1524 mm) from back wall to front wall (return panels).

c. Inside Height: Not less than 96 inches (2438 mm) to underside of ceiling.

d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish

e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish

f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic Laminate per finish schedule.

g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish

h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish

i. Door Sills: Nickel silver.

j. Ceiling: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with 6 downlight fixtures and emergency

access panel with concealed hinges.

k. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides

and rear of car.





l. Floor: Manufacturer's standard carpet – submit full color range for selection by

Architect.

11. Hoistway Entrances:

a. Width: 42 inches (1067 mm).

b. Height: 84 inches (2134 mm).

c. Type: Single-speed center opening.

d. Frames at all floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

e. Doors at all floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

f. Sills at all floors: Nickel silver.

12. Hall Fixtures at all floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

13. Hall Fixtures at Other Floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

14. Additional Requirements:

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame

made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

b. Provide hooks for protective pads in all cars complete set(s) of full-height

protective pads.

2.4 TRACTION SYSTEMS

A. Elevator Machines: Variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines or

variable-voltage dc-type hoisting machines and solid-state power converters.

1. Provide regenerative system that complies with the IgCC.

2. Limit total harmonic distortion of regenerated power to 5 percent per IEEE 519.

3. Provide means for absorbing regenerated power when elevator system is operating on

standby power.

4. Provide line filters or chokes to prevent electrical peaks or spikes from feeding back into

building power system.

B. Fluid for Hydraulic Buffers: Fire-resistant fluid.

C. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for

installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device installation is

specified in another Section.

D. Machine Beams: Provide steel framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector

sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for

materials and fabrication.

E. Car Frame and Platform: Bolted- or welded-steel units.

F. Guides: Roller guides or polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides. Provide guides at top

and bottom of car and counterweight frames.





2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required to

provide type of operation indicated.

B. Auxiliary Operations:

1. Single-Car Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a

designated floor and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on

standby power, either for return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control

panel located on the second floor per the Drawings. Manual operation causes automatic

operation to cease.

2. Single-Car Standby-Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, if car is at a

floor, it remains at that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it

is lowered to the next floor below, opens its doors, and shuts down.

3. Single-Car Battery-Powered Automatic Evacuation: If power fails and car is at a floor, it

remains at that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it moves to

the next floor above or below, opens its doors, and shuts down. System includes

rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system.

4. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated

capacity, doors begin closing.

5. Nuisance-Call Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while car load is less than

a predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calls and

predetermined weight can be adjusted.

6. Loaded-Car Bypass: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, car responds

only to car calls, not to hall calls.

7. Distributed Parking: When cars are not required for response to calls, they are parked

with doors closed and distributed in predetermined zones throughout the building. One

zone shall include the main floor and adjacent floors; remaining floors shall be divided

into approximately equal zones.

8. Off-Peak Operation: During periods of low traffic, half of the elevators in a group shall

be taken out of service and switched to low power mode.

9. Independent Service: Keyswitch in car-control station removes car from group operation

and allows it to respond only to car calls. Key cannot be removed from keyswitch when

car is in independent service. When in independent service, doors close only in response

to door close button.

10. Automatic Operation of Lights and Fan: When elevator is stopped and unoccupied with

doors closed, lighting, ventilation fan, and cab displays are de-energized after five

minutes and are re-energized before car doors open.

C. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service.

1. Card-Reader Operation: System uses card readers at car-control stations to authorize

calls. Security system determines which landings and at what times calls require

authorization by card reader. Provide required conductors in traveling cable and panel in

machine room for interconnecting card readers, other security access system equipment,

and elevator controllers. Allow space for card reader in car or Provide stripe-swipe card

reader integral with each car-control station.





a. Security access system equipment is specified in Section 281300 "Access

Control."

2. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches

at car-control stations. Key is removable only in deactivated position.

3. Car-to-Lobby Feature: Feature, activated by keyswitch at main lobby, that causes car to

return immediately to lobby and open doors for inspection. On deactivation by keyswitch,

calls registered before keyswitch activation are completed and normal operation is

resumed.

2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more

microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of

one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time,

through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to

close at reduced kinetic energy.

2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with nonremovable wall panels, with removable

car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.

1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where

required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Decorative high-pressure type, complying with NEMA

LD3, Type GP-50, nominal 0.050” laminate thickness and manufacturer's standard

protective edge trim. Panels shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less, when tested

according to ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as indicated on

Finish Schedule.

2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated by laminating

stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled or powder-coated steel doors

using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.

3. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.

4. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.

5. Stainless-Steel Panel Ceiling: Flush panels, with LED downlights in each panel. Align

ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels.

6. Light Fixture Efficiency: Not less than 35 lumens/W.

7. Ventilation Fan Efficiency: Not less than 3.0 cfm/W.





2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame

hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size

and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with

reinforced head sections.

B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with

NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as possible according to

NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

1. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours with 30-minute temperature rise of 450 deg F (250

deg C).

C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.

2. Star of Life Symbol: Identify emergency elevators with star of life symbol, not less than 3

inches (76 mm) high, on both jambs of hoistway door frames.

3. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel

sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled or

powder-coated steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without

telegraphing or oil-canning.

4. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges.

5. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.

6. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous

grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.

2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call

has been fulfilled. Provide vandal-resistant buttons and lighted elements illuminated with LEDs.

B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed or semirecessed car-control

stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols and

Braille.

2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with car-control

station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Swing-Return Car-Control Stations: Provide car-control stations mounted on rear of hinged

return panel adjacent to car door and with buttons, switches, controls, and indicator lights

projecting through return panel but substantially flush with face of return panel.





1. Mark buttons and switches for function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille.

2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with car-control

station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

D. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible

signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset

use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and

battery backup power supply.

E. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in

each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone

communication service specified in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System."

F. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above

car door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that

car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if

not provided in car-control station.

G. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing.

1. Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units.

2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel.

3. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating direction of travel or

destination as required by system. Provide a signaling system to verify floor selection,

where destination registration is required, and to direct passengers to appropriate car.

a. Provide a means for passengers to indicate that they have disabilities so control

system can allow extra room in assigned car.

b. Provide for connecting units that require destination registration to building

security access system so a card reader can be used to register calls.

4. Provide telephone jack in each unit for firefighters' two-way telephone communication

service specified in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System."

H. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings.

Provide one of the following:

1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.

2. Units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall and with

illuminated elements projecting from faceplate for ease of angular viewing.

3. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame.

4. Units mounted in both car door jambs.

I. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and

direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.

1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on cars.





J. Hall Position Indicators: Provide illuminated, digital-display-type position indicators, located

above hoistway entrance at ground floor. Provide units with flat faceplate and with body of unit

recessed in wall.

1. Integrate ground-floor hall lanterns with hall position indicators.

K. Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by

ASME A17.1/CSA B44, where indicated. Adjacent to switches, provide illuminated signal that

indicates when normal power supply has failed. For each elevator, provide illuminated signals

that indicate when they are operational and when they are at the designated emergency return

level with doors open.

L. Fire-Command-Center Annunciator Panel: Provide panel containing illuminated position

indicators for each elevator, clearly labeled with elevator designation; include illuminated signal

that indicates when elevator is operational and when it is at the designated emergency return

level with doors open. Provide standby power elevator selector switch(es), as required by

ASME A17.1/CSA B44, adjacent to position indicators. Provide illuminated signal that

indicates when normal power supply has failed.

M. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with

text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire,

elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-

button station unless otherwise indicated.

2.10 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte

finish.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

G. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500 or UNS No. C77600.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine hoistways,





hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and

examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted

connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment,

inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for

workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.

C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to

minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system.

D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.

E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide

rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills

and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable

dimension at each landing.

F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch (3 mm), up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.

G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink,

nonmetallic grout.

H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center

of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.

2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.

3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor.


A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use

(either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by

ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.

B. Operating Test: Load one elevator of each type, capacity, speed, and travel distance to rated

capacity and operate continuously for 30 minutes over full travel distance, stopping at each





level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record temperature rise of elevator machine

during 30-minute test period. Record failure to perform as required.

C. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that

tests are to be performed on elevators.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator. Comply with

the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes:

1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished

car, to protect finishes from damage.

2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames.

3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces.

4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to

protect elevator and elevator equipment.

5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.

6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive

maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,

cleanup, and adjustment as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and

capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and

installation of original equipment.

7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of

correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required

repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.


A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall

include minimum twelve (12) months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator

Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at

rated speed and capacity. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement

parts and supplies.

1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours.

2. Perform emergency callback service during normal working hours with response time of

two hours or less.

3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service with response time

of two hours or less.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION


operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s).





B. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial

Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that

operation systems and devices are functioning properly.





ELECTRIC TRACTION FREIGHT ELEVATORS 142113 - 1

SECTION 142113 - ELECTRIC TRACTION FREIGHT ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electric traction freight elevators.


1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for the following:

a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets.

b. Divider beams.

c. Hoist beams.

d. Structural-steel shapes for subsills and hoistway door frames.

e. Pit ladders.

f. Cants made from steel sheet in hoistways.

2. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for field painting of hoistway entrance doors and

frames.

3. Section 142100 “Electric Traction Elevators.”

4. Section 221429 "Sump Pumps" for sump pumps, sumps, and sump covers in elevator

pits.

5. Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for smoke detectors in

elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation and heat detectors in shafts and

machine rooms to disconnect power from elevator equipment before sprinkler activation

and for connection to elevator controllers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section.


A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and

similar information.

B. Shop Drawings:





1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each

landing, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and

locations of equipment.

2. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of

support, and maximum and average power demands.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection.



B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For elevator equipment, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and

control closet layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service including

standby power generator, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being

provided.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and


1. Submit manufacturer's/installer's standard operation and maintenance manual, according

to ASME A17.1 including diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's

and Installer's maintenance personnel.

B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities

having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to

Owner, in the form of a standard one-year minimum maintenance agreement, starting on date

initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for

agreement period and for future renewal options.

D. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to

Owner with terms, conditions, and obligations as set forth in, and in same form as, "Draft of





Elevator Maintenance Agreement" at end of this Section, starting on date initial maintenance

service is concluded.


A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained

and approved by manufacturer.


A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective

packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry

location.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and

other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish

templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and

deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to electric traction freight elevators

including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and

electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace elevator work that

fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including

excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual

deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive

maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and

unsatisfactory conditions.

2. Warranty Period: Minimum 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EcoSpace™

traction elevators by KONE, Inc. (www.kone.com) or a comparable product by one of the

following:

http://www.kone.com/





1. Otis Elevator Co.

2. ThyssenKrupp Elevator

B. Source Limitations: Obtain freight elevators from single manufacturer.

1. Major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door

operators, car frames, cars, and entrances, shall be manufactured by single manufacturer.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the United States Access Board's

ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.

2.3 FREIGHT ELEVATORS

A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard electric traction freight elevator systems.

Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in

standard elevator systems and as required for complete system.

B. Elevator Description:

1. Elevator Number: F101 per Drawings.

2. Elevator Type: Gearless traction.

3. Machine Location: Hoistway; no machine room is provided.

4. Rated Load: 5000 lb (2270 kg).

5. Freight Loading Class: Class A.

6. Rated Speed: 150 fpm (0.762 m/s)

7. Operation System: Single automatic

8. Auxiliary Operations:

a. Standby power operation.

b. Battery-powered automatic evacuation.

c. Earthquake Emergency Operation: Comply with requirements in

ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

d. Load-weighing device.

e. Automatic operation of lights and ventilation fans.

9. Security Feature: Review requirements with owner and provide one or more of the

following as directed: Card-reader or Keyswitch operation.

10. Car Enclosures:

a. Inside Width: 66 3/16 inches (1681 mm).

b. Inside Depth: 105 3/16 inches (2672 mm).

c. Ceiling Height: Not less than 96 inches (2438 mm.





d. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish

e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish

f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic Laminate per finish schedule

g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish

h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish

i. Door Sills: Nickel silver.

j. Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with 6 downlight fixtures and emergency access

panel with concealed hinges.

k. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides

and rear of car.

l. Floor prepared to receive resilient flooring specified in Section 09 6516 "Resilient

Sheet Flooring".

11. Hoistway Entrances:

a. Width: 48 inches (1219 mm).

b. Height: 84 inches (2134 mm).

c. Door Type: Two-speed.

d. Frames at all floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

e. Doors at all floors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

f. Sills at all floors: Nickel silver.

g. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours with 30-minute temperature rise of 450 deg F

(250 deg C).

12. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

13. Auxiliary Hall Stations: Provide additional pendant-mounted, hall push-button stations

where indicated.

2.4 TRACTION SYSTEMS

A. Elevator Machines: Variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines or

variable-voltage dc-type hoisting machines and solid-state power converters.

1. Provide regenerative system that complies with IgCC.

2. Limit total harmonic distortion of regenerated power to 5 percent per IEEE 519.

3. Provide means for absorbing regenerated power when elevator system is operating on

standby power.

4. Provide line filters or chokes to prevent electrical peaks or spikes from feeding back into

building power system from solid-state converters.

B. Fluid for Hydraulic Buffers: If using hydraulic buffers, use only fire-resistant fluid.

C. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for

installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device installation is

specified in another Section.

D. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves

from the building structure. Comply with Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for materials and

fabrication.





E. Car Frame and Platform: Welded or bolted -steel units.

1. Provide special heavy-duty units where indicated for power truck loading, designed to

withstand impacts and wheel loadings indicated.

F. Guides: Roller guides or polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides. Provide guides at top

and bottom of car and counterweight frames.

2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required to

provide type of operation indicated.

B. Single-Car Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a

designated floor and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on standby

power by a switch in control panel located on the second floor per the Drawings.

C. Single-Car Battery-Powered Automatic Evacuation: If power fails and car is at a floor, it

remains at that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it moves to the

next floor above or below, opens its doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable

battery and automatic recharging system.

D. Load-Weighing Device: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, a signal lamp

lights and remains lit in the car-control station; when car load exceeds rated capacity, car does

not respond to car or hall calls.

E. Security Features: Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service.

1. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches

at car-control stations and hall push-button stations. Key is removable only in deactivated

position in either position.

2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with a uniform array of 36 or more

microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of

one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time,

through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to

close at reduced kinetic energy.

2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide car enclosures as indicated, including ventilation, lighting, finishes, access

doors, thresholds, trim, and accessories. Fabricate with recesses and cutouts for signal

equipment.





1. Provide power door operators with linkages for hoistway door operation.

2. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where

required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Decorative high-pressure type, complying with NEMA

LD3, Type GP-50, nominal 0.050” laminate thickness and manufacturer's standard

protective edge trim. Panels shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less, when tested

according to ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as indicated on

Finish Schedule.

2. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated by laminating

stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled or powder-coated steel doors

using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.

3. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.

4. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.

5. Stainless-Steel Panel Ceiling: Flush panels, with LED downlights in each panel. Align

ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels.

6. Light Fixture Efficiency: Not less than 35 lumens/W.

7. Ventilation Fan Efficiency: Not less than 3.0 cfm/W.

2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide hoistway entrance doors of type indicated below, with

truckable sill bars and resilient safety meeting-rail gaskets.

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated,

hollow-metal, door-and-frame hoistway entrances. Provide self-supporting frames with

reinforced head sections.

B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with

NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close-to-neutral

pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

C. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Metal Door Panels: Constructed of metal sheets, flush on room side, welded and

reinforced in steel framing with vertical reinforcing spaced not more than 24 inches (610

mm) o.c. Fabricate panel faces from metal sheet, of metal indicated, not less than 0.097

inch (2.5 mm) thick.

2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call

has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements of acrylic or other permanent, non-yellowing

translucent plastic.

B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car-control station. Mount adjacent to car

door unless otherwise indicated.





1. Mark buttons and switches for function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille.

2. Mount controls at heights complying with the United States Access Board's ADA-ABA

Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.

C. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible

signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset

use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and

battery backup power supply.

D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in

each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone

communication service specified in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System."

E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above

car door or above car-control station.

F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button station at each landing as indicated.

1. Provide single-button stations with position indicator.

G. Provide telephone jack in each unit for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service

specified in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System"

2.10 FINISH MATERIALS

A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors,

hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte

finish.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, with G60 (Z180) zinc

coating (galvanized) or A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron-alloy coating (galvannealed).

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

F. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

G. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

H. Rolled Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M.

I. Rolled Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Examine hoistways,

hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and

examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted

connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment,

inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for

workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.

C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to

minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system.

D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.

E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide

rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills

and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable

dimension at each landing.

F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch (3 mm), up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.

G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink,

nonmetallic grout.

H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center

of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.

2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.

3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor.






A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use

(either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by

ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.

B. Operating Test: Load elevator to rated capacity and operate continuously for 30 minutes over

full travel distance, stopping at each level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record

temperature rise of elevator machine during 30-minute test period. Record failure to perform as

required.

C. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that

tests are to be performed on elevators.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator. Comply with

the following requirements for each elevator used for construction purposes:

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect

elevator and elevator equipment.

2. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.

3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive

maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,

cleanup, and adjustment as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and

capacity. Provide the same parts and supplies as those used in the manufacture and

installation of original equipment.

4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of

correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required

repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION


operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s).

B. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial

Completion and not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that

operation systems and devices are functioning properly.


A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall

include minimum twelve (12) months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator

Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation. Parts

and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.





1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours.

2. Perform emergency callback service during normal working hours with response time of

two hours or less.

3. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service with response time

of two hours or less.
